Home

Scrivener 1.8 for Microsoft Windows

1. Double click Select word Can be used in conjunction with dragging to select a range by word z Triple click Select paragraph Can be used in conjunction with dragging to select a range by paragraph 15 2 2 Deletion Simple character deletion can be performed with the backspace key to delete the charac ter prior to the caret position The delete sometimes abbreviated to del key will delete the character after the caret position 15 2 EDITING BASICS 133 Delete to beginning of current word Ctrl backspace z Delete to end of current word Cirl delete 15 2 3 Spell Checking Spell checking in Scrivener can be accomplished either as you type or after you are done writing a section Depending on your preferred way of working you ll want to set how this works in the Auto Correction options tab section B 6 where you will find other options such as which language to use the ability to administrate your personal words and whether or not Scrivener should try and fix common typos for you as you write By default Scrivener will highlight misspelled words as you write If you would prefer to not be alerted to misspellings while writing you can defer the spell check process for later When you are ready to spell check a document right click anywhere in the document and select Spelling Spelling from that menu A familiar floating window will let you step through the document error by error fixing mistakes and adding unique wo
2. New in 1 7 Additionally with an image selected in the editor you can click and drag the resize handle in the lower right corner to visually resize the image If you hold down the Shift key prior to clicking and dragging the original shape of the image will be unlocked letting you freely resize both its height and width It is important to note that resizing images in the editor is an output rather than an aesthetic decision When an image is resized in the editor it will be directed to use that size in the final output as well If you find the graphics you are using are too large and are getting in the way of writing you may consider using placeholder thumbnails instead Using linked images is ideal for working this way as you can swap out the full size images on the disk prior to compiling When using MultiMarkdown inline images and linked images for that matter will be converted to MMD syntax and the images themselves will be gathered into the compile folder for you 15 5 1 Working with Print Ready Images If you ve been provided full size print ready graphics for publication it is often best to not embed them directly into your document Embedding images in the document is good for small placeholders but since the images are saved into the RTF file itself adding very large high resolution graphics to your files may slow down Scrivener s ability to load and save your file while you work on it 15 5 2 Linked Inline Imag
3. Gender select one option here The default is either gender 20 3 THE NAME GENERATOR 203 ea First amp Last Name Origin for each name you can select to pull from one particular region language or randomly select from the entire database Number of names to generate controls how many names are produced in the list to the left ea First amp Last Name constraints These two sets of controls will enact constraints on the types of names that will be generated Each has the following options Start letter with End letter with End and start with From the second drop down menu you can either select a letter Roman alphabet only or set it to use any letter at the top a Number last names produces names like Otis Cowie Milburn when set to two by example Display switch between showing full names and first or last names alone The list will update as you make changes to the options You can click the Generate Names button at any time to see an entirely new list of names The Reset all to Defaults button will put all options above back to default To select names you like click on them in the list and then click the Add Selected to Shortlist button below the name list This will copy the name to the shortlist at the bottom of the window Once you get a list of names you wish to save click the Copy Shortlist to Clipboard button and it will be safe to close the window and paste the names wherev
4. A 3 View Menu The View menu contains commands related to changing the way documents are viewed allowing you to show and hide various elements navigate between views and customise the way information in the current project is displayed A rule of thumb is if you want to change the way something in your project looks or acts and it s not a setting in the main options chances are it is in the View menu View Modes are various ways in which you can view the presentation of multiple items in the editor For and overview of how view modes work see View Modes section 5 2 When a container is selected the following menu command names will be prefixed by Groups as indicating that this will not only change the view mode but set it for future use as well Document Scrivenings Cirl 1 If multiple items are selected in the editor displays the current editor as a Scrivenings text editing session showing the text of each docu ment as if they were a single file Also sets your preferred view mode to Scrivenings See also Editing Multiple Documents section 15 8 Note this option is only useful if the editor is displaying documents media will not be mixed into an Scrivenings session If a single item is selected in the editor this menu item will be labeled Document and switch the editor focus to its text or media view Corkboard Ctrl 2 Display the current editor as a corkboard If the selection is a con tainer its immediate chi
5. Layout Show Hide Footer View This is the most dynamic part of the editor in that it will change depending on the type of document visible and the current editor mode When a text document is being viewed for instance it will display the word and character count along with a drop down menu for changing the text scale and a button for setting document targets In script mode it will display scripting hints and the elements menu When media is displayed it shows the current playing time This section will cover the tools available to the standard text editor For information on the various other document footer bars see Viewing Media in the Editor section 14 3 For details on how to use the footer bar in script mode see Scriptwriting chap ter 19 Read the chapters on The Corkboard section 12 1 and The Outliner section 12 2 for details on how to use the footer bar in those view modes 14 2 1 Text Zoom You can make the text in the main editor larger or smaller without changing the font by using the text scaling pop up in the left side of the footer bar See Scaling Text subsec tion 15 3 1 for more information 14 2 2 Quick Text Statistics In the middle of the footer the current word and character account of the text you are editing will be displayed in real time as you type This counter works for all visible text even if it would otherwise not be compiled and will aggregate all text together when using
6. To aid in typing in em dashes this op tion will substitute two hyphens as you type Replace triple periods with ellipses The special single character ellipses will be used instead of three full stops to improve readability Disable smart quote em dash and ellipsis substitution in script mode The three op tions above this one will be ignored in script mode Enable Additional Substitutions Turns on the custom substitution engine A large number of common text to symbol substitutions have been added for your con venience You can add your own or remove ones you do not like by clicking the Edit Substitutions button B Z Keyboard The Keyboard options tab is where you modify application shortcuts or hot keys for individual menu items in Scrivener If you find a built in shortcut to be awkward to press on your particular keyboard or you just don t like a particular arrangement you can modify them all here To find a shortcut either navigate through the tree view to find the menu sub menu or even sub sub menu wherein the command is found or use the Filter search bar at the top to rapidly located a menu title if you know its name You can search for any of the text that you see in the table so feel free to search for the descriptive name actual menu name or even its shortcut This can thus serve as a convenient reverse look up if you pressed a shortcut by accident and don t know what it did To change a sho
7. Highlight Yellow command Keyboard shortcuts will use the following terms z Alt The Alternate key is generally labelled the Alt key on keyboards Some lap tops only have one Alt key on the left side and most international keyboards have an Alt Gr key on the right side of the space bar Use the left key for shortcuts Cirl Control is usually the leftmost modifier key in the spacebar row abbreviated to Ctrl with a copy on the right side of the spacebar as well e Shift The Shift keys are rarely used by themselves in shortcuts but are often used in combination with other modifier keys Meta Otherwise known as the Windows key this is the modifier key which has the Microsoft Windows logo printed on it When a keyboard shortcut requires a combination of modifier keys they will be printed together Example Ctrl Shift X which matches File Export gt Files means you should hold down both of these modifier keys and then tap the X key on your keyboard and let go of all three The hyphen is used to separate the modifier keys from the target key and is not meant to be included in the shortcut itself Sometimes shortcuts follow a sequence or chord of keys that must be pressed after the main shortcut has been pressed An example is the spelling panel Ctrl G Ctrl Q The comma separates the sequence Type in the Ctrl G first by itself let go of both keys and then tap Ctrl Q immediately after Int
8. Provides management features for your custom presets You can import saved settings that you may have downloaded from the Internet export a custom preset to a file that you can save for backup purposes or share with others and remove presets you no longer need The load button needn t be used to apply presets to your current settings although it can do so as well by selecting one and clicking OK instead of Cancel The easiest way to apply a preset you already have installed is to use the Format As drop down menu The available buttons in the Load interface are Import brings up a file browser Locate a saved compile preset on your drive to install it into Scrivener ea Export the selected preset in the left list will be saved as a file on your disk which you can then use to carry to another machine send to a colleague or back up for safe keeping z Delete removes the selected preset from your disk It will be placed into your system Trash folder 23 5 Contents This option pane is a core feature available to all export formats The Contents pane is where you define which parts of the Draft Scrivener will use to create your exported file To accomplish this it provides several tools of varying scope The method with the most immediate impact is the drop down menu at the very top of the interface marked as 1 Figure 23 1 which sets the Compile Group Ordinarily this will have the Draft selected which might be call
9. Scriptwriting chapter 19 While Scrivener is not meant to replace an industrial strength scriptwriting tool it can still function as a very adept first draft scriptwrit ing solution and produce exports which will work seamlessly in industry standard applications like Final Draft Writing Tools chapter 20 General tools for writing and using the software more effectively include Searching and Replacing section 20 1 Comprehensive tools for finding items words notations and even formatting are discussed here Goals and Statistics Tracking Tools section 20 2 Scrivener has numerous tools for analysing the content of your project as well as tracking goals and progression while you work The Name Generator section 20 3 Create fictional names with ease using the name generator Using Equations with MathType section 20 6 If you need to insert formulae into your work Scrivener integrates with the popular MathType software Using MultiMarkdown chapter 21 If you prefer to write in a structured or semantic style rather than with a rich text focus MultiMarkdown provides a simple easy to read way of defining and using styles which can be exported to word processors web pages and LaTeX Chapter 14 The Editor 14 1 Header Bar The header bar appears at the top of each editor pane and can be toggled on and off via View Layout Show Hide Header View It contains useful navigation tools dis
10. menu will be transformed into a table of contents for that session letting you quickly jump to sections exclusively within the session The main application Go To menu will adhere likewise to this model but if a split that is not in a Scrivenings session is activated the menu will return to presenting the entire binder The header bar menu will always show the contents of the current session for that split See also Editing Multiple Documents section 15 8 9 3 Controlling Binder Integration With a few exceptions whatever you click on in the binder sidebar will be automatically loaded into the active editor This can become more complicated when there is more than one editor split in use When this is the case the split which has its header bar highlighted in blue will be the one that receives binder clicks The inverse of this is however not true The binder will not automatically select items based upon what you are viewing in the editor The editors can drift from the original selection quite easily All you need to do is use the history buttons double click on an index card icon in a Corkboard use the View Go Tom menu click on a Scrivener Link in the text and so forth There are two features available which change how clicking in the binder sidebar work 9 3 CONTROLLING BINDER INTEGRATION 79 9 3 1 Locking the Editor Any editor split can be locked with View Editor Lock in Place or Ctrl Shift L The header bar for the
11. where applicable as well as a few presentation options Some of the options listed will not pertain to every possible export format For instance the ability to convert italics to underlines is meaningless in a plain text export They will simply be ignored if they are not relevant 23 10 1 Plain Text Conversions These are useful conversion tools for translating special characters and some ruler styles to plain text variants These options are made available to the rich text formats as well Straighten smart quotes Typographic quotes will be substituted with straightened vari ants Convert em dashes to double hyphens The character will be converted to Convert ellipses to triple periods The character will be converted to three full stops 23 10 2 Rich Text Conversions This section provides options for automatically converting a few rich text conventions from one standard to another They are only made available to the compile formats which support styled text 248 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Convert italics to underlines If the submission process requires underscoring to be used instead of italics this feature will let you write in italics but produce a properly underscored manuscript This option is not available to any formats which produce a plain text document Convert underlines to italics Use when you have produced a document with under lines but need an italic version for compile This opti
12. Compile and choose a filename 5 Open the exported file in Final Draft You should see that most elements are retained footnotes become script notes coloured text becomes revised text and so on The header shows whatever is set in Scrivener s Compile Draft panel That covers the basics of importing from and exporting to the FDX format using Scrivener 19 4 Creating Your Own Script Formats Scrivener comes with a number of script formats built in You can also create your own script formats tailored to your own requirements as well as export and import script modes for sharing on the Internet To create your own script format mode select Format Scriptwriting gt Script Settings and use the window that appears to name your format and define its various elements At the top of the panel is the Format Title text field Enter the name of your format here e g Television BBC Comedy This is the name which will be visible in the menu 186 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING if you later choose to save your settings to a script format that other projects can use as well On the left of the panel is the Elements list This is a list of the parts that make up your script such as Scene Heading Dialogue and so on You can add new elements and delete existing ones using the and buttons beneath the list and you can rename elements by double clicking them Note that General Text will be added to the end of
13. Hide Invisibles Ruler settings are adjusted per paragraph If you wish to set tab stops or indents for many paragraphs at once you will need to select them prior to using the ruler If for some reason you need to apply ruler settings from one portion of text to another it is possible to copy paragraph settings by using Format Text Copy Ruler and Paste Ruler menu commands 15 4 2 The Format Bar The Format Bar provides quick access to common formatting features and can be cus tomised in the Tools Customize Toolbars menu item If you are looking for tab and indent controls you can still toggle that per text view with Ctrl Shift R The visibility of the Format Bar is toggled with Alt RightArrow The first section Figure 15 2 of controls handle font face size variant and line spac ing All of these tools with the exception of line spacing act immediately on the cur rently selected text If no selection is given then they will alter how you type from the current caret position onward Line spacing will impact the entire paragraph immedi ately it is not possible to have more than one line spacing setting per paragraph 144 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING Courier New JReauer 12 zo B I U 2 lihi gt 4 Y 4 4 Ill Figure 15 2 Format Bar displayed in sections The first drop down menu lets you select from all of the available font families installed on your computer Th
14. Keyword chips 5 v V Size to fit editor Use small font Figure 12 2 Corkboard options pane would drop items onto a folder Many other appearance and behaviour settings can be adjusted in that tab 12 1 4 Corkboard Options The Corkboard Options pop up contains settings which are specific to each project Changes made to this pane will only impact the active project they have been made in let ting you have two entirely different visual appearances for each major work Any changes made will be saved with the project meaning you can save your preferred defaults into a custom project template for future use To access the pop up click on the Corkboard Options footer bar button as shown Figure 12 2 To dismiss the pop up click the close button in the title bar of it Since the interaction between some of these settings are interdependent here is a useful guide for adjusting the settings based on what you want z A large corkboard that ignores the width of the editor disable Size to fit editor set the Card across to the desired corkboard width and adjust the Size slider as desired Cards that have a fixed size that wrap like words depending on the editor width disable Size to fit editor set Cards across to Auto and adjust the Size as desired Cards that adjust their size according to the editor width set Cards across to the desired amount and enable Size to fit editor This is how the screenshot Fig ure
15. beneath existing documents The Title field is where you type in the name of the new binder item which will be created It does not need to match the text of the link The Link to Existing Document tab will provide a Binder browser displaying all existing items in the project for easy link up Using this method is very similar to right clicking on the text and selecting an item from the Scrivener Link sub menu and is mainly provided as a convenience for people using the shortcut to create new links Favorites As with the Go To menu Favorites will be added to the list Consider adding frequently linked to items to make it easier to access them in the future section 9 5 This section will not appear if no Favorites have been created Binder List The remainder of the menu will be organised according to how your project is laid out Containers will be converted into sub menus allowing you to navigate the project and select a link target much as you would with the Go To menu 9 4 2 Removing Links Links can be removed including URLs to external web pages with the Edit Unlink menu command without destroying the underlying text Any link falling within the currently selected text will be removed so there is no need to be precise about what you select This is an easy way to wipe out dozens of links at once something which is of particular use when pasting text from web files or other Scrivener document
16. buttons do E books and Fonts Unless you have purchased distribution rights for the font you ve selected fonts cannot be legally embedded into the e book and Scrivener is not ca pable of performing this action it would need to be done after compiling Conse quently the precise font family that you choose in this pane will probably not be the font you see in the e book In most cases this is precisely what you want The e book reader hardware or software will provide fonts for the reader and most will want to use their preferred font size and styling if given the choice The exception to this is that the font family will be declared in the formatting meta data so if that font is avail able on the device or computer then it will in some cases be used Again this is up to 23 8 FORMATTING 243 the software itself as to whether or not it should override the reader s preferences with your font choice In addition to the standard controls detailed above additional elements will be pro vided along the header bar of the formatting editor if relevant to the particular format in use Include in RTF bookmarks When using the RTF export format you will see an option next to the prefix and suffix called Include in RTF Bookmarks By default every section in your binder will get an RTF bookmark which will create a handy navi gational reference in compliant word processors and is also used to cross reference links in Scrivener
17. enough theory Let s create a new project right now Invoke the File gt New Project menu command Ctrl G Ctrl N if you do not already see the template selection interface Figure 6 1 In the left list of categories click on the Blank entry if neces sary and then select the blank starter project Choose a location you will remember the default is your Documents folder but you might wish to create a special sub folder just for Scrivener projects and give the project a name in the Save As field This name is what will be used on your disk and so should be memorable and placed in a location you ll easily find in the future Click the Create button once you ve decided on a file name and location 6 2 The Main Window The project will be created and you ll be presented with a fresh Scrivener project window Figure 6 2 The left sidebar panel is your project binder where everything stored or created in your project will be represented in an outline structure On the right side of the window we have the editor which is more than just a text editor as we will shortly see In most cases what you click on in the binder will be displayed on this side of the window Along the top above the editor is the Format Bar which provides access to common formatting tools such as font selection justification line spacing and so on If you cannot see all of the tools try expanding your window horizontally If you want to see t
18. from cellular phones to tablet computers to dedicated black amp white e ink displays This format assumes all containers to be chapters and all text files to be scenes or sections with Parts as above only it is designed to work with books that group chapters into books or parts a Enumerated Outline Only outputs the title for each document rather than all of its text It will use hierarchal numbering and indenting to indicate the depth of items according to the structure of your book up to six levels of indentation though you can add further levels if you require It has also been configured to accommodate synopses which you can optionally enable in the Formatting pane This is a useful starting point if you want a simple data sheet print out of all the pieces in your Draft folder 228 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT z General Non Fiction Treats all folders and top level file groups as chapters Top level files will be titled useful for the preface dedication and such and any files below the top level will be untitled among other tweaks to bring it more in line with common style practices in academia Non Fiction with Sub heads Similar to above this preset is useful for technical writ ing or anything that requires sections to print their names Hierarchical as above but the section heads will be prefixed with a number using a hierarchical scheme common to technical publishing such as 12 3 1
19. in convenience and size and protects it from accidental damage This should be done by zipping the container scriv folder or package On the flip side you shouldn t use the scriv folder as a place to store material While this theoretically won t hurt anything we can t guarantee that it will remain safe there as this entire folder and its contents are curated by the software If you wish to organise external material along with your project we recommend creating a folder to contain both the scriv folder and whatever other documents you wish to store This warning is naturally more pertinent to Windows users At the top most level the folder will be named according to the project name you chose and have a scriv extension added to it Beneath that level the scrivx file is the master file which defines the structure of your project Every single entry in the binder your keywords your print settings all of these and more are saved into this XML file A new project will have anywhere from two to five folders at this top level depending on which features have been used in the project Files where most of your actual data will be stored Here you will find all the pieces of your draft your research material imported media and so forth 329 330 APPENDIX F PROJECT BUNDLE FORMAT z Icons if custom icons have been saved into the project they will be stored here This folder will be created as necessary Q
20. or a trail of major milestones but continue working in the primary project read about creating backups on the fly subsection 7 8 3 Additionally since Scrivener projects are just files and folders on your system you can use Windows Explorer to manage projects create duplicates and archive old versions Always be sure to close your projects before doing so and always treat the top level 7 4 OPENING EXISTING PROJECTS 49 folder with scriv in the name as the whole project Never try to split it up into several pieces Everything in this folder needs to be together in order to continue working as a project 74 Opening Existing Projects Existing projects can be opened in a variety of ways For convenience Scrivener keeps track of the last several projects you have opened and stores them in a list accessible from File Recent Projects In addition this list can be accessed from the Project Template window via the Open Recent drop down menu at the bottom By default Scrivener will remember any projects you leave open when you quit and will re open these for you the next time This behaviour can be changed in the General options tab You can open older projects using File Open Ctrl O or click the Open an Existing Project button in the Project Templates window Projects can also be opened directly using the Explorer or any shortcuts to the project file that you have saved in your quick launch bar or desktop You
21. section B 2 12 1 5 Placing Images on the Corkboard When working in an area of the binder outside of the draft folder it is possible to import graphics and other media into your binder They will be supplied with special icons indicating the type of file they are Graphics will be represented with a small iconic image of a sunset photograph When viewing a corkboard that contains graphics they will be drawn on the cork board as a photograph rather than the typical index card You may also change how any item at all in the corkboard is represented in a way which will always override the default Even folders and standard text files can be rep resented by a photograph or vice versa photographs can be represented as index cards with a text synopsis For further instructions on how to do this read the Synopsis Card section 18 1 overview in the chapter on the inspector This will only change the item s representation on a corkboard The text synopsis will not be deleted and can be edited using the outliner The binder icon will not change If your graphic files have text icons this means they have been dragged into a text file rather than imported directly 12 2 The Outliner Outliner mode shows all of the descendants of the current document along with select associated meta data in a tabular format like a spreadsheet The default configuration will show the title and synopsis in the main columns on the left You can edit by doub
22. select portrait or landscape orientation This option will impact that printed output 3 Page display controls the page control features a text field you can use to jump directly to a specific page as well as arrow control buttons for flipping through the document page by page The two outer arrow buttons will skip to the very beginning or end of the document The three buttons to the right of the page flippers control how many pages are displayed within the window at once You can choose between a standard single page view simulated bookbinding view and 4 page view None of these controls will have any impact on the output 4 Print settings and output the final two buttons directly control print output The left button will open the paper settings dialogue which can also be access with File Page Setup The right most button sends the current printout to the stan dard Windows print dialogue box To cancel the print preview window without printing you can either click the window close button along the top or tap the Esc key 25 5 Printing the Draft Printing the entire draft the portion of your project that is set aside for your work in progress itself is accomplished via the compiler and is not unlike compiling to a saved file You will use the same interface to print and all of the options available to you during compilation will be functional To print open the compile interface with File Compile Ctrl Shift E and us
23. sition that they appear in within the text This means you can use notes as a form of bookmark or quickly jump through your text point by point to areas that need addressing Right click on any of the notes to convert between footnote and comment or to re set their formatting to the application default Additionally comments can have their colour changed by right clicking on selected comments This will also change the anchor highlight in the main text See also Linked Notation section 17 2 for full usage notes on the comments and footnotes themselves 18 10 Locking the Inspector You can lock the inspector to the current editor so that when the other editor in the split view receives the focus the inspector does not change contents but instead continues to display information about the document in the first editor To just click on the icon of the padlock in the bottom right of the inspector in the footer view Chapter 19 Scriptwriting Although Scrivener is not intended to be a dedicated scriptwriting program for such a program you might want to try Final Draft or Celtx if you have not done so already it does allow for basic script formatting and is thus great for first drafts 19 1 Formatting a Script in Scrivener To format a script in Scrivener select the format you want to use from the For mat gt Scriptwriting gt sub menu or use choose one of the pre built project templates in the Scriptwriting categor
24. the File Close All command will Closing Scrivener in this fashion will remember any projects you had left open and re open them for you if you have Open recent projects on program launch active in the General options tab section B 1 A 2 EDIT MENU 277 A 2 Edit Menu The Edit menu contains options related to editing Many of the standard functions you ll find in most Edit menus can be found here including cut copy paste and find along with a large complement of Scrivener specific features Undo amp Redo Ctrl Z amp Ctrl Y Undoes or redoes the last change Undo and Redo work mainly for edits made to text but they do work for some basic outlining changes too where that change does not cause the current document to change in the editor Each document has its own Undo history which means you can easily go back to another document and revert changes independently of other documents Cut Copy and Paste Ctrl X Ctrl C and Ctrl V Cut copy and paste act exactly as they do in other applications Note that they only operate in a text editing context and not on binder documents themselves See Documents Menu section A 5 for document management commands Copy Special gt This menu allows you to copy text or binder items in a variety of ways which can apply or remove data depending on the specific menu command Copy as HTML Reproduces most formatting as HTML codes using inline CSS The resulting HTML should look very s
25. tions As a consequence this can result in some interesting surprises some of which are revealed in the built in templates distributed with Scrivener 8 1 How the Binder is Organised The binder is the document browser on the left of the main window where you can organise your files by default it is coloured a pale blue when the project window is active It allows you to structure and rearrange your work with the utmost flexibility much like a ring binder in the real world hence the name To provide one example you can drag files from Windows Explorer straight into the binder to import them which you can read more about in Gathering Material chapter 11 or from one project binder to another The binder is an optional element though in most cases you ll want to rely on its organisational features at all times To hide the binder click the Binder icon in the tool bar select View Layout Hide Binder or press Ctrl Shift B All of these commands can be used to restore its visibility if it has been hidden The binder is labelled at the top Some functions will automatically replace the Binder view with a specialised listing Project Search Results are the most common of these This label will change to reflect whatever sidebar view is currently in use and additionally the colour of the sidebar background will change to help notify you that you are no longer looking at the main project binder You can always get back to the binder by
26. will be placed at the very beginning of the e book before the table of contents Most e book readers automatically use the cover image itself to provide their thumbnails Very likely you ve been provided with images from a designer that was assigned to illustrate your work They may not provide you with the file sizes necessary for e books since this is still a new market Graphics for cover art should be in a standard RGB raster format such as JPEG and not a vector format such as EPS nor CMYK colour 1At the time of this writing JPG is the safest format to use Not only is it the most compact some reader devices do not support the PNG format PP 238 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Cover Image No Cover Image MA Select an image from the project using the Cover Image Preview Area image drop down ist above Cover Page Title Figure 23 3 Compile Cover amp ToC space which is designed for printing For dimensions there is no firm rule but a size of roughly 800 pixels tall by 600 pixels wide at 72 DPI will display crisply on nearly all reading devices and computer screens with unnecessarily bloating the size of the e book If you are unsure of how to make these adjustments to the files you have been provided with you should contact your graphic designer with these specifications so that they can deliver a quality version to you at the correct size In particular watch out for very large files that w
27. 1 1 2 2 1 2 in the compiled text lt r gt Gets replaced with lowercase Roman numerals during the Compile pro cess The number is incremented each time a lt r gt tag is encountered in the text so lt r gt lt r gt lt r gt would become i ii iii in the com piled text lt R gt Gets replaced with uppercase Roman numerals during the Compile pro cess The number is incremented each time a lt R gt tag is encountered in the text so lt R gt lt R gt lt R gt would become I II III in the compiled text lt w gt Gets replaced with numbers as lowercase words using the current lan guage settings during the Compile process The number is incremented each time a lt w gt tag is encountered in the text so lt w gt lt w gt lt w gt would become one two three in the compiled text lt t gt Gets replaced with numbers as title case words using the current lan guage settings during the Compile process The number is incremented each time a lt t gt tag is encountered in the text so lt t gt lt t gt lt t gt would become One Two Three in the compiled text lt W gt Gets replaced with numbers as uppercase words using the current lan guage settings during the Compile process The number is incremented each time a lt W gt tag is encountered in the text so lt W gt lt W gt lt W gt would become ONE TWO THREE in the c
28. 12 2 has been configured It will always print two cards per row sizing them to be as large or small as necessary depending upon the width of the corkboard in the editor 12 1 THE CORKBOARD 109 Size There are two ways of arranging index cards within a corkboard The first is to set the size of cards and then let the corkboard wrap the cards as they fit the second is to provide a number of cards you always want to see in each row and let the corkboard resize the cards to fit that number When the latter method is in use see below for setting that the Size control will be disabled Ratio Determines the size ratio between height and width By default this will be 3 x 5 in order to emulate the appearance of real index cards If you write very long or very short synopses however you might find that adjusting this to produce shorter or taller cards will be of benefit Spacing The amount of space that will be drawn between index cards both vertically and horizontally To pack more cards into the display at once move the slider toward the left To spread out the cards and make them more distinct move the slider to the right Cards Across Set this to the number of cards you would like to appear in each row Use Auto to have Scrivener determine this amount based on the size of the cards When Size to fit editor below is disabled it is possible for corkboards to grow larger than the editor size which may be desired for some p
29. 15 WRITING AND EDITING When using a Collection to select items the collection order will be used to estab lished the structure of the merged document When it comes to merging Scrivener will attempt to retain as much meta data as is logically possible The synopses notes keywords references and list of snapshots will be combined together much in the same fashion that the main text will be Meta data which cannot be combined such as Title Label any custom meta data compile option flags and so forth will use the top most document as a reference point For example Document A Synopsis This is the first document Keyword Apples Status First Draft Document B Synopsis This is the second document Keyword Carrots Status To Do Notes Mix these two together in a blender for a great tasting healthy bever age Both Document A and Document B are selected in the Binder and Docu ments Merge is invoked Ctrl M producing the following single document with the bold items indicating material used from Document B Document A Synopsis This is the first document This is the second document Keywords Apples Carrots Status First Draft Notes Mix these two together in a blender for a great tasting healthy beverage 15 4 FORMATTING TOOLS 141 First line Indent Right Indent Left Indent Figure 15 1
30. 6 Footnotes and Comments The lock icon at the end locks the inspector so that you can reference the material in it even when switching to a different editor split The first three sub panes include the synopsis card and general meta data in addition to their specialised information These initial sections can be collapsed by clicking the disclosure arrow on the left side of the header bar for each The two common meta data sections are as follows 24 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE Synopsis amp Image The top frame shows the written synopsis for the binder item which is what also appears in the index card representation of the item in corkboard mode among other places Using the top drop down menu you can optionally also attach an image to the item to represent it in Corkboard mode instead of a text synopsis Media files by default will display an image synopsis but you can use the drop down menu to switch to text if you prefer General Meta Data The middle frame of the inspector shows basic meta data for the current document This includes the label and status which can be renamed to something more appropriate to the current project the modified and created date of the document click on the arrows to switch between the modified and created date and checkboxes that affect how and whether the document will appear as part of the compiled draft for exporting or printing For more information on the types of meta data available read Setting Up
31. 6 3 The document After Math looks like a page of text but Masked Avenger just looks like a blank sheet of paper That s because we haven t typed anything into the editor for Masked Avenger yet Scrivener lets you know which parts of your project are still placeholders For now let s use another method for adding new documents When you are in the binder there is a simple way to add new entries below the currently selected item Select 36 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR File Edit View Project Documents Format Tools Help Mea O88 4 Mes ta Binder Courier Ne Regular 12 1 0 BIU E m a Draft ar E lt EL After Math mn B o Masked Avenger CF Research It was a dark and stormy night E Trash F P y 135 Words 7 Chars 32 Figure 6 3 Progress so far Masked Avenger and just press Enter Call this one Wineries You can quickly build outlines this way Now we will take a look at a great way to get an overview of your Draft Either click on Draft in the binder with your mouse or simply press the LeftArrow to jump up to it That key selects the parent of whatever item you currently have selected in this case the Draft When you view a folder in Scrivener by default it will automatically switch to showing you the corkboard in the editor area You should see three index cards one for each of the items you ve created sometimes referred to as Scrivenings but the card
32. 6 MMD Meta Data iii 174 174 175 175 175 176 177 178 179 179 180 181 181 183 183 185 191 192 192 199 202 204 205 205 iv 21 7 Further Information IV Final Phases 22 Creating a Table of Contents 22 1 How to Create a ToC 23 Compiling the Draft 23 1 Built in Presets 23 2 Available Compile Formats 23 3 Compiling and Saving Set DOS bk ek ak yeah eS 23 4 Expanded Compile Interface 23 5 Contents 4 220 Separators oc viwcac sve 23 7 GOVEF as 2488684 be bees 23 8 Formatting i4 o044003 29 9 Derpl Settings c eea 23 10 Transformations 23 11 Replacements 225 655544 23 12 Footnotes Comments 23 13 Page Settings eo ces sae 5x 23 14 Meta Data 24 Exporting 24 1 Drag and Drop Between PrOjECtS ara 24 2 Exporting Binder Files 24 3 Exporting to an Outliner with OPML 14 24 4664 405 24 4 Exporting Meta Data to a Spreadsheet 5 5 25 Printing 25 1 Document Printing 25 2 Printing Index Cards 25 3 Printing Outlines 25 4 Print Preview 25 5 Printing the Draft 219 220 223 223 226 226 229 229 231 232 235 237 239 247 247 248 252 255 257 261 261 261 262 264 266 V Appendices CONTENTS A Menus and Keyboard Shortcuts A 1 FileMenu A 2 Edit Menu A3 View Menu A4 Project Menu AS5 Documents Menu A 6 Format Menu A 7
33. A new screenshot will be taken and the old settings will be updated to reflect the current window layout 9 6 LAYOUTS PANEL 87 Layouts can also be exported and installed into Scrivener Using the gear menu select the layout you wish to export and then choose Export Selected Layout The layout will be saved as an XML file in the location you provide Use the Import Layout menu choice to import a layout you have transferred from another computer or downloaded from the Internet Because layouts are separate from projects there are some things that they cannot save such as which collection you are viewing Even within one individual project these details might change or no longer be relevant Here is a list of things layouts do save Binder visible hidden Collection tab interface visible hidden Inspector visible hidden Split type horizontal vertical none Binder mode whether it affects one or current editors Header bar visible hidden Footer bar visible hidden z Editors locked in place Ruler and Format Bar visible hidden Selection auto load in alternate editor settings Window size and position and view sizes Corkboard outliner scrivenings editor mode for each split In addition optional settings are saved depending upon whether these two checkboxes are enabled for the specific layout Save outliner and corkboard settings All corkboard display settings such as card size ratio ca
34. CSV When an Outliner view is active this menu com mand will activate It will export the current Outliner view in a format that is readily accessible to spreadsheet software and other programs capable of tabular display See also Exporting Meta Data to a Spreadsheet section 24 4 Back Up gt Functions for managing backup copies of the current project For more information on back up strategies see Backing Up Your Work section 7 8 Back Up To Generates a backup copy of the project to a specified location Backup copies unlike Save As will be created and then ignored by Scrivener you will keep working in the current version of the project Op tionally you can choose to compress the backup in a zip archive which takes longer but is the recommended method for storage of backups on network drives Back Up Now Triggers the automatic backup system to produce a backup imme diately using the preferences for backup location and rotation scheme Cus tomise how this works in the Backup preferences tab section B 9 276 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Exclude From Automatic Backups Removes the current project from the auto mated backup system This is useful when the current project is very large and is causing you to have to wait for long intervals while the automatic sys tem performs backups Note that when this option is engaged Scrivener s backup protection will be completely ignored for this project
35. Creating a lable of Contents New in 1 7 With the exception of e books there is no support for inserting a dynamic table of contents into your draft but there is a way to produce a static list of items that is cross referenced to page numbers for supporting formats during compile that uses Scrivener Links internally to make the list useful for the author as well This feature is mainly useful in conjunction with the PDF Printing workflow and with the RTF based formats when compiled and opened in a word processor that sup ports bookmarks and cross references Using a table of contents of with page numbers and PDFs is generally more portable since page numbers are baked into the file and do not rely on dynamic features that only some word processors support If you intend to distribute the file to a number of people and are unsure of what word processor everyone uses PDF will provide the most consistent result between all platforms 22 1 How to Create a ToC Creating a table of contents is a simple process but because it is a static list you will probably want to save it for one of your final steps as any changes in outline order or the addition or removal of sections will not be reflected in the list 1 Select all of the items that you wish to have included in the ToC It may be easiest to do this in Outliner view mode so you can collapse and expand the various containers until the Outliner looks roughly like what you want the T
36. Despite this in practice you should have little difficulty in locating the topic you are interested in Modern PDF reader software features excellent searching capabilities most things can be discovered merely by searching for the proper names of things as labelled in menus buttons or dialogue boxes in the PDF Alternatively the appendices have been designed to use as a sort of topical index If you have a question about a particular menu command for instance you can find it in the appendix Menus and Keyboard Shortcuts Appendix A Often if the feature merits it there will be a cross reference to a more thorough description of the feature in the main manual When all else fails a detailed table of contents has been provided at the beginning of the document Chapter 3 What S New New in 1 7 3 Dictionary and Thesaurus Look Up You can now select a word and look up its meanings and associations U S English re sults thanks to the built in WordNet database tool Simply select a word and use the Tools Writing Tools Define menu command to open a new definition window Read more about it in Looking Up Definitions with WordNet section 20 4 New in 1 7 Formatting Presets Formatting presets provide you with an easy way to store various formatting attributes into a stamp that you can apply to selections of text at any later point Simply select the formatting you wish to preserve save a preset and then apply t
37. Double click on the After Math index card s icon and you ll return to where you were at the start of this paragraph You ve navigated into the After Math corkboard Outliner mode which we haven t explored yet is a bit more like the Binder in that you can see items at all levels of depth beneath the current selection It also has the ability to show many columns of tabular data and is great for tracking word counts per section just to name one usage z Scrivenings mode usually includes all text content beneath the current selection no matter how deep they are in the outline There is one main exception to these rules of thumb Multiple Selections which hap pen when you select more than one binder item at once But for simple single selections such as what we ve been doing so far the above guidelines will help you decide which view mode to use depending on what you need to do You might be wondering about that oddly titled Wineries card Let s move it to the Research section of your Binder since in our hypothetical little universe here it would be used to collect research on various wineries that the characters are involved with There are multiple ways of moving items around in the outline but the most familiar will be drag and drop Select the Draft folder again then click and hold on the Wineries index card in the Corkboard and drop it onto the Research folder over in the Binder This demonstra
38. Go to this location here instead of Open this document I have selected Various aspects of a document s meta data and organi sation can be set in this menu Where the Edit menu concerns itself with the content of an editor session the Format menu concerns itself with the presentation of content In sim ple word processing terms this includes such minutia as setting a range of text to bold or italic but it also includes settings of larger impact and the ability to add footnotes or comments to the text Various helpful tools such as the name generator and application set tings are collected into this menu A list of all open windows will be provided and the familiar window con trols for minimising or maximising the current window Saved window layouts can also be managed from this menu Quite simply put where you got this PDF file from most likely amongst other resources Additionally setting up registration information and other application information can be accessed from here 273 274 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Close Project Ctrl F4 Closes the current project and all of its associated windows Close All All open projects will be closed If you have the start panel set to show when no other projects are open section B 1 it will appear otherwise Scrivener will fully close Save Ctrl S Scrivener auto saves your work so that you never have to worry about los ing your writings Pro
39. Installing Scrivener on Linux If you use the Linux operating system you will find builds of Scrivener which should work on most modern distributions from our forums Since this release is at the time of this writing unsupported you are invited to participate in the forums and seek support from peers who are also using Scrivener on Linux If for some reason the native build does not work with your distribution and you can find no tips for installing it it is possible to run Scrivener through WINE with good results The Linux user forum can be found here 4 4 Staying Informed If you would like to keep up to date on the latest developments and releases with Scrivener you can sign up for our low volume newsletter using Help Keep Up To Date Once you submit the form a confirmation e mail will be sent to the e mail address you provided You will need to click a link within this e mail before you will be officially added to the list If you cannot find the confirmation e mail after 24 hours check your spam folders and consider adding literatureandlatte com to your white list The Keep Up To Date window also has links to our Twitter feed and Facebook page We frequently publish small tips and tricks as well as links to helpful articles online through these channels 4 5 Installing Scrivener on a Portable Flash Drive While it is possible to make a copy of your Scrivener application folder on a flash drive at this tim
40. Latte Home A handy hyperlink to our home page which provides easy access to everything else we offer on our web site Scrivener Home Link to the main Scrivener page where you will find useful download links for updates case studies links to share Scrivener with Twitter and Facebook and more Registration When you purchase the application use this menu item to copy and paste your registration information from the e mail that you will receive from Lit erature amp Latte In case you have lost the original e mail or never received the invoice you can use the Retrieve Lost Serial button which will take you to a web page with further instructions on how to retrieve it Not infrequently invoices can end up in spam collection folders so be sure to check your e mail application and make sure it did not get tagged as spam first Check for Updates You can use the Check for Updates menu item to check to see if there is a newer version of Scrivener available for download all updates within a major version number are free This tool lets you check for updates and then download and install them all without leaving the application http www literatureandlatte com http www literatureandlatte com scrivener php platform win 304 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Purchase Scrivener This option will only appear if the software has not yet been registered During the trial period it will be available so you can eas
41. MathML is available for systems that do not have MathType and can also be used to edit MathType equations by hand Final Draft Support Final Draft FDX files can now be imported into the binder The resulting imported file will be converted to Scrivener s scripting format Simply drag and drop an FDX file into the binder to begin working on it in Scrivener or use the File Import Files menu command When it comes time to go back to Final Draft you can now compile scripts to the FDX format for direct transfer to Final Draft 8 and higher Improved Scratchpad The Scratch Pad feature which allows you to easily take notes even while working in other applications has been improved You can now keep multiple notepads in the scratchpad window as well as easily grab screenshots and save them as pictures in the notes Read more in Scratch Pad Panel section 11 3 Chapter 4 Installation If you purchased the boxed version of Scrivener insert the CD ROM into your computer and wait for it the installation screen to appear If you have disabled auto load you will need to run the installation program using Explorer For online downloadable purchases grab the trial version from the Literature amp Latte web site The trial version can be unlocked at any time with the registration serial num ber that was sent to you when you purchased the application When the executable finishes downloading double click on it in Explorer if it h
42. Meta Data chapter 10 The Notes References Custom Meta data and Keywords panels all display the above two components They are described as follows Notes Displays a notepad for the document Each document has an auxiliary notepad associated with it it only appears while you are viewing that item Clicking the header bar of the notes area will bring up a pop up menu from which you can select Document Notes or Project Notes the latter of which is global to the project and accessible from any part of the project If you have multiple project notepads you may see more than one option here in parenthesis For more information read Document and Project Notes section 18 4 References The References table lets you to hold links to related material within the project itself Links can also point elsewhere on your hard drive or on the Internet Click the header bar to switch between document references and global project references Use the latter to make links available throughout the project For more information read References section 18 5 Keywords Displays a list of keywords associated with the selected document Keywords can be used to tag your document Use the and buttons to add and remove keywords or the gear menu to access the project s central keyword list Read more about them in Keywords Pane section 18 6 and Using Keywords subsec tion 10 1 4 Custom Meta Data Each custom meta data field will be displaye
43. Once contents have been deleted there is no way to undo that action This can also be done by right clicking on the Trash itself in the binder A 5 Documents Menu The Documents menu contains all commands relating directly to documents such as duplicating and splitting documents viewing them in combination and moving them and hoisting the binder to view isolated parts of the draft Open gt The Open sub menu provides you with a number of ways in which to open a selected item These menu items are relevant from the binder or collection views as well as corkboard and outliner views but note that in most cases a single click or double click on the icon will open a file all by itself How it does that is dictated 292 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS by the settings available in the View Binder Affects sub menu The corkboard and outliner can be configured to immediately open clicked files too in Editor Ctrl Shift Return This command mirrors many of the basic interactions you can take to open an item in the currently active editor such as clicking on an item in the binder or double clicking on its icon in the Corkboard or Outliner views This menu item is available to provide a keyboard shortcut for these actions in Other Editor Ctrl Alt Return This will open a new split if necessary using the previous split orientation used With All Subdocuments If the selected item has subdocuments this can be de
44. Project Keywords section 10 2 for managing all of the keywords in use by your project or assigning them to items A 5 DOCUMENTS MENU 291 Meta Data Settings Cirl Shift M Displays a dialogue which lets you adjust the two main document meta data fields Label and Status by default but these can be re named as well as the general project information such as author and title for this project See also Setting Up Meta Data chapter 10 Auto Complete List Ctrl Shift 4 Displays a dialogue which lets you manually add and remove terms to the project s auto complete list Depending on your auto completion settings this will let you add custom names places and workflow indi cators to assist in typing out repetitive items Modify how agressive auto complete should behave in the Corrections preference tab section B 6 Set Selection as Templates Folder Clear Templates Folder Will convert the selected binder item into a special template folder though note it could also be a document stack Each project can only have one template folder at a time If more than one item is selected in the binder this menu item will be disabled When a Templates folder has already been set in the project this menu item will changed to Clear Templates Folder removing its designation but not it or its contents Empty Trash Permanently discards the contents of the project trash can You will be warned before this is done
45. Scrivenings view To view statistics for a selection portion of text right click on that text You will find word and character counts displayed at the bottom of the contextual menu in grey text 14 3 VIEWING MEDIA IN THE EDITOR 125 14 2 3 Text Goals When you are editing a single document in standard not scriptwriting mode a small target icon will appear on the right side of the footer bar This button brings up the target options for the current document which will let you set the numeric word or character goal you intend to achieve with the section When enabled the footer bar will acquire a progress bar next to the target icon which will fill as you type gradually changing colour until you reach your quota These targets are set individually for each document You may also monitor and set them using the Outliner by revealing the Target Target Type and or Progress columns To disable the goal metre for a document enter a value of 0 into the target configu ration for the document 14 3 Viewing Media in the Editor The editor is capable of viewing most of the file types that you will need to interface with for research and creative use The footer bar will often change to provide tools for working with different media types Note that Scrivener is by and large not intended to operate as an editor for all types of files It would take years to design these features and in most cases your existing applicatio
46. Since page breaks have no meaning in an e book the Page Break option will be changed to Section Break This will not only cause the e reader to switch to a new virtual page if it chooses to display things in such a way but will also insert the name of the item with the section break into the automatically generated Table of Contents MultiMarkdown and MMD HTML formats In most cases the empty line option should be used to retain clean paragraph breaks between blocks The single line type will cause the last paragraph of one section to flow directly into the next paragraph of the next section Page breaks are replaced by section breaks which emit a series of hyphens on their own line This will be converted to a horizontal rule using the HTML con verter MultiMarkdown LaTeX format As with the other MMD formats use of the empty line type will produce the best result in most cases The LaTeX code for a page break pagebreak will be inserted for the page break option Note that this will be enclosed in an HTML comment which is the pre ferred method for passing LaTeX codes straight through the MMD system This ability is disabled by default and will need to be enabled by hand in the MMD sub system chapter 21 23 Cover Available only to the ePub and Kindle exporters the Cover pane sets the cover and pre sentation material which will give your e book a professional finish The cover image
47. advanced paragraph and line spacing palette which can also be found on the Format Bar off of the line spacing sub menu Table The initial command Insert Table adds a default table into your docu ment at the cursor position unless you are already in a table In both cases it will also open a floating configuration window containing tools for adding and manip ulating tabular data in the text editor Tables can be set up with a given number of rows and columns but using the options in this window you can add or remove either to fit the constraints of your data later on This menu contains convenience commands for the management of cells rows and columns They are also accessible via the Table sub menu of the contextual menu Lists gt Provides basic list styles These features are also supplied via the list button on The Format Bar subsection 15 4 2 A 6 1 Formatting menu formatting Formatting gt Provides tools for creating and applying ruler and font presets to your text For more information on using the presets system including its menu com mands see Formatting Presets subsection 15 4 3 Scriptwriting gt Cirl 4 Although Scrivener is not a dedicated script writing applica tion such as Final Draft or CeltX the Scriptwriting submenu does make it rela tively straightforward to create first drafts which can be later fine tuned in these applications For full documentation on this see Scriptwriting chapt
48. and Textures You can replace the default solid background colour with an image of your choosing by using the View Full Screen Backdrop sub menu The image will be scaled to fit your screen using the maximum height or width whichever is better This can mean that if the image does not match your screen s aspect ratio the background colour may still be visible along the sides or top and bottom Textures can be assigned to the background area on either side of the paper Textures are graphic files you select which will be tiled to fill the entire visible area Textures can be configured in the Appearance preference tab section B 2 as an additional option in the customisable colours section 16 2 The Control Strip The Full Screen control strip contains various controls for manipulating the interface elements available to Full Screen mode All of these settings operate on a project by project basis as opposed to the global scope of the application options It is possible to leave the control strip open perpetually by leaving the mouse at the bottom of the screen If you wish to keep track of your word count or are working in script mode this can be a handy way to keep tabs on your status If you do so you may wish to set the paper height detailed below so that the bottom of the page does not fall below the controls In order from left to right Text scale This operates in an identical fashion to the text scale zoom in
49. and further levels of depth in the binder can have their own formatting rules A very simple example of this would be different heading sizes depending on the level While added components such as Title and Synopsis can be formatted to your choos ing the main text area is special To make any changes to the main text body formatting the first thing you need to do is enable the formatting override In the header for the structure table click the checkbox labelled Override text and notes formatting When this option is engaged your entire manuscript will be given a uniform appearance which can if you choose be radically different from how it looks in Scrivener You will find a condensed Format Bar a Ruler some special options at the top and a large text preview area This cannot be typed in it shows you what elements have been selected in the structure table and how they will be formatted in the manuscript You can otherwise treat it just like an ordinary editor If you click in the Title area you should see the formatting controls adjust to represent whatever formatting has been applied to the title Try clicking the Underline button Unlike with standard text you are editing areas of text so there is no need to select the entire title you can just place your cursor anywhere within the title and click Underline Refer to the documentation on using the The Format Bar subsection 15 4 2 if you are unsure of what these various
50. and invoke the element menu in the footer barNote that when moving from an element that uses all caps to an element that does not you will need to adjust the capitalisation manually as Scrivener will not try to guess what is appropriate The Format Convert sub menu has a number of conversion routines to aid in this 19 1 1 Auto Completion Using the built in script settings auto completion is available for some elements as is appropriate for their context Upon choosing Scene Heading for instance you can start typing with E and you will be presented with a options like EXT and EVENING You may disable or enable or add your own additional items from this list by editing your script settings section 19 4 1 though note you should in general not use this list to assign project specific completions like scene locations It is best to use the Project Auto Complete List window for this You may want to save your scripting adjustments for future use in another project The auto completion lists in the script settings should be seen as integral parts of the scriptwriting process in general 19 2 Printing or Exporting a Script You can use the compiler File Compile to print your script or to turn it into a PDF file For examples of how to do this take a look at one of the scriptwriting project templates by going to File New Project and selecting a project template such as the Screenplay template Read th
51. available to you even after you have rebooted your computer Like the Binder tab the Search Result tab cannot be deleted and there is always one included with every new project even when no search is currently in use When you click on the Search Results tab the previous search criteria will be loaded into the search bar tool allowing you to further tweak the results if you desire Since search results depend upon the search criteria you cannot manually add remove or change the order of items from the Collection as you can with the standard type 8 4 4 Saved Search Result Collections As with the Search Results tab saved searches have a magnifying glass in the corner to indicate that it is a special type of Collection which automatically generates its contents for you Saved searches are created by clicking the magnifying glass in the Project Search tool and selecting Save Search as Collection If the Collection interface is hidden the sidebar background will change to a random automatically generated colour and the header bar title will adjust to the name you pro vided To leave the saved search you can either click the close button in the sidebar footer or enable the Collection tab interface and select another tab The contents of a saved search are dynamic Every time the tab is clicked on the saved criteria will be checked against the current state of the project If you wish to freeze a list for later reference there a
52. average word length For example if the average word length is 8 and the number of words per page is 200 you would enter 1600 into this box to produce a custom result Pages printed will be more accurate for your own printouts as it will compile your draft in the background using the specified formatting and other content settings and then count the total pages resulting from that Consequently in large projects it may take a few moments for this window to display Project Statistics Options To access options for how project statistics are calculated click the Options tab in the window Selection Statistics Options Tuning options for how selected items should be counted in statistics 202 CHAPTER 20 WRITING TOOLS Count all documents In this context all documents means regardless of whether the document meta data flag Include in Compile is on or off Count only documents marked for inclusion Only those documents that have Include in Compile checked will be counted Count only documents not marked for inclusion As above only with the in verse logic z Exclude annotations All annotations will be disregarded by default If you wish to count them too un check this option z Exclude footnotes Footnotes are by default included in the count Count sub documents When disabled only the literal selection will be counted With this option on the selected items and all of their children will be co
53. be dragged into the iTunes Library to import them into iBooks Generate feature rich eBooks for use in portable reading devices that support the mobi format such as the Ama zon Kindle Requires Amazon s KindleGen 23 4 EXPANDED COMPILE INTERFACE 231 Table 23 2 Compile Formats Table Cont d Format Extension Description MultiMarkdown Post processing MultiMarkdown md Export a plain text MultiMarkdown file useful for archiving or further custom post processing MultiMarkdown tex Exports a LaTeX format file with full MultiMarkdown gt LaTeX parsing Note that if you are intending to export a La TeX file that has been handwritten in Scrivener without MMD you should use the plain text exporter above MultiMarkdown rtf Export an HTML derived RTF file with partial Multi gt RTF Markdown support Note that the RTF files generated in this fashion will be limited in features and formatting support in the same way as HTML and is not equivalent to Scrivener s standard RTF exporter in the word proces sor compatibility tables MultiMarkdown html Generates a W3C compliant HTMLS5 file suitable for gt Web Page web publishing or further XML post processing MultiMarkdown fodt This ODF compatible format is suitable for bringing gt Flat XML your MMD project into the word processor world At the time of this writing LibreOffice is the main OpenOf fice fork that can read fodt files without modification 23 4 Ex
54. beside it You will be presented with report of how many names were imported into the database If you wish to reset the name generator to default use the Restore Defaults tab in the name generator window and click the Restore Defaults button This will return the name lists to their factory default condition You will need to re import your revised name lists at this point if desired 20 4 Looking Up Definitions with WordNet New in 1 7 To look up the definition for a word place the insertion caret within the word or select the word with the mouse then use the Tools Writing Tools Define menu command or press Ctrl G Ctrl F3 on the keyboard A window will appear con taining the definitions usage examples and word associations in a manner similar to a thesaurus for the selected word When you are finished you can close the window with the Esc key or Alt F4 or the window can be left open for reference if you wish If you look up further words in the future this window will be reused for each definition Definition presentation and content is provided by WordNet If you have any correc tions or suggestions to make to the content itself you should contact them directly Currently only available in U S English though look up itself should work in other forms of English as well http wordnet princeton edu 20 5 BIBLIOGRAPHY MANAGEMENT 205 20 5 Bibliography Management Scrivener offers simple i
55. buttons to scroll through documents like a flip book to using menus to jump directly to a specific place in your book and more In nearly all cases unless otherwise indicated navigation options are globally applied that is no matter how you select an item in the interface these options will apply 314 APPENDIX B OPTIONS B 4 1_ Folders and Files Treat all documents with children as folders When this is checked any document that has sub documents will act like a folder and will open in whatever view mode folders are set to use the last group view mode selected If this isn t checked nor mal text documents or media files that have sub documents any type of document can act as a container for other documents in Scrivener will be opened in single text mode Include enclosing group in combined scrivenings When clicking on a folder or file group if Treat all documents with subdocuments as folders is enabled by default the text contents of that container will be included in the Scrivenings session at the very top If you never use folder text or document stack text then disabling this will remove the empty entry at the top of the Scrivenings session Show folder text when selected from search results Overrides default behaviour of opening folders and if Treat all documents with subdocuments as folders is set file groups as well When this is enabled all container style search results will reveal their text w
56. by yourself or someone else Reset to defaults Reverts all customisations that you have made to the settings panel to the Screenplay default If you wish to revert to a saved script setting simply select that script from the Scriptwriting menu instead of using this tool Use current font amp paragraph settings Will attempt to import all available character and paragraph level formatting attributes into the currently selected element in the above element table This can be quite useful when you have imported a script from another program and wish to create a script format from the existing text Simple click through the document locating element types and use this tool to import the correct formatting into each element type Load from file Loads a Scrivener script format file from the disk Use this if you have downloaded a script format from the Internet or are in the process of transferring formats from one computer to another Save to file Saves your current settings to an external file that you can easily backup upload to the Internet for sharing or send to another of your computers MAC This will not install the saved script into your Scrivener support folder Use the below command for that Save for use with other projects Essentially accomplishes the above but automatically installs it into your Scrivener support folder for immediate usage in all of your projects If you wish to share the file with others or transfer them
57. can also use Explorer s search tool to find missing projects To open an existing project from your disk you will first need to find the main project folder which will be an ordinary folder with scriv on the end of the name For example if you named your project Short Stories in the My Documents folder then you would expect to find a folder named Short Stories scriv in My Documents a Navigate into this folder and double click on the project or project scrivx if you have extensions shown file This will load the project in Scrivener and it will now be in the Recent Projects menu for future convenience Using Windows Shortcuts You may wish to create a shortcut to this project scrivx file on your Desktop The shortcut can be renamed to whatever you like and now you have easy double click access to this project This is a general Windows trick you can do it with any type of file drag and drop the project scrivx file to the Desktop with the right mouse button held down instead of the usual left When you let go you ll be asked what type of action you wish to perform Select the option to create a shortcut Now you have a link to this file on your Desktop You 50 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT can rename the link to whatever you want at this point You can even keep a folder of these for your own usage making a convenient place to go to find your projects no matter whe
58. capitalised and centred This menu also has full keyboard access allowing you to change modes swiftly and without the use of the mouse The menu can be called up with Ctrl at any time from within a scriptwriting document even in full screen mode To select an individual ele ment style tap the associated letter for it on the right side of the menu Example T for Transition and C for Character Upon hitting enter and typing the paragraph formatting will be changed to that of the next set element So for instance if you hit Enter after having typed in a Scene Heading the typing attributes might be set to Action At this point you could easily change the current element by pressing the Tab key hitting it once would change the current element to Character Hitting it several times will cycle through different elements The footer bar tells you which element will be created next by hitting Tab or Return For example in the Screenplay format when waiting to type in a character name press ing Tab will switch you to Transition and pressing Enter will switch to Dialogue How ever once you begin typing in a character name the tab hint will change to Parenthetical letting you drop to that element instead of dialogue if you wish 19 2 PRINTING OR EXPORTING A SCRIPT 183 If for some reason you need to change the element type for text you ve already entered you can place the caret anywhere within the text you want to change
59. cases where you suspect the project has lost synchronisation with search index There is generally no need to do this as Scrivener will automatically rebuild indexes if something appears to have gone awry since the last session 302 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS A 8 Window Menu The Window menu contains commands for controlling windows and panels along with a list of all open windows Minimize Minimises the window to the Task Bar Mazimize Expand the window so that it fills the screen Bring All to Front Raise all Scrivener windows above other application windows The original relative order between Scrivener windows will be maintained so a project window beneath the current one will stay beneath it but be raised above any other application windows such as your web browser Layout Manager Toggles the Layouts panel which allows you to manage view set tings by saving the current settings or retrieving other settings you ve saved in the past See Layouts Panel section 9 6 Layout list The remainder of this menu will list all of the available saved layouts so that you can quickly switch between them without using the Layout Manager The rest of this menu will be populated by all of the windows excluding utility win dows like the Project Keywords window that are currently open Selecting from this list will bring that window to the front A 9 Help Menu The Help menu has useful tools and links for learning
60. choose to break this long document apart is up to you and the split tools make it easy to do so To split in a document into two pieces you will first need to place the caret at the precise point in the document where you wish the split to occur If you select a range of text the start of the selection will be considered the caret point for purposes of splitting Once the selected location has been chosen you can use one of two methods to split the document 15 3 EDITING WITH SCRIVENER 139 Documents Split gt at Selection Ctrl K This will create the new document directly be low the current document in the outline It will contain everything that followed the caret position and this material will be removed from the original document It can be useful to think of splitting in terms of above and below the selection Everything above the caret and also to the left if in the middle of a line will remain in the original document while everything to the right and below of the caret will be moved to the new document After splitting you will be given the option to name the new document in the Binder Documents gt Split gt with Selection as Title Ctrl Shift K This alternative method will only appear when a range of text has been selected in the editor This method works identically as at Selection does only the selected text will automatically become the title of the new document This text will remain selected
61. compiled document verbatim Thus all rules pertaining to the meta data syntax should be followed Empty lines in this area will cause the meta data block to prematurely abort Individual rows can be moved around with the arrow buttons to the right of the table The order of meta data fields only matters when using MultiMarkdown version 3 This interface being project based is useful for creating a general meta data block If your project is actually comprised of multiple documents or if you simply prefer to type in the meta data block by hand you can use documents titled Meta Data in the binder Whenever a document so titled is the first document in the compile group it will be appended to the meta data provided in this pane Duplication should be avoided where possible A good strategy for multi file projects is to use the project compile settings for general meta data which does not change such as your name and then the keys specific to each output file in the Meta Data documents For further information on the available MultiMarkdown meta data fields refer to the online documentation To make inserting new keys easier most of the standard meta data keys used by the http fletcherpenney net multimarkdown users_guide multimarkdown_syntax_guide 260 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT stock MultiMarkdown engine have been included in a drop down menu below the table Simply pick the one you wish to add and then typ
62. continue editing in the main project window You may also restrict matches to only those which have the same letter case are look for matches which only fall within the start of a phrase end of a phrase be a whole word or the default contains which matches even parts of words The Next and Previous buttons will jump from one result to the next When the last match is discovered the Find tool will wrap around to the beginning of the document again There are three replacement options Replace replaces the currently matched item Replace amp Find equivalent to clicking the Replace button and then the Next but ton Replace All will replace all matches with the provided replacement value with no further interaction To leave the Find tool you can either click the close window button or tap the Esc key 194 CHAPTER 20 WRITING TOOLS 20 1 2 Project Search Project search is a tool for finding binder items which match the search you ve provided This is unlike the standard Find tool which steps through a document one match after another Instead it returns everything at once in a list which you can then go through at your leisure You can think of it as a way of filtering the Binder so that it only shows those items which match the search When you use project search the results will be placed into a temporary dedicated collection called Search Results If the collections interface has been hid
63. corner of the Snapshot button then it has Snapshots There are two primary ways to manage Snapshots using the Docu ments Snapshots sub menu and the Inspector pane section 18 8 the latter of which will be covered completely in the referenced section You can also conveniently use the Ctrl 5 keyboard shortcut while editing a document to take a quick snapshot in the background 15 6 1 Creating Snapshots While working on a document there are three easy ways to snapshot it for future refer ence The key thing to understand about Snapshots is that they provide a way to set save points for individual items in the binder They are not a tool for providing an overall snapshot of the entire project structurally speaking and are probably not the best tool 154 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING for taking a quick snapshot of your entire draft In most cases large scale backups like this would be best created using the File Back Up Back Up To menu item or by duplicating large portions of the Binder and stashing them elsewhere for future reference That aside it is simple to quickly snapshot multiple documents 1 Select the documents you wish to snapshot in the binder sidebar corkboard or outliner 2 Press Ctrl 5 or Documents Snapshots Take Snapshots of Selected Documents to create a snapshot into each item s individual snapshot list Snapshots can later be accessed in the Inspector pane or Docu ments Snaps
64. delete a file in Scrivener by pressing Shift Delete for instance or by se lecting the Documents Move to Trash menu item the file is not actually removed from the project but is instead moved to the Trash folder You can tell at a glance if the Trash folder has anything in it as its icon will appear full To permanently remove files from the project select Empty Trash from the Project menu after having moved files to the Trash folder Note that although you can rearrange items inside the Trash folder or view it like any other binder item and of course you can move files into the Trash folder by dragging you cannot create new files inside it It is not meant to be a working area If you wish to have a secondary holding area for files you are not sure if you want to really delete you can create your own folder in the binder to hold them 8 1 2 Scrivener as an Outliner If like many authors you are used to using a word processor for all of your writings you probably have a few habits that you ll inevitably end up bringing with you to Scrivener 62 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER One of these is working with large sections of information In a word processor it can be clumsy and even dangerous to work in extremely long files the length of an entire book but at the same time it can also be clumsy working with sections that are too short it means having so many files open at once and no good way of keeping all the windows organi
65. different files using the computer or face the laborious task of cutting and pasting numerous chunks of text to restructure a long piece of work at the end For shorter pieces of writing this is not a massive problem but for longer texts such as novels or academic theses the writer can often find him or herself battling against the tools of their trade What a word processor does get right is in not presuming anything of your working methods It is at the core ruthlessly simple Scrivener is part of a new breed of writing software which focusses more on providing a solid open ended writing tool as the word processor does rather than a writing process which presumes a system upon you As with a word processor there are no chapters or sections or scenes how you use the software determines these things not some feature baked into the program Scrivener s design is fairly unique in that it easily provides a platform for writers of many philosophies and disciplines It s a tool that works equally well for a doctoral dissertation as it does for writing a short story or a screenplay 2 Often you will hear of pantsers vs plotsers within fiction writing circles Those that write by the seat of their pants and those that plot everything out before they start You will not find that this program urges you into one way of working or another Rather you should find that its features and design provide a set of basic abilities which c
66. editor the main text editor must be active the insertion caret must be blinking within it or text must be selected In cases where the interface is split into two editors this not only means any editor must be selected but the editor you wish to perform the function in Some commands do not require text to be selected only an editor others will perform universal actions if no text is selected but an editor is active others will refuse to work unless you have a selection 5 5 Interface Language We are proud to present Scrivener in a growing number of different languages If you would prefer to use the software in another native language you will want to use the Tools Options menu command From there click on the General icon in the left list and select your preferred language from the drop down menu at the bottom of the window Chances are if you have Windows set up to display itself in that language already this will not need to be adjusted If you wish to return Scrivener to the system default you can click the Reset button to the right of the menu selector You will need to restart Scrivener in order for the language settings to be reloaded We currently provide translation for the following languages English Chinese Traditional German 30 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE Turkish Dutch Bulgarian Italian And for those time travellers from the future we hope to make things easier for yo
67. how to use it see Fletcher T Penney s web site The purpose of MultiMarkdown is to extend Markdown s goal which is primarily toward web publishing into the realms of traditional publishing while still retaining a solid platform for web publishing and adhering to the technical and aesthetic principles of Markdown Toward this goal it provides output formats for OpenOffice s ODT format and the BTFX typesetting engine To augment the expansion into document formats additional features have been added which will be of interest to authors such as footnotes tables and cross referencing The basics aside you might be wondering if any of this is relevant to you With the exception of generating TEX documents it should be made clear that there is nothing you can do with MultiMarkdown that you cannot do using Scrivener like a typical word processor That s a very broad statement specifically there are many differences but most of these revolve around how you work rather than what your end product of that work will be We ll get to the specifics shortly but for now here is a list of differences in the end product that you can expect MultiMarkdown hereafter shortened to MMD can produce styled word processor documents when using ODT That means your document titles will be classed ac cording to their depth in the outline block quotes will be assigned to the appropri ate style and so forth If you require a stylesheet ready
68. in a similar fashion to the above though it will allow you to select any of the items in the binder since all types can contain chil dren The name of the scratch pad note will be used to populate the title field for the new document Since the scratch pad does not store your notes in any projects it uses ordinary RTF files which by default will be stored in your Documents folder under Scrivener Scratch Pad These are regular files that you can edit with other programs You can even create your own rich text files in this directory making it possible to add notes while Scrivener is closed To take a screenshot and save it into the current notepad click the hand icon A preview of the current screen will be shown this is what you will get if you click the Save and Close button The Grab an Area with Mouse button will print a grid over the screen and you can then draw a rectangle over the area of the screen you wish to capture Print Screen takes a screenshot of the whole screen but will wait a predetermined number of seconds set below before doing so giving you a chance to set up the screen 104 CHAPTER 11 GATHERING MATERIAL To change where notes are stored use the General preferences tab subsection B 1 4 Pointing your scratch pad folder at a synchronised or shared location like a DropBox or Google Drive folder means you can share scratch pads between Scrivener installations if you use multiple computers 11 4 Text
69. in the binder when more than one item is selected via Shift click or Ctrl click the view will display the title Multiple Selection This is a unique view which lets you know that the corkboard or outliner you are viewing doesn t exist anywhere in the project You are viewing a selection of items but you will not be able to add new items or re arrange existing items because there relationship amongst each other does not correlate with anything in the Binder In all cases where the title is a not a literal binder title you will lose the ability to edit the name of the document You will need to use the inspector or the binder to make this change 14 1 4 Sidebar Navigation Moving to the right hand side of the header bar you will find two arrows pointing up and down These arrows allow you to navigate within the project sidebar be it the binder Search Results or Collection that is currently viewed as though it were a flat list This form of movement is unique in that the binder selection will update In most cases when you navigate to documents using the menus or the various controls available in the header bar the binder selection will not update to follow your select by design In this case however these two buttons are actually synonymous with clicking on documents in the sidebar Clicking the up arrow will move you to the document immediately above the current document in the sidebar The selected document will alway
70. into the compile folder If you would like to install these you will need to download them from the MMD LaTeX support file repository and install them wherever your distribution handles user texmf files https github com fletcher peg multimarkdown latex support 21 5 COMPILING 217 You can mingle LaTeX Input keys in your own meta data if they are meant to be used in conjunction with the defaults so long as you place them so that they appear in the appropriate position upon final output An example might be a custom chapter title typesetting rewrite that you d prefer to use instead of the stock default In addition to the default classes you can write your own in such a way that they are saved into the compile settings or ultimately a preset using the LaTeX Options compile pane and selecting Custom Three text fields will be provided where you can supply the initial preamble and further preamble that is dependent upon any meta data values such as a title page and beginning the document and finally a footer placed at the bottom of the document They will be exported into the compile folder and linked up in the generated meta data for you So long as the syntax is correct your document should be ready to typeset moments later 21 5 4 HTML Produces a clean semantic HTML document In older versions of MMD this used to be the base format upon which all other formats were derived using post processing scrip
71. italics If you intend to keep this level 150 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING of formatting deferring the problem to later by using the document conversion feature will be a better choice 15 4 5 Preserve Formatting If you are planning on letting Scrivener s compiler do all or most of the final formatting for you it can often be useful to preserve ranges of text from the formatting engine A common example of this would be the use of block quoting as a left indent Technical writers might find it useful to set apart blocks of text as code using a special font and layout In the past you had to break out these special sections into their own documents and preserve the formatting of the entire document Now you can define these ranges right in their original context To specify a range of text for preservation select the text in the editor and then invoke the Format Formatting Preserve Formatting menu command This will draw a blue dashed box around the text which can be worked around and within like any other type of formatting range such as italics Also like other formatting tools to toggle a preserved range off simply select the entire range and use this same menu command Preserved formatting will also protect your text when using the Docu ments Convert gt Formatting to Default Text Style tool which is useful for homogenising the look of your document according to your preferences Any text contained within the
72. just using the plain background colour The image will be stretched to fit the screen vertically For your convenience all of the image resources in the project will be listed in this menu or you can select Choose to select an image from your computer To remove an image you ve already set select None Show Hide Toolbar Alt LeftArrow Toggle the visibility of the main application tool bar A 4 Project Menu The Project menu addresses commands and configuration options which are specific to the active project such as document format over rides custom meta data statistics and more If more than one project is open this menu will target the foremost project win dow New Text Ctrl N Creates a new text document below the current selection When a folder is selected the new file will be created within the folder Otherwise the new file will appear as a sibling below the current selection or the location of the document that is being edited New Folder Cirl Shift N Creates a new folder document at the current selection Fold ers will always be created as a sibling to the current selection 290 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS For more information on the differences between files and folders see Project Planning chapter 12 A 4 1 New From Template New From Template gt Once a template folder is set this menu will also be popu lated with the children of that template folder which may need to be set with
73. might be mentioned in passing where applicable Instead this section strictly fo cusses on the application options window and its tabs For information on specific menu options see the appendix Menus and Keyboard Shortcuts Appendix A Unless of course you consider project templates which you should view as a form of secondary settings Project templates are how you can adjust how Scrivener acts with a brand new project 305 306 APPENDIX B OPTIONS To bring up the Options window click on Options in the Tools menu or press F12 Along the side you ll find a sequence of icons Each of these tabs leads to a sub section of the application options and the rest of this appendix will deal with each of these sub sections in turn If you close and re open the options window later on a single session the last tab you were looking at will be preserved At the bottom of the window are buttons for setting the options cancelling and saving or loading your options from an external file To save your changes and leave the Options window click the Ok button The Apply button will update Scrivener with your settings and save your options but leave the window open so you can make further changes The Cancel button as you might suspect leaves the Options window and discards any changes you have made up until the window was opened or when you last pressed Apply The Manage drop down menu is used to save your options to an external file or
74. mode can be adjusted via the project search options menu by clicking on the magnifying glass to the left of the search field The following sections will describe each of the available options to you within this magnifying glass menu Search In Sets the data type of the search You can set the search to only query a certain type of meta data or text field rather than everything e All the default search mode Every available type of searchable field will be queried for matches 20 1 SEARCHING AND REPLACING 195 z Title only the titles of binder items will be searched for This is similar to title filtering in the binder z Text the text contents of files and folders will be queried Note this does not include notes and synopsis z Notes the auxiliary document notes will be searched Note this does not include project notes ea Synopsis the synopsis field for each document will be searched This is anything that has been typed into the text area of an index card or in the synopsis portion of the outliner Keywords only keywords will be searched Note you can also perform keyword searches quickly by using the Project Keywords window Label the text not colour of the label meta data will be searched Note the name of this meta data field can be changed per project ea Status the text of the status meta data will be searched Note the name of this meta data field can be changed per project 2 Custom Meta Da
75. not possible to edit snapshots but you can select text from them and use copy and paste or drag and drop to restore bits of them The Roll Back button will revert the current editor text to the text in the selected snapshot To use it select the snapshot you wish to revert to and click the Roll Back button Scrivener will request confirmation from you and give you the opportunity to snapshot the current text if you wish Note this cannot be undone but if you opt to create a snapshot from your current text it is possible to effectively undo a roll back by rolling up to the latest revision See also Using Snapshots section 15 6 18 9 Linked Notes Pane The final pane keeps track of all the comments and footnotes that appear in the current text view This means that in Scrivenings mode where multiple documents are repre sented this display will show a combined view of all notes across the documents in the order that they appear Along the top of the pane you will find three buttons that in order of appearance from left to right do the following Add anew comment in the text at the current text position or selection za Add a new footnote in the same manner as above 180 CHAPTER 18 INSPECTOR z Delete the selected comment s for footnote s Press the Esc key to return to the main text editor at any time even while editing a note Using notes as bookmarks Clicking on a note will scroll the text editor to the po
76. of text that your readers will use The per document goal meter subsection 14 2 3 in Scrivenings mode acts differently from when editing a single document If the session was formed by selecting a container then adjustments made to the goal will impact the container and the progress metre will count up all constituent text within the session not just the container s own text field When using a session that has been formed from an ad hoc group of items selected individually then the target button will be non functional 15 8 2 Editing with Scrivenings For the most part editing in Scrivenings mode is just like editing single documents one at a time thus most of the tools that you have learned so far will be available to you You 15 8 EDITING MULTIPLE DOCUMENTS 157 can select text and format it copy and paste it to another application create snapshots of individual portions of the session and so on Due to the manner in which multiple real files are being combined as though they were one file it is not possible to select across a file boundary or to delete text from across multiple files at once These limitations are unavoidable If you were to delete a range of text that spanned two or more documents Scrivener would have to guess where one document now ended and the other now began and if the whole of the text of one document had been deleted in the process Scrivener would have to decide whether to delete that document
77. of the formats that support the ability to set font colours annotations and comments will be inserted as actual text in the document enclosed in markers and then coloured according to the annotation text colour or linked comment background colour in the project For the purposes of this definition HTML and the e book formats are considered rich text z Text based formats For formats like plain text and MultiMarkdown when the HTML method is disabled annotations and comments will be simply placed into the text where they originally appeared in the project You can control what if anything is used to enclose the comment in the text square brackets are used by default The following options are available Remove inspector comments Only inspector comments will be stripped from the re sulting manuscript Remove inline annotations Only inline annotations will be stripped from the text If you wish for all comments to be removed from the manuscript make sure both this and the above options are checked Export to RTF as Choose between standard Footnotes at the bottom of every page Endnotes at the end of the work or Comments which will convert them into margin notes in supporting word processors This option is also appli cable to the DOC format Inline annotation enclosing markers If annotations are to be left in place you can set the two markers that will be used to delineate them from the rest o
78. printed above the mouse pointer as you drag These will be depicted by type using icons The four tab stop types available are Typewriter scrolling was an innovation of the The Soulmen s Ulysses 142 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING Left This is the standard type Text will be left aligned with the first charac ter indented to the position of the tab stop Center Text will be centre aligned using the position of the tab stop as an anchor point this can be anywhere on the line Right Will right align text with the right indent set to the point of the tab stop Decimal Most often used for aligning rows of numbers so that the system decimal character is lined up vertically with everything before the decimal being right aligned and any fractional values left aligned To remove a tab stop simply click and drag it down or up out of the ruler until the icon disappears Indents There are three indenting controls not to be confused with margin controls which Scrivener s ruler does not address Indenting is the action of offsetting text a defined distance from the margin A left indent pushes the text boundary toward the right away from the left margin A right indent pushes the text boundary toward the left away from the right margin In addition to the two primary indent marker is the first line indent marker This will only indent the first line of a paragraph Using this control it is possible to set t
79. process of writing entitled The Agony and the Ego Hilary Mantel described a process of growing a book rather than writing one which can be summed up as follows 1 During the first stage of writing you might jot ideas down on index cards phrases character names scene ideas any insight or glimpse 2 When you have gathered a few index cards you might pin them to a corkboard Other ideas build around them and you might even write out a few paragraphs and pin them behind the index card with which they are associated At this stage the index cards have no particular order 3 Eventually you may begin to see an order emerging and re pin the index cards accordingly 4 After you have gathered enough material you might take all of your index cards sheets of paper and jottings and place them into a ring binder You are still free to move everything around but now you have a good idea of how much work you have done and how much more work you have to do Scrivener is thus a nonlinear writing tool that provides the writer with all of the fea tures found in any text editor along with the functionality for growing your work organically within the program itself in a way which will become more useful the more you write naturally and effortlessly Chapter 2 About This Manual This manual has been written using Scrivener and is available in three different formats In addition to the PDF available from the Help menu unde
80. read What is MultiMarkdown section 21 2 for an overview of its philosophy limitations and capabilities 21 1 What is Markdown The MultiMarkdown syntax is based on the Markdown syntax created by John Gru ber and the best description of what Markdown is comes from his Markdown web site Daring Fireball Markdown is a text to HTML conversion tool for web writers Mark down allows you to write using an easy to read easy to write plain text for mat then convert it to structurally valid XHTML or HTML Thus Markdown is two things 1 a plain text formatting syntax and 2 a software tool written in Perl that converts the plain text formatting to HTML See the Syntax page for details pertaining to Markdown s formatting syntax You can try it out right now using the online Dingus The overriding design goal for Markdown s formatting syntax is to make it as readable as possible The idea is that a Markdown formatted document http daringfireball net projects markdown 207 208 CHAPTER 21 USING MULTIMARKDOWN should be publishable as is as plain text without looking like it has been marked up with tags or formatting instructions While Markdown s syn tax has been influenced by several existing text to HTML filters the single biggest source of inspiration for Markdown s syntax is the format of plain text email 21 2 What is MultiMarkdown For comprehensive information about MultiMarkdown and
81. right alongside a footnote on page 27 This stacking method makes it easy for you to see all of your notes at once and jump straight to that portion in the text by clicking on these notes in the stack Individual notes can be collapsed so if one note is quite long it needn t monopolise the space Click on the disclosure arrow to collapse or expand a note Meanwhile the anchor point in the text where the note is attached will be drawn using one of three methods 1 For comments a prominent coloured highlight around the word making it easy to spot the location of notes as you scroll through your text 2 For footnotes a grey highlight around the word or phrase giving a distinctive advantage over hunting for small superscript numbers in a word processor Clicking on any anchor highlight will highlight that comment in the inspector open ing it if necessary to do so You can also hover over a highlight and the note text will appear in a tooltip without opening the Inspector To use linked notes you must in most cases have anchor text to attach the note to in the same way you need some text to create a hyperlink with Often this will be whatever text you wish to comment upon or in the case of footnotes the position where you want the footnote to ultimately appear If you wish to jot down pre writing notes in a blank document it might be easier to use inline annotations or the document notes sidebar in the Inspector section 18
82. selected you will be presented with a text field Type in the separator that was used in the text to define sections A common example might be a character Any line in the document that contains only the text entered into this box will be removed from the file and used to split the results in two This process continues further splitting the work into subsequent binder items until all of these lines have been processed 102 CHAPTER 11 GATHERING MATERIAL A portion of the first line in each sub divided section will be used to title the incoming items in the binder 11 1 6 From Scapple Documents Scapple the freeform text editing software from Literature amp Latte gives you an easy to use interface for roughing out a new idea At some point it may be advantageous to move your idea from Scapple into Scrivener There are three ways of doing so 1 If individual notes are dragged from an open Scapple document into the Scrivener binder they will be converted into individual Binder items one per note 2 When bringing in a Scapple document that is not intended to be converted into individual items one per note you would want to export as a text document from Scapple using the File Export gt menu in Scapple and then import that as you would import any other text document into Scrivener If you find this results in a confusing order it might be better to use the first method and then once you have the order set up correc
83. sure that your working style fits in with the defaults If you find the that the project goes for long periods of time without saving you might want to reduce the interval to one second If it is saving in the moment you start back up try increasing it to three Automatically name untitled text documents upon saving When enabled text docu ments that have been left untitled will acquire the first few words from the docu ment This will not trigger until you have added a second line or typed around one complete sentence into the first line This way your documents do not get titled until the wording has settled down a bit B 1 3 Bibliography Citations Manager Bibliography Citations Manager Scrivener can integrate with several popular bibliog raphy management programs Use this option to select your favourite from the Applications folder The reset button will clear your choice 308 APPENDIX B OPTIONS Pro Tip This merely links which application will launch with the For mat gt Bibliography Citations menu command If you do not use a citation man ager but frequently use another program along with Scrivener you could use this feature to quickly launch or switch to that program B 1 4 Scratch Pad Notes Location Notes location Your scratch pad notes are stored on the hard drive using RTF files This option lets you choose where those files will be automatically saved By default they will be stored in your user folder under
84. terms of its completion such as To do or Rough draft but this field can be used for whatever purpose you desire Unlike the label there is no corresponding colour and so its display potential is more limited Corkboard can be displayed as a diagonal stamp across the face of the card The appearance of this can be adjusted in the Corkboard and Appearance option tabs and display can be toggled with View Corkboard Show Hide Stamps or F9 10 1 META DATA TYPES 91 10 1 4 Using Keywords Each document can have a list of keywords associated with it These are useful for mak ing documents easily searchable for instance you can list all characters and locations connected with a scene in the keywords even if they are not mentioned explicitly in the text Creative uses for keywords also include extended status control plot management and whatever else you can think of Like labels keywords have an associated colour which will be displayed beside the keyword in the inspector list and in the Project Keywords window see be low Additionally keywords can be used in the corkboard as small coloured squares along the right hand edge of the card The visibility of these can be toggled with View Corkboard Show Hide Keyword Colors or Ctrl F12 The display preferences for these can be adjusted via the corkboard display controls subsection 12 1 4 When exporting or printing keywords will be displayed on a single li
85. the currently active Group Mode button Cork board is the default in the main toolbar or use View Corkboard You can tell which mode is active by its shaded background After clicking the shaded button you should get a blank view that looks suspiciously like an empty text document In fact that s precisely what it is Type in some text and see what happens Note that in the binder the Folder icon has changed and now sports what looks like a little page of paper in its corner This means the folder itself has text associated with it Let s try something a little more radical Right click on the Folder in the binder and select Convert to File It should change to a stack of papers with words on them Delete the line you wrote in that item and it will turn into a stack of paper with an empty page in front Go ahead and right click and select Convert to Folder Nothing fundamental changed here You didn t lose any information the only thing that changed is the underlying type of the item which is really primarily a visual change When an item has other items beneath it but it is a file it is often referred to as a document stack or a file group but fundamentally it can act just like a folder does This documentation will often refer to either folders or file groups as containers when the distinction does not matter 64 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER Let s test that theory Select one of your files in the binde
86. the standard editor The only difference is that Full Screen mode stores its own scale setting independent of the editor splits Paper Position Select where the paper the column of text should be anchored on the screen on the left in the centre or on the right You may want it in a non central position for instance if you have a lot of notes to which to refer and you want the inspector open and wide next to the text 160 CHAPTER 16 FULL SCREEN Paper Width Use this slider to change the width of the text You can set it so that the text takes up the whole width of the screen or appears as a column Paper Height To access this slider hold down the Alt key It will replace the Paper Width slider from above This sets how tall the paper column should be giving you a letterbox presentation at its more extreme settings Keywords Brings up the standard Project Keywords section 10 2 which you can use in conjunction with the inspector below to assign keywords to the current docu ment Inspector Brings up the floating Inspector panel see below Go To Operates as a handy navigation tool and functions identically to the main View Go Tom menu Using this you can switch between documents without returning to the main project window Dynamic Controls amp Statistics The middle portion of the control strip changes de pending upon your editing mode In standard editing mode this will display the word and character
87. these files in a graphics editor even Preview will do for simple cropping and use the software to cut out the excess padding You can remove a bad attempt and add it again using the above instructions until it looks right Another common problem is a white background This may or may not be obvious in the icon browser but will look bad in the binder Removing a white background is more difficult If you lack the expertise to do so try selecting another icon that is similar from a different source JPEG images cannot have transparent icons so 24 bit PNG and TIFF files work best Icons are stored within the project that you add them to You will need to add any icons you wish to use to the individual projects that would make use of them If you have a common pool of icons that you would like to use going forward consider creating a custom project template and assign your icons to it New projects created from that template will have your custom icons available to it See Templates section 7 7 for more information Chapter 9 Navigating and Organising In this chapter we will discuss the project window itself and the many tools that are available for moving around within this window controlling its appearance and adjust ing how it behaves when you click on things within it 9 1 General Navigation Moving around within a large project is an important part of writing efficiently espe cially in an application like Scrivener which
88. this turned on unless for performance or security reasons you wish to control the process manually Back up on project open Whenever a project is opened a backup will be created before you can begin working This can slow down load times with large projects Back up on project close Whenever a project is closed either directly or via application shutdown a backup will be created This can slow down close times in large projects Back up on each manual save Will create a backup copy whenever you manually save a project with sg S Note this is not the same as Scrivener s auto save feature which by default is triggered after every two seconds of idling Backups will only be triggered if you select the menu command manually Compress automatic backups as zip files If you are storing your backups on a network drive or Internet synchronised service like DropBox this option will not only save space but will protect the project format from the sorts of damages which can B 9 BACKUP 323 occur when lots of files are transferred over the Internet However it will adversely affect the performance of your backups as Scrivener not only has to collect and assemble a copy of the project but compress it as well before letting you return to your work With very large projects this can take many minutes to complete and turning it off can save a lot of time Use date in backup file names In addition to a numbering token which Scrivener uses
89. to be richer more vibrant colours will stand out amongst pastel choices depending on their associated material s content Label colour can be expressed in the following ways nearly all of which are optional and can be toggled in the View Use Label Color In gt sub menu 1 Corkboard will be used to shade the upper right corner of the card when using the Corner Mark indicator type When using the Pin type a graphical thumb tack will be coloured according to the label Use View Corkboard Show Label Indicator to toggle their visibility in the corkboard The visual style can be changed in the Corkboard option tab 2 Outliner can be set to tint the background colour for each row using the label colour with View Use Label Color In Outliner Rows 3 Binder can be set to highlight the background of each binder item using the label colour in a manner similar to the Finder Toggle this behaviour with View Use Label Color In Binder 4 Icons enabled with View Use Label Color In Icons this option will tint docu ment icons wherever they appear 5 Index Cards enable with View Use Label Color In Index Cards this optional method will tint the paper colour of index cards wherever they appear 10 1 3 Status Stamps As with the label the status field can have its representative name altered to suit your project s unique requirements By default this field represents the status of a document in
90. to cause major headaches 3 Always wait for your syncing software to finish syncing before you shut down your computer This is of course a corollary to the first rule Just as you should wait for your computer to be updated before opening a project you need to make sure that all of your changes made to the project have finished syncing back to the server and thus made available to your other computers before you put it to sleep or shut it down 4 Reduce auto save frequency this step is optional unless you are working on a very slow connection such as dial up Editing a Scrivener project can generate a lot of network traffic because of how often Scrivener saves files to the disk With modern high speed connections this should pose no problem but with slower or unreliable connections to the Internet it s a good idea to set Auto Save in Gen eral preferences a little higher so that changes are sent in larger batches to the Dropbox server rather than trickling in constantly When working this way you Tt may be possible to customise the status icon and not all of the visual themes use a green checkbox to indicate when Dropbox is in standby mode Familiarise yourself with how your preferred status icon works 13 1 SCRIVENER EVERYWHERE 117 might want to save manually more often with the File Save menu command Alternately pause Dropbox the newer versions of Dropbox allow you to pause syncing This can be done from the sta
91. to check how close to the edge of the paper your printer can go to avoid truncating the text 256 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Paper Size Letter v Orientation Portrait v Margins Top 1 00 inch es gt Left 1 00 inch es A Bottom 1 00 inch es Right 1 00 inch es 5 Units Inches x Page Header Footer V Noton page 1 Count page 1 Header Surname TITLE lt p gt Align Right v Header font Courier New 12 Choose Footer Enter lt p gt for page number Align Center v Footer font Courier New 12 Choose Figure 23 10 Compile Page Settings RTF 23 13 1 Headers and Footers These settings will impact the entire document though you can opt out of using them on the first page with the Not on page 1 checkbox Further you can also choose to not have the first page counted with the page count token by leaving Count page 1 disabled This will accommodate the use of a title page For both the header and footer you will find the following controls Header Footer These two fields respectively set the content that will appear on the page You may use the lt p gt token here to specify where the page number should be printed A common example from submission standards could be lt surname gt lt projecttitle gt lt p gt Alignment To the right of the content field select the appropriate alignment for the header whether it should be printed along the left or
92. to keep track of the rotation defined below the date and time of the backup will be included in the file name making it easier to sort by recency in Windows Ex plorer It also means each backup filename will be unique which could be of use with an external backup system old backups will not overwrite when using the OS s native back up features Only keep n most recent backups To avoid the proliferation of hundreds of backups a limiter is employed Use this option to have Scrivener restrict the number of backups to a defined amount Once this amount is reached it will rotate through the copies overwriting the oldest available You may find this needs adjusting if your work habits cause backups to overwrite each other too quickly It s generally a good idea to have at least three or four days of backups available To disable the limiter entirely select Keep all backup files Backup location The default location stores your backups in your AppData folder un der Local Scrivener Scrivener Backups If you would prefer these backups be kept somewhere more visible or on a synchronised external drive or secured area click the Choose button and use the folder navigator to select the destination folder If you choose a location that later becomes invalid a common example is external drives Scrivener will immediately warn you as soon as it tries to back anything up As a convenience you can quickly access the backup folder by
93. to use a citation manager that can scan an RTF and produce a bibliography for you section 20 5 Text colours and Highlighters to aid in increasing the visibility of passages you are provided with an extensive complement of tools for highlighting and marking your text in colour Marking your text is one thing finding those markings amongst a 100 000 word draft is another The robust Find by Format and Text Function subsection 20 1 4 makes it easy to quickly step through your draft point by point isolating and addressing issues or reviewing changes that you ve made Annotations and footnotes this document will refer to all reader notes as footnotes even if their intended result will be endnotes come in two different flavours Inline notation which are added directly to your text and linked notation which are attached 162 163 as a special form of link to the base text of your book with the content of the note stored off to the side in the inspector much as in many word processors Which of these to use will remain up to you and your preferences in most cases You might even find that a mixture of methods will suit you using inline notation for short comments to yourself about prose and linked notes for other types of comments There are advantages and disadvantages to each method z Inline notes are always visible in your text there is no way to diminish their promi nence So for some forms of notation this c
94. too These are all decisions that are better left to you Chapter 16 Full Screen Full Screen mode allows you to edit your text in a distraction free environment Made popular by a plethora of zen ware applications which promise a stripped down and often plain text writing view Scrivener s approach is decidedly more expressive though you can keep things dirt simple if that is what you are looking for You can view any text document or Scrivenings session in Full Screen mode with a virtual page treatment on a background by default black Meanwhile you will have full access to your document s meta data in a floating low impact Inspector panel Ultimately you can compose and refer to your notes without the noise of the rest of your desktop or even Scrivener itself Consequently you ll find that Scrivener disables itself to a degree while in Full Screen mode Menu commands that would otherwise be available are turned off in most cases because these are commands which would have no meaning at all such as commands for merging two selected items in the binder or enabling corkboard view To determine what will be loaded into Full Screen Scrivener uses the active selection This selection can be made either in the sidebar or in an outliner or corkboard view This works by implication as well when no cards are selected in a corkboard technically the container is selected as can be witnessed in the inspector and so it i
95. views and are A 3 VIEW MENU 287 saved in the project file You can also manage columns using the arrow button above the scrollbar in the outliner itself See also Managing Columns subsection 12 2 1 Use Label Colour In gt A document s label colour see Setting Up Meta Data chap ter 10 for more information on labels can be applied as a tint to various interface elements throughout Scrivener This menu contains a list of toggles which will enable tinting to the corresponding elements The intensity of all tinting can be universally adjusted in the Appearance option tab section B 2 ea Binder F5 rows in the binder will have a background bar placed behind items with the associated label colour z Icons F6 Only the icons will be tinted throughout the project Wherever the icon for a binder item shows up such as in the Header bar next to the title in Corkboard in the binder and so forth it will be tinted using the colour of the assigned label Index Cards F7 the entire background paper for index cards will be tinted using the assigned label colour This includes the index card which appears at the top of the inspector z Outliner Rows F8 as with binder tinting the background for the entire row will be filled in with the label colour Move Focus To gt Provides application focus navigation tools Rather than navigating around in your project these commands will let you quickly select differ
96. when the Synopsis checkbox is active in the Formatting compile option pane subsection 23 8 1 Likewise if you switch the card back to text mode the image will be preserved in the background in case you ever switch back To remove an assigned image click the X icon in the far right top of the index card in the inspector 12 1 3 Linear Corkboard The standard or linear corkboard displays a linked representation of one level and sec tion in your binder hierarchy You can visualise this as a bit like looking at specimens on a slide Each slide has a slice of a tree branch on it To look at a different whether deeper or higher portion of the branch you ll need to load a different slide The corkboard displays one layer at a time and by clicking up and down in the hierarchy you can view different layers In the linear corkboard moving items around will change the actual order of those items in the binder This makes it very useful for getting a bird s eye view of a section of your book and enables you to affect changes upon the ordering of that book with simple drag and drop you can also use the Shiff Arrow keys to move cards around in the direction corresponding to each arrow key If you enable drop ons in the Corkboard options tab section B 3 you ll also be able to stack cards with other cards just as you 108 CHAPTER 12 PROJECT PLANNING Corkboard Options Size Ratio Spacing _ Cards across 2 A
97. which includes many common functions including a project search tool To change the order add or remove icons use the Tools Customize Toolbars menu item It is also possible to hide the toolbar by using the View Hide Toolbar menu item or by right clicking on the toolbar and deselecting it from the provided list Note that when the toolbar is hidden you can still access project search via the Edit Find gt sub menu or Ctrl G Ctrl S which will provide a pop up window featuring the same search controls available as on the toolbar 5 1 2 The Binder The binder is so called because it really acts as the ring binder for your project It provides a hierarchical list of all items in your project You can drag items around to restructure your project and double click on any item to rename it or use the F2 shortcut key Selecting an item in the binder displays its content in the editor pane that most recently had the keyboard focus see below and its meta data in the Inspector again see below You can create as many folders and files as you wish in the binder but there will always be three top level folders that cannot be deleted although they can be moved around within the top level and renamed Draft The Draft folder is where you place all of the pieces of text you want to include in your final manuscript As such the Draft folder is unique in that it can only hold text files and folders it cannot directly hold image file
98. will be moved beneath the chosen item as subdocu ments Note that if you select a text item as the target it will become a file group as A 5 DOCUMENTS MENU 295 it now contains children Items that have been used recently will be displayed in the top level of this list beneath any favourites if applicable Left Right Up Down Use Ctrl with the appropriate keyboard arrow key to move items around in the outline Left and Right will promote or demote the item in the hierarchy Up and Down will change its order in context with its siblings Add to Collection Displays a list of all standard collections in the project The cur rently selected item s will all be added to the collection you choose This com mand is also available in the binder contextual menu New Collection in a single move will create a new collection opening the tab interface if necessary and assign the currently selected document s to that new collection This is equivalent to clicking the button in the collection header bar though more convenient if you use the menu and realise while there that what you thought was a collection has not yet been actually made a The remainder of this menu will be used to display existing arbitrary collec tions Dynamic collections will not be displayed as they cannot be modified directly Sort gt Sort acts on the children of a selected container in the Binder or Outliner or on the contents of the current Corkboard if
99. you Once you have changed a preset and saved or compiled the selection menu will revert to Custom Your custom settings will always be saved in the project but if you change presets you will lose your custom settings If you wish to save your settings for future use read the following section section 23 4 for instructions on how to do so In addition to these global presets many of the project templates that ship with Scrivener come with useful compile settings as well saved into the projects that are cre ated from those templates You can preserve these settings by exporting them as files with the Save button available in the expanded compile interface The available built in presets are Original This is the standard compiler setting It will preserve your draft as closely as possible without adding any additional titles formatting adjustments and so on If you have very carefully designed your book from the start using the text editor this might be the best option or at least the best starting point It s also the easiest way to use the compiler If you feel overwhelmed it may be more efficient to just compile to a basic word processor form like RTF using the Original preset and finishing off the formatting in your preferred word proces sor z E book A suitable simple format for e books which generally require basic and flexible designs in order to be displayed on many different screen reader displays
100. you can simply double click on the field to change their value 12 2 1 Managing Columns To add or remove columns from the display click the small down arrow button in the far right column header bar or use the View Outliner Columns sub menu Column settings are saved per editor split So you can set up an outliner to perform a particular function on the left side of your screen and display extended information on the right side just to provide an example To change the order in which the columns are displayed drag and drop the column header to the desired location You can resize the column width by moving your mouse between column header titles until the cursor changes to a double pointed arrow then click and drag to increase or decrease the width of the column Primary information These display the Binder name and synopsis card contents in columnar format zw Title ta Synopsis Corresponding to the general meta data the first two columns allow you to edit the Label and Status of each row individually The remaining two columns are read only ze Label za Status Created Date Modified Date 112 CHAPTER 12 PROJECT PLANNING Statistics the first two options show the word or character counts for each item in the outliner The second set will not only show the statistics for that row but will sum up all of the items descending from that row as well A folder itself might have no words in it but if it contains five
101. 4 instead To create a new note either 1 Select the text you wish to notate and then invoke the appropriate menu command or keyboard shortcut To make a comment use Format Comment or Shift F4 To make a footnote use Format Footnote or Shift F5 This method is quite useful for comments The highlight range doubles as the specifier ilf you intend to address a piece of prose in your text the highlighted text is immediately obvious as the problem area 2 Place the caret in or after the word you wish to notate and use one of the above commands or shortcuts This is the easiest method to use while writing as you don t have to switch to selecting text When you reach the point in the phrase 168 CHAPTER 17 ANNOTATIONS AND FOOTNOTES where you wish to insert a footnote you can merely finish typing in the word and press the shortcut key In addition to the menu and shortcut commands you can also click either the button or the fn button in the header bar of the Comments amp Footnotes inspector to add comments and footnotes to the selected text respectively Getting Back to the Text Once you have finished typing in the content of the note you can swiftly return to where you were typing by hitting the Esc key In the case where you have pre selected text to be notated the cursor will be returned to the end of the prior selection Since linked notes are a type of link they cannot be placed atop a range of text that is alr
102. 4 1 Creating Scrivener Links Drag and Drop z To create a link to a specific item in the binder drag the item into the text where you would like it to appear by first holding down the Alt key when dragging The blinking cursor will help show you where the final location of the drop will occur When creating links in this fashion they will be automatically titled by the name of the document that was dragged 9 4 LINKING DOCUMENTS TOGETHER 81 E Link To Document mj Create New Linked Document Link to Existing Document Destination CF Research Title Joseph Aarin A new document with the specified title will be created inside the destination document and a link to it will be added to the current document V Only show containers in destination list Figure 9 2 Create a New Linked Document z It is possible to drag more than one item into the text area at once Select multiple items in the binder and drag them over as above Links will be separated one per line z Items can be dragged into the Notes Pane and the Project Notes window as well as the main text area in this fashion Select Items and Copy When you want to create links to items in multiple places at once it is usually easier to use the Edit Copy Special Copy Documents as Scrivener Links menu command Now you can paste Cirl V the items into several different places rapidly As with Drag and Drop you can select more t
103. 67 Orientation Portrait will print a document in the standard fashion showing text in a tall column on the page Landscape orientation treats your paper as flipped sideways for a short but wide column of text Margins Set the four margins each as an offset from the physical edge of the paper So to offset the block of text one inch in from the left side you would set Left to 25 4mm This tool will not take into account your printer s physical limitations If you want to print very close to the edge of the page in order to minimise how much paper you use you ll need to refer to your printer documentation to see what the minimum safe margin is 25 2 Printing Index Cards When viewing a collection of items on a corkboard you can print the content of the corkboard onto index card sized blocks on a page The formatting for this has been optimised to work with Avery tm Perforated Index Card stock but you can use any paper with a chopping block or scissors to cut the cards apart if need be or even feed in regular index cards if your printer supports abnormal paper feeds Since this method is optimised for printing to standard index card size it will not print a perfect copy of what you see on the corkboard and in most cases this would not be desirable anyway as the background textures and such would be a waste of ink and longer synopses would only show what could be seen without scrolling So instead the content of the card s title an
104. 8 rep resenting chapter 12 section 3 sub section 18 z Paperback Novel this preset produces a pleasing design aimed at 5x7 sized pages with parts as above only it is designed to work with books that group chapters into books or parts z Proof Copy A useful preset for internal proofing prints It will reformat your script to double spacing so you can easily take notes and print a disclaimer after each chapter title as well as in the header making it easy to send out Not for distribution copies to your proofing team This preset has been set up to treat folders as chapters and everything else as titled sections making it easier for you to know where that typo came from in the binder If your book is organised differently you will want to change how things are arranged in the Formatting pane Screenplay Represents common settings for integration with Final Draft version 8 or greater using the FDX file format Short Story similar to the standard manuscript format this preset will not print any titles at all assuming that your entire draft is one short story with no chapter breaks Standard Manuscript Format Formats your book using standard Courier 12pt type and a number of common conventions such as scene separators double spacing underlined emphasis instead of italic page numbers and so forth Note to get the full benefit of this preset you will want to use one of the rich text formats such as R
105. Across sets how many cards will be drawn along each row before wrap ping to a new row The Auto Fit option will automatically wrap cards based on whether the next will fit much like word wrap works and is the default 2 Show Hide Pins F9 toggles whether the coloured markers are displayed on the index cards Markers take on the colours associated with the labels that have been assigned to the documents represented by the index cards The visual style of pins can be adjusted in the corkboard option tab section B 3 Show Hide Status Stamp F10 toggles whether stamps are displayed on index cards Stamps show the current status associated with the document repre sented by the index card as though it has been stamped on the index card The appearance of stamps can be adjusted in the Corkboard tab section B 3 and the Appearance tab section B 2 z Show Hide Keyword Colors Ctrl F12 keywords assigned to a document can be visually indicated along the right hand side of the index card as coloured pieces of tape The number of keywords that can be shown at once can be changed using the corkboard display options button For more information on using keywords see Setting Up Meta Data chapter 10 Outliner Columns Displays a list of toggles which will reveal or hide the corre sponding columns in the active Outliner view These settings are stored by in dividual editor split letting you have custom columns for the two
106. Appending Tools Text selections can be easily appended to other texts within Scrivener using two handy methods Append Selection to Document This command is available in the contextual menu when right clicking on selected text The command will provide a sub menu popu lated with every item in the binder prioritising any favourites to the top of the list Best used when the target document is not visible or you want to remain in the source document after the append action The menu will also have a New item at the top of it which will let you create a new item in the Binder with the selected text as its contents Chapter 12 Project Planning 12 1 The Corkboard The corkboard provides a familiar visual way of viewing documents in your binder You can arrange index cards in direct correlation with their order in the outline structure We will explore the various features in depth shortly but first let s take a look at the index card itself In Scrivener every document you create is a document and an index card and a cork board and an outline This can be a little confusing at first for in the real world an index card clearly cannot also be a corkboard In Scrivener though you can choose to view any document as a corkboard Each index card on a corkboard represents a document held within the selected document in the binder that is represented by the corkboard itself Another way of looking at it the corkboard displays the su
107. BIU E A 722 B E 4 Draft x o V Synopsis Epke E Document One lt gt EL Document One m T vio El Document Two Document Two OF Research This is the first document Trash Y General Meta Data Label E Theory z Status Modified 2011 11 05 17 50 33 7 Include in Compile E Page Break Before E Compile As Is Document Notes 4 135 Words 5 Chars 27 lt gt E Document Two oom 5 wand this is the second document Cr Ee 135 4 Words 6 Chars 33 o A Om amp Cy Figure 5 1 The Basic Interface collecting deleted items and finally the top level area where you can create your own files and folders to both editor splits Format Bar Supplies frequently used text editing and formatting tools available Editor The editor can be split into two panes which can show two parts of the same document or two different items altogether This is where all viewing and editing is done Inspector A feature packed tool providing information about the currently active split The inspector has four separate sub panes which address various aspects of the viewed resources Not all of them are available for all media types 20 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE Most of the main interface sections binder editors and inspector can be resized by dragging the divider line between them Each of these elements will now be explained in greater detail 5 1 1 Toolbar Scrivener has a customisable toolbar
108. Binder tab is selected While not a true collection this is how you can navigate back to the Binder after viewing a Collection Click on any tab to select it when a tab is selected it will re colour and ghost all of the tabs below it to help indicate which is the active tab Additionally the header bar will change its title to the name of the tab You could hide the Collections interface at this point and continue working in that tab The background colour of the sidebar and the header bar will help remind you that you are not in the full Binder 68 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER Collections i New Collectior LJ Binder Draft C Research g Trash Figure 8 2 The basic Collection interface with the binder selected When first created Collections will be assigned with an automatically generated colour but their tabs can be recoloured by double clicking the colour chip to the right of the label and selecting one of the provided options If you would like to use your own colours you can select the More option at the bottom of the menu Likewise double click on the title to change the name of a collection The Binder and Search Results tabs cannot be renamed or permanently removed The are three main types excluding the Binder of Collections 1 Standard Collections allows you to freely add and remove items as you work This is the most flexible form of Collection 2 Search Results Collection a special colle
109. C command that cannot be replicated manually So if you do not like the default look you can either adjust the formatting after pasting or generate your own ToC from scratch by using the lt p gt token and linking it to the section you wish to reference with Scrivener Links The title should be linked as well if you wish it to acquire any prefix or suffix information Read Linking Documents Together section 9 4 for more information 22 1 1 Things to Watch Out For When first opening the compiled document in Microsoft Word you will need to generate the ToC numbers by running a test print preview once they will appear as question marks until you have done so a This feature requires word processors capable of understanding bookmarks and cross references Page numbers may appear as question marks in the list if the software do not z If you are not using title generation in compile and are instead relying on a format ted title within the draft text itself you may find the Copy Documents as ToC feature less useful and might wish to create your own from scratch z If some items come out with no page number check to make sure those items are included in the compile settings and are set to output text If the preview area in the Formatting pane type row that corresponds with that item type is empty then there will be nothing to link to 22 1 HOW TO CREATE A TOC 225 win external requirements z In order for links
110. ES While it is possible to use annotations to create footnotes this compile time conversion has fewer options available to it than standard footnotes For fully featured footnotes continue to the next section 17 1 2 Inline Footnotes The creation of inline footnotes is quite similar to annotations and really in most ways footnotes act identically to annotations The main difference lies in the fact that anno tations are meant to be omitted upon export or print outs though do not have to be whilst footnotes become real footnotes or endnotes upon export and thus have more options available to them for styling footnotes particularly with the RTF format option Visually in the editor the difference is that footnotes are not coloured but are surrounded with a black line and have a grey background Formatting Footnotes Unlike annotations any whitespace on the front or back of the text will be stripped out when you compile This allows you to insert buffer space around the footnote and help set it apart from the regular text As with annota tions the placement of the bubble is important in that the text around it should flow sensibly but with footnotes you also need to take into account that if the bubble were collapsed that is where the footnote reference mark would be Try to visualise the entire bubble as a single number and this will help you with placement As a drafting application Scrivener does not do typeset footno
111. Example Ruler Settings 15 3 4 Typewriter Scrolling You can turn typewriter scrolling on for the main editors and for the composition mode editor independently via the Format Options sub menu Ctrl Meta T When it is switched on just as with a typewriter the line of text you are typing will remain centred vertically in the editor once your text is long enough to reach the middle of the screen This means that your eyes do not have to be glued to the bottom of the screen all the time when typing in a long piece of text When Typewriter Scrolling is enabled your scrollbar will act as though there is more content than the document actually has This is because we add extra spaces below the last line in the document in order to keep it in the middle These spaces do not actually exist in the file and will vanish when the feature is disabled 15 4 Formatting Tools 15 4 1 The Ruler The text editor in Scrivener uses a ruler for setting indents and tab stops such as many word processor applications provide It can be shown or hidden via Format Show Hide Ruler or Ctrl R This will present a simple indenting and tab stop interface Figure 15 1 The following elements can be found in the ruler Tab Stops Left stops can be created by double clicking anywhere in the numbered area or by right clicking in the ruler and choosing a type Once placed they can be moved via click and drag and the numerical value of its position will be
112. File Export gt Comments amp Annotations Optionally you can restrict this to the selected items in the sidebar rather than the entire project You can also choose to export titles along with the comments making it easier to find where they came from 17 4 Text Colour and Highlights Text colour can be applied to your document like switching to a coloured pen in a fashion similar to any other formatting range Select the text you wish to change the colour on and either use the Format Font Text Colors sub menu or use the text colour selector Figure 17 1 in the format bar to set the colour The format bar will remember the last colour you have used so it easy to rapidly apply the same colour to multiple text selections with a single click you can also apply the last colour used with the Ctrl Shift H shortcut If you wish to change the colour right click on the colour chip or click and hold A quick selection tool will appear with the following contents 17 4 TEXT COLOUR AND HIGHLIGHTS 171 J Show Colors Figure 17 1 Text colour selection showing bright red as the selected colour 1 The built in presets black red etc 2 Common swatches the first swatch with a red line drawn through is remove colour choosing this one will erase any colour in the selection and return the text to default 3 Show Colors access to the colour selection tool Setting a marker highlight to a range of text is quite s
113. Finally along the right hand side of the footer bar the Open in External Editor button you can also use Ctrl F5 will open the PDF in your preferred reader If you wish to make edits to the PDF such as adding notes or otherwise annotating it you will need to make use of this feature Simple annotations will be displayed in the viewer but you will need to use an external reader to view pop up notes 14 3 VIEWING MEDIA IN THE EDITOR 127 Troubles Saving PDF Annotations If your PDF reader software will not allow you to save over the existing file in the project it may be that the viewer in Scrivener has marked the file on the disk as being in use Change your Binder selection so that the PDF is not shown in any editors and then try again PDF Contextual Menu When right clicking on a PDF additional options will be provided Copy Selection Ctrl C The current selection will be copied to the clipboard as plain text Selections are made using a rectangular selector Click and drag with the left mouse button to create a rectangle so that it encloses all of the text you wish to copy Copy Page Text Alternative to selecting text specifically you can use this command to copy the entire current page you are viewing as plain text Encode Copy As Sets the plain text character encoding to be used when copying text from a PDF This is primarily only important when pasting into a plain text editor rather than within Scrivener itself Naviga
114. Formats General purpose rich text format supporting multiple fonts images tables bullet points footnotes and com ments Almost always the best option when exporting for use in a general purpose word processor This is a Microsoft Word compatible format UTF 8 Unicode plain text file Plain text contains no formatting but can be opened almost anywhere on all platforms and devices and as such is useful for long term archival Industry standard Word doc file Format used by OpenOffice LibreOffice and other word processors For transferring your script to Final Draft this is the best option unless you have an older version of Final Draft than version 8 Maintains custom script element format ting Web Support Creates a single HTML file suitable for web publishing Likewise though using the newer XHTML format and is thus better suited toward modern web publishing plat forms Static Layout Support Use to send the compiled draft directly to your printer The Portable Document Format is useful for archival and sending copies out for read only use as it will look iden tical on all machines A typesetting standard similar to PDF in what it pro vides a stable format that will appear identical on any machine or printout used more commonly in the design and publishing industry Generate feature rich e books for use in portable reading devices that support the ePub format such as the Sony Reader Nook or iPad ePub files can
115. II compliant punctuation to typographic punctuation such as em dashes ty pographic quotes and ellipses characters Don t generate id attributes for headers Disables MMD s automatic ID generation based on the name of the header This option only impacts HTML Do not en able this if you are using cross references Currently non functional Use MultiMarkdown 2 compatibiliy For use with legacy MMD2 installations This impacts how Scrivener will generate image syntax and whether or not Format complete is added to the meta data block for you Notes extension Currently non functional Chapter 24 Exporting You can export your work and research material from Scrivener at any time either as individual documents or by combining the draft into one long manuscript and exporting it in the format of your choice using compile Since the latter is a large topic in and of itself it is covered in depth in its own chapter Compiling the Draft chapter 23 Here we will look at various ways to export data piecemeal from your project either for backup purposes or to facilitate collaboration with authors who do not use Scrivener 24 1 Drag and Drop Between Projects While it is not possible to drag items directly from the binder to other programs on your computer including the Desktop you can easily drag items between Scrivener projects This will retain almost all of the document s meta data including its notes snapshots an
116. OTNOTES 17 2 4 Finding Linked Notations Scrivener provides tools for stepping through your entire project searching for inspector comments and footnotes Read more about this feature in Find by Format and Text section 20 1 4 17 3 General Usage Tips for Notation 17 3 1 Stripping Out All Notation If you wish to strip out all inline and linked notes from a text at once this can be easily done by copying the text with Edit Copy Special Copy Without Comments or Footnotes or and then pasting directly over the copied text Do note this will also destroy footnotes so use this command with care 17 3 2 Resetting Linked Note Formatting Both comments and footnotes allow formatted text within them This means you can apply whatever formatting you wish into these and they will be exported with this for matting when you compile assuming your compile settings have not overridden footnote formatting Consequently adjusting the Formatting preferences subsection B 5 1 for notes will not immediately impact them as this might wipe out your formatting You can however just as with documents reset the formatting to the application default by right clicking on selected notes and choosing Convert to Default Formatting This menu option will only be available when the note is out of editing mode 17 3 3 Exporting Annotations and Comments You can export all of the inline annotations and linked comments in your project into an RTF file with
117. Print on Demand service an e book published to Amazon or iTunes or a proofing instruction page for your editing team or a standard manuscript submission Using the Front Matter feature near marking 4 Figure 23 1 it is possible to quickly select between sets of files depending on what your current compile target is If these folders are themselves con tained within a folder called Front Matter Scrivener will prioritise their availability in the selection menu by placing them at the top of the menu regardless of where the folder is located in the Binder 23 6 SEPARATORS 235 Text Separator Emptyline EJ This separator will be inserted between adjacent text documents Folder Separator D oyi m This separator will be inserted between adjacent folders Folder and Text Separator D oyi 7 This separator will be inserted before text documents that follow folder documents Text and Folder Separator E Page Break v m This separator will be inserted before folder documents that follow text documents Figure 23 2 Compile Separators Pane Want to see front matter in action The Novel project template provided with Scrivener demonstrates a possible setup with a group of individual front matter folders for use with corresponding publication outputs such as standard submission or self publication with e book and PDF Selecting a folder as a front matter folder will transpose all of the c
118. Project Set Selection As Templates Folder below Read more about Document Templates section 8 5 Add Collection Creates a new collection automatically placing any selected documents into the collection for you This is analogous to clicking the button in the top of the sidebar Remove Collection Deletes the currently selected collection tab Since collections only store a list of references to your original items this will not remove the items as well This is analogous to clicking the button in the top of the sidebar This cannot be undone For tricks on how best to use text and project statistics read Goals and Statistics Track ing Tools section 20 2 Project Targets Ctrl Toggles visibility of the targets floating panel which lets you track a few simple metrics in real time as you type and edit This can be left open while you work Project Statistics Ctrl Opens a window displaying the statistics for the current project including the word and character count for the draft and for the current binder selection Text Statistics Ctrl Opens a window displaying statistics for the current document and thus only available when a text document or Scrivenings are focussed A 4 2 Project Notes Project Notes Displays the project notebook in a separate window For more informa tion on using project notes see Project Notes section 12 3 Show Hide Project Keywords Cirl Shift O Displays or closes the
119. RATION AND SHARING When this happens copies of each conflicted file will be duplicated with different names so that you can decide which one is the best copy or manually merge them to gether in a text editor Ordinarily this is fine and easy to do but inside of a Scrivener project it can be more complicated For one thing the full contents of your project might not even be easily visible Secondly some of the files in a project are very technical in nature and if you are not fluent in XML not to mention Scrivener s schema it might be impossible to best decide which version is better The solution is to never get into this position in the first place and this is fortunately easy to do To avoid conflicts with synced projects 1 Always make sure your syncing software is done syncing before you open a project Good syncing software like Dropbox will let you know when it is moving data to or from the central server on the Internet In the case of Dropbox a small icon will be placed into the task bar system tray in the lower right portion of your screen near the clock Keep an eye on this indicator and wait for the green checkmark to appear before you open the project 2 Never open a project more than once If all goes well Scrivener will warn you if you try to do this but in some scenarios this warning might fail so try to always remember to close your project when you are done with it Ignoring this rule is a surefire way
120. Scrivener as well as a way to check for updates on our server or submit bug reports Scrivener Manual A quick link to the PDF that you are likely reading The version that ships with Scrivener will be kept as up to date as possible but newer revisions might also be available on the web site s support page Interactive Tutorial If you have not yet gone through the tutorial you should this menu command will walk you through the process of creating the tutorial Scrivener project You will be given the option of where to save it and from that http www literatureandlatte com support php A 9 HELP MENU 303 point on you can load it like an ordinary project If you have already created the tutorial project you can use this menu command to quickly load it again so long as it hasn t been deleted or moved Video Tutorials A handy hyperlink to a ten minute introduction to Scrivener as a video presentation Support A handy hyperlink to our web site s support page Here you can download the latest copy of the PDF in US Letter or A4 or the project used to make it find contact e mail addresses links to our forums and wiki after sales support from our vendor eSellerate and more User Forums A handy hyperlink to the official Scrivener forums where you can meet other authors around the world using Scrivener share tips report bugs request tech support or have a cup of latte in our off topic section Literature amp
121. TF with parts as above only it is designed to work with books that group chapters into books or parts 23 2 AVAILABLE COMPILE FORMATS 229 z Synopsis Outline Presents an indented easy to read outline that includes titles and synopses for all file types Files at levels greater than the top level will not print their titles by default z Times 12pt with Bold Folder Titles The use of 12pt double spaced Times New Ro man is increasingly becoming the submission standard in certain parts of the world This preset will handle most cases but you ll want to check with your publisher for the precise specifications and adjust it accordingly By default it will treat folders as chapters and leave regular text files and text groups without titles 23 2 Available Compile Formats The compile formats table Table 23 1 shows all the formats supported by Scrivener with commentary on their usage For most word processor based workflows including Microsoft Word RTF is the best option Nearly every word processor provides solid RTF import and export capabilities and some even use RTF as their native file format 23 3 Compiling and Saving Settings Once you have everything set up the way you like the Compile button will automatically save all of your settings into the project dismiss the window and compile the project in accordance with your specifications The important thing to know here is that each project s compile settings a
122. Take care to manually back up excluded projects from time to time Save As Template Saves the current project as a template This will add it to the New Project window for use as a basis for your future projects For more information on creating templates read Templates section 7 7 For full documentation of the printing process read Printing chapter 25 Page Setup Cirl Shift P Accesses the page layout setup window Note these settings do not adjust Compile printing only current document printing though Compile can be optionally configured to use your Page Setup paper dimensions Print Preview Ctrl C Ctrl R Displays the preview interface showing you what will print if you use File Print Current Document This will not be suitable for pre viewing the final compiled version of the draft as no processing and formatting will be done to the text Read more about Print Preview section 25 4 Print Current Document Ctrl P Prints the current text editor selection If more than one text item is selected they will be merged together into a single printout much like Scrivenings mode in your editor Compile Ctrl Shift E Compile is the standard method for producing a manuscript out of all the pieces in the Draft This feature provides an immense degree of flexibility and is fully documented in Compiling the Draft chapter 23 Exit Fully shuts down Scrivener This will not present the New Project window like
123. Tools Menu A 8 Window Menu A 9 Help Menu B Options B 1 General B 2 Appearance B 3 Corkboard B 4 Navigation B 5 Edit 5 6 4 5 scs B 6 Corrections B 7 Keyboard B 8 Import and Export BY Backup reres C Customising Toolbars D Placeholder Tags E Tips and Tricks and Trouble El E2 Getting Support Troubleshooting F Project Bundle Format F 1 The Files Folder F 2 The Settings Folder F 3 The Snapshots Folder G Legal 271 272 272 277 282 289 291 296 301 302 302 305 306 308 312 313 315 316 318 319 322 324 325 328 328 328 329 330 331 331 332 Part I Introduction Chapter 1 Philosophy The maker of a sentence launches out into the infinite and builds a road into Chaos and old Night and is followed by those who hear him with something of wild creative delight Ralph Waldo Emerson Most word processors and text editors aimed at writers assume the creative process will take place in linear form that is they assume that the writer knows how his or her work will begin and will start at the beginning and continue through until reaching the end and for those that do work that way they assume that a linear form is a useful format for a text that spans hundreds of pages Planning and restructuring is therefore forced into a separate workflow the writer must either plan before beginning and keep track of hundreds of
124. User Manual Scrivener 1 8 for Microsoft Windows erat ate Literature amp Latte March 2015 Revision 1 8 6 01 2010 2015 Literature amp Latte LTD All rights reserved Contents Contents Introduction Philosophy About This Manual 2 1 Terms and Conventions 22 Finding Things o c eese wens What s New Installation 4 1 Registering 046 eae ss 4 2 Application Updates 4 3 Installing Scrivener on Linux 4 4 Staying Informed 4 5 Installing Scrivener on a Portable Flash Drive Interface 5 1 Interface Overview 52 View Modes 5 3 Full Screen Editing Mode 5 4 Selections e dak anew es 55 Interface Language Quick Tour 6 1 Project Format sisses asss 6 2 The Main Window 6 3 Outlining Your Draft 6 4 Scrivenings Mode 6 5 More About Corkboards 6 6 Compiling the Draft ii 13 14 15 16 16 16 18 18 25 28 28 29 31 31 32 33 37 38 40 ii II Preparation 7 Project Management Zl 7 2 13 7 4 ies 7 6 lel 7 8 7 9 Project Size Limitations Creating a New Project Saving and Making Copies Opening Existing Projects Moving and Deleting Projects Splitting Projects Up Templates Backing Up Your Work Tips for Working Cross Platform 8 Setting Up the Binder 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 How the Binder is Organised Binder Icons Binder Controls Using Collections Docum
125. a special folder that Scrivener will create for them In secured working environments you might wish to alter the location of this to reside in an encrypted area of the drive if necessary B 1 5 Warning Reset Warnings When you first start using Scrivener actions which have a destructive or un usual nature such as importing in such a way that original formatting might be lost will produce a warning dialogue You can often choose to disable these as you see them from within the warnings themselves The Reset All Warnings button will clear all of these dismissals and make them appear again the next time it is appropriate B 2 Appearance Most options relating to the appearance of Scrivener can be modified here In a few cases things which technically modify appearance but are more related to the specific function they fall within will be located in the dedicated tab for them A good example are the Corkboard appearance controls B 2 1 Options General and miscellaneous appearance options Show subdocument counts in the binder Beside each container in the binder a num ber will be displayed showing how many documents it contains This number is recursive meaning that it will not only count its immediate children but any of the descendants beneath those children as well Alternate outliner row colors Draws alternating background colours behind rows in the outliner When this is turned off the background will be a solid shade You ca
126. ab stops and margins use the menu command Format Show Ruler or press Ctrl Shift R Directly below the Format Bar is the editor Header Bar The title of the current doc ument is printed here Untitled since we haven t named it yet There are also some buttons for moving around in your project and adjusting the editor view but we ll get There are of course many exceptions to this A series of articles for a magazine might work very well together in a single project 6 3 OUTLINING YOUR DRAFT 33 Getting Started E User Manual Interactive Tutorial Scrivener User Manual Non Fiction Scriptwriting Miscellaneous RECOMMENDED FOR ALL NEW USERS An interactive tutorial in the form of a Scrivener project enabling you to learn about all of Scrivener s main features as you use them This tutorial provides the fastest and most effective way to get up and running preparing you for creating your own projects Also available from the Help menu onors z Cennen oneer Figure 6 1 Template Wizard to that later The important thing to notice right now is that the Untitled document has been selected in the binder and that this selection is being viewed in the editor Below the editor text area is the Footer Bar which contains information about the editor session such as your current word and character count and often contains useful buttons for adjusting the view The c
127. able USB flash drive below Once you are satisfied with the install location click Next twice to confirm On 64 bit Windows systems this will be the x86 folder On 64 bit Windows systems this will be the x86 folder 13 14 CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION Once the progress bar fills the Next button will again activate and you ll be given the option to load the introductory text as well as immediately launch Scrivener and start working An application icon will be placed on your desktop for you as with all shortcuts it is safe to remove this if you d prefer to use the task bar or Start Menu to launch Scrivener 4 1 Registering 4 1 1 The Trial Version You can try out all of the features of Scrivener for 30 non consecutive days without hav ing to pay or register During that period Scrivener will be fully functional After 30 days of use you will no longer be able to access Scrivener at all unless you register If you are getting close to the end of your trial and have decided to not purchase Scrivener please skip forward to the sections on Compiling the Draft chapter 23 and Exporting chapter 24 for details on getting your data out of the program 4 1 2 Purchasing Scrivener During the trial period whenever you launch Scrivener you will be reminded of how many trial days you have left and given the option of buying and registering Clicking on the Buy button will take you to the Literature amp Latte online store where you c
128. acements if you are feeling brave 23 12 FOOTNOTES COMMENTS 251 23 11 1 Advanced Replacements Usage Replacements can also take a special tag which will be used to match everything within the replacement match that does not otherwise match the structure of the replacement tag This is much more easily explained with an example The character sequence can be inserted into the first column anywhere within the replacement field An example might be Now in your base text if the replacement field encounters a caret sym bol it will seek for a second caret symbol and then copy everything in between those two symbols into the tag This can be placed into the With column amidst your custom expansion code A practical example that would be useful for those writing directly in HTML Replaced with lt span class index gt lt span gt Will take the following example text from your compiled document This is a test of advanced replacements And convert it to This is a lt span class index gt test lt span gt of advanced replacements The character may be placed anywhere within the With field but must be com pletely contained within delimiters in the Replace field It can also be used multiple times within the With field This means you can capture some text and then use it multiple times in the output Here is a possible example using LaTeX r Replaced with inde
129. after you split making it easy to remove it or style it as a header It is not possible to undo a split action but you can use the Merge feature to effectively undo any unwanted splits Pro Tip You might also find the ability to search by formatting subsection 20 1 4 to be of use as well as often the places you will want to split the document will coincide with headers Once you have used the Find by Formatting panel to find a header you can close it then use the Split with Selection as Title function Shift Ctrl K with the text the search selected for you continue finding results with Shift Cirl F3 splitting and repeating until the document has been completely split up Merging Documents Together In opposition to splitting the ability to select two or more documents and merge them together into a single document is also made easy with Scrivener Unlike the split func tion merging is a super document level action and thus requires a selection to be made in a corkboard outliner binder view or from within a collection you cannot merge from within a text file Documents do not have to be in consecutive order they can be picked from through out the project When selecting non linear items here are some tips to determine order ing z Ifthe view you are picking documents from is based on the outline order such the binder outliner or corkboard then the merged document will retain the original outline order 140 CHAPTER
130. age break becoming in most cases chapter based endnotes Available to Print PDF DOCX ODT X HTML PS and TXT Footnote Separator Lets you choose what form of separation you would like between footnotes and the main text body The available options are single return empty line page break and a horizontal line Footnote page title When Page break is chosen as the separator above the contents of this text field will be used to title that section 23 12 2 Comments and Annotations Options As with footnotes it is possible to use both inline annotations and linked comments in the same project and selectively handle them during compile You may wish for example to use inline annotations for simple editing notes and linked comments for references to source material It might then be useful for collaborators to see the source material references but not the simple inline editing comments to yourself Most of the compile formats have the same options available but will handle the ex port of annotations and comments in different ways depending on what is supported within that format RTF DOC Provide additional options for utilising margin comments Unfortu nately this feature is not widely supported by other programs If comments refuse 254 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT to show up in your preferred word processor try using one of the other methods listed below z Other rich text and word processor formats In all
131. ail and should address most of what you should know to get the best results in your work Further recommended reading 1 Interface chapter 5 2 Navigating and Organising chapter 9 http www literatureandlatte com videos index php 42 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR 3 Gathering Material chapter 11 4 The Editor chapter 14 and Writing and Editing chapter 15 5 Compiling the Draft chapter 23 For now happy writing Part II Preparation 43 44 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR The pages are still blank but there is a miraculous feeling of the words being there written in invisible ink and clamoring to become visible Vladimir Nabokov One of the principal goals of Scrivener is to be your first stop when a new major project is embarked upon The program therefore contains a variety of tools which address the early phases of a writing project These include brainstorming outlining collecting and organising research gathering prose snippets building background and world building information and more Another Scrivener principle is that what works best for your readers and even your editor might not work best for you as a writer As writers we see the text in a different way and we have different demands on how we organise that text A table of contents is great for a reader but is it the best tool for a writer What if you could have your own table of contents one that evolved out of the structure of the work
132. ailable to items which allow text editing in the editor namely folders and files You may toggle the visibility of the Inspector with View Layout Inspector or by pressing Ctrl Shift I 18 1 Synopsis Card At the top of the inspector for the Notes References and Keywords panes you will find a depiction of the document s index card The corkboard s special features such as pins and stamps will not be rendered on the card as they can be readily viewed in expanded fashion in the inspector As with the corkboard you can edit the title and synopsis right on the card updating the document s corresponding information There are two controls along the top of the card on the right hand side The first is a drop down menu with an index card graphic in it Click here to select between text synopsis and image synopsis In graphical mode you can drop in an image from your desktop or the binder which will be used to represent this document on the 174 18 2 GENERAL META DATA VIEW 175 corkboard The text synopsis will not be erased and in fact will still be used in the outliner and various export methods but in the inspector and corkboard the graphic will be used instead Read Placing Images on the Corkboard subsection 12 1 5 for further information The Auto Generate button on the far right will produce a synopsis based on the first few lines of text in the document If text is selected in the editor it will be used t
133. ain complex MMD syntax and thus an inline footnote can feasibly support all of the things that normal text in the editor could such as images lists tables and so forth The only thing you cannot do within such a block of text is footnotes since footnotes and annotations cannot overlap in Scrivener When a span style annotation has paragraph breaks within it Scrivener will inject lt br gt elements to emulate paragraphs without causing syntax errors All of this means that the original flow of the document with or without notation will be preserved Using Annotations as Functional Ranges Furthermore and especially in conjunc tion with post processing systems like XSL the usage of HTML elements for notation allows for some creative post processing uses effectively allowing you to expand the syntax of MMD as needed or even just as a way to better style your document with CSS In fact the Scrivener user manual that you are reading right now makes heavy use of this technique Whenever you see a tip box such as this one you are looking at what started out as an inline annotation in Scrivener Ranges of text which pertain to only one platform or another such as keyboard shortcuts are blocked out with annotations as well so that only one type appears There are numerous strategies for doing so but it is not within the remit of this manual to get into detailed examples of post processing Visit the MMD section of our user forums for archived d
134. alic as well as access to the main font chooser Writing Tools gt Quick links to a few handy web searches The current word or se lected text will be sent to the search engine or reference site of your choice Insert Table Inserts a table at the current caret position and brings up the table configu ration window Insert Image Select an image from the resulting file dialogue box to insert it into the text at the cursor position Read more about Inline Images section 15 5 It is also possible to insert a new image based on a screen capture with Capture Selection From Screen Simply drag a rectangle around the area you wish to capture and it will be inserted into the text editor at the cursor position Statistics Readout This non selectable entry at the bottom of the contextual menu dis plays the word and character count when an active text selection exists in the editor It is thus useful for getting statistics on a portion of the currently edited file Images Contextual Menu These options appear when right clicking on an image that has been placed within the text section 15 5 Save As Picture Available if you have clicked on an inline image Allows you to save the image to disk You can also drag images into the Binder Edit Image Available if you have clicked on an inline image Brings up the image scaling panel Linked inline images subsection 15 5 2 provide a few extra convenience commands for working wi
135. an amplify your method and make the mechanics of writing easier for you If you start with a big pile of files that need to be sewn together you ll probably find an emergent outline to be useful If you make the outline first you ll probably find the integrated outline is your book approach to be useful No longer will you need to maintain a separate outline document that needs to be kept up to date with the text of the book The two will be one and the same No more will you need elaborate spreadsheets to track crucial details All of that can be woven right into the mechanical structure that is your book in this software These principles extend to all forms of writing from the novel to the legal brief to the documentary shot list Scrivener was developed because no other writing environment quite provided all of the features required for the sort of writing that demands easy access to research a quick overview of numerous documents and the easy restructuring of swathes of text The main concepts of Scrivener can be summarised as follows z The software should allow the writer to use many of the formatting features famil iar to word processors different fonts italics paragraph styles and so on It is up to the writer to avoid distractions not the software What looks good in print is not always the best way of viewing something on the screen the software should allow the user to completely reformat the text on export or for prin
136. an purchase a licence for Scrivener You can also visit the online store at any time whilst using Scrivener in the Help Purchase Scrivener menu When you buy a licence for Scrivener online you will be e mailed your unique serial number which will have the following format SCRIWINOO1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Make sure that you keep this serial number along with the exact name under which you registered Scrivener the Serial Number Name in a safe place as you will need both if you ever have to register Scrivener again in the future Remember that you may need to re register at a later date too for instance when installing Scrivener on a new computer or re installing after wiping your hard drive for whatever reason so it is very important to store this information safely If you have lost your serial number a button will be provided in the registration win dow that will take you to our vendor s self service support site The number in the first block may be something other than 1 this is okay 4 2 APPLICATION UPDATES 15 4 1 3 Registering Scrivener After purchasing a licence and receiving your unique serial number you can register Scrivener by clicking on the Enter Licence button in the Scrivener Trial Version box that appears whenever you launch the program Alternatively you can choose Regis tration from the Help menu Either way you will be presented with the registration dialogue b
137. an be an advantage in that you cannot defer or easily ignore them This also makes it easier to see your notes and your book at the same reading speed there is no need to look off to the side to get a feel for the meta book z Linked notes do not disturb the flow of text no matter how large they may be This means even the lengthiest of notes can be placed into your text without having to scan from word to word in order to read the underlying book text z Inline notes being within the text itself do not require any additional interface to use and never require the mouse to read They thus work well with a slim workflow or in situations where screen space is at a premium z Linked notes can act like bookmarks Clicking on them in the inspector will whisk you right to the spot in the text where they are anchored z Inline notes can be placed anywhere you like especially annotations even in be tween paragraphs or at the very beginning or end of a section whereas linked notes require something to anchor to This makes them more useful when jotting down notes in sections before you ve even started to write z Linked notes can be easily viewed together in a collected interface no matter how far they are spread apart in the document A note on page 10 has the same promi nence as a note on page 1 z Tt follows then that inline notes are only visible in the current contextual surround ings Notes that are pages awa
138. and leaving the base document clean looking This has however come at the expense of a slightly more involved meta data block and an aware ness of how to install custom tex include files into your system We have implemented a system to reduce the necessary plumbing required to set up and switch between IATEX stylesheets as well as handling the production of gathering of any necessary files for one click typesetting In fact you may not have to touch a single setting to get a ready to typeset document Been Using MMD3 for Some Time When you select the MultiMarkdown gt LaTeX compile method a LaTeX compile option pane will be added to the list By default your document will be compiled to the Memoir book class as it always has in Scrivener If you wish to change that or already have your project set up to define the class you ll want to visit this pane and change the provided setting If you don t do that then end result could have doubled up meta data keys The automatic class selection system will insert the necessary meta data keys where they should go amongst any you have declared and if necessary it will produce for you any of the boilerplate tex files these classes depend upon This will all be done during the compile phase so the meta data keys being used will not be displayed in the Meta Data options pane If you already have these files installed in your IATEX distribution then they will not be produced
139. anisms familiar to most applications will be available including a few special purpose printing tools for visualising clusters of data like index cards and outliner columns that specialise in highlight meta data and synopses In most cases compile notably excluded all you need to do to print a selection is press Ctrl P or select File Print from the menu Continue reading for tips and features on how to control the appearance of your print outs Many aspects of the printout can be adjusted in File Page Setup and will be covered in each relevant section These settings are saved into each project not globally 25 1 Document Printing Individual documents and supported media can be printed one by one When more than one text document has been selected in the binder they will be printed together according to the current view mode If you are viewing the selection as a corkboard index card printing will be used if viewing them in scrivenings the text view will be printed using the text document printing settings below 25 1 1 Text Documents Print Settings Page margins paper orientation and size can be set up with File Page Setup or Ctrl Shift P Paper Sets up the type of paper that you intend to use in your printer most common paper formats are supplied and if a printer with multi tray capability is attached to the computer you can specify an optional tray in the Source field 266 25 2 PRINTING INDEX CARDS 2
140. ant to bring into an existing project the chances are that at some point you will need to import documents created in other word processors and programs into your Scrivener project Fortunately this is very easy Importing files into the project binder means that these files will be copied and possi bly transformed into a fashion that Scrivener can use better into the project itself The original copies on your disk will not be removed or altered in any way While it is pos sible to easily edit many file types from within Scrivener with an external editor if you wish to retain maximum external control over the files you might wish to use Refer ences section 18 5 instead which are useful when your research material measures in gigabytes There are two ways to import documents from other programs 1 Drag and Drop In Windows Explorer select the files you wish to import and then just drag them straight into the binder not the corkboard or outliner in Scrivener When dragging folders all of the contents of that folder will be added recursively and the file structure on your disk will be recreated in the binder 2 The File Import sub menu provides some handy methods for bringing existing material into your project binder including directly off of the Internet if you have the URL The first time you import anything you will be presented with an informative window describing important information pertaining to the various limita
141. any element list you create but will not appear here as they have no special properties by definition Script Formats are Static Creating a script format is a static process That is to say that if you create a script format and then use it to write a script if you then go back and edit the script format in the Script Settings panel the elements of the script you created using the older script format will no longer be recognised as anything other than General Text until you click into each element in your text and select the correct element from the script elements pop up menu to update the text Thus to save yourself lots of painful reformatting later it is strongly recommended that you ensure you get your script format right before you start using it widely Next to the Manage menu subsection 19 4 2 is another drop down menu that allows you to choose the units used to define your style inches centimetres or points most script formats use inches of course On the bottom right of the panel are the OK and Cancel buttons for saving or cancelling the changes you have made to the format mode respectively Clicking OK saves the script format into the current project package only This means that if you share your scriv file with someone else that someone else will be able to open the project and use the script format regardless of whether they have this script format installed on their machine The format will no
142. apple notes into Scrivener you can choose to have the first line of the note stripped out of the main text and synopsis reserving it strictly for the binder title See From Scapple Documents subsection 11 1 6 for more information on how Scapple notes can be imported into Scrivener Default URL import type When importing web pages directly off of the Internet us ing File gt Import Web Page the specified import method will be used by default You can however override the default from within the import dialogue box on a per import basis PDF Document will convert the web page to a PDF files which should retain much of its original layout and graphics This will be the most portable op tion if you intend to work in your project from both a Mac and PC There are two choices to select from 1 via Internet Explorer uses the standard Internet Explorer system in Windows to produce the PDF This will usually produce the highest qual ity transfer 2 via WebKit uses the native built in tool to create the PDF This re quires no external dependencies but may produce a lower quality result MHT MIME HTML archive the native storage format for Windows MHT files can be viewed in supporting browsers such as Internet Explorer Al though they do not currently display themselves in Scrivener s editor we will be adding support for MHT display in the future This option is available for those who wish to adopt the new s
143. archy of documents and wherever that hierarchy takes you it will take so in the form of folders or their cousins the doc ument stack The concept of hierarchy is important because it means you can keep the parts of the book you aren t currently working on tucked away and that means you can feel free to break things down as far as you want no matter how many hundreds of items you make in the binder if you sort things into folders or file groups you can always keep the clutter at bay 8 2 Binder Icons There are many binder icons Table 8 1 used to show the type of item and in the case of folder and text documents hints about its status as well the text and folder document icons will change depending upon certain conditions A new document that you ve just created will look like an empty sheet of paper until you add a synopsis to it then the icon will change to an index card If you start typing into the main text editor the icon will then show a sheet of paper with words in it Likewise folders will display if they have synopsis or text content see the prior section if that comment resembled gibberish How you use this information is up to you Some people like to develop their out line in stages first building the skeleton then fleshing out the longer descriptions in the synopses fields and finally starting to write prose into the pieces of the outline These 8 3 BINDER CONTROLS 65 indicators can help them see h
144. ard shortcuts Alt Shift UpArrow and Alt Shift DownArrow Using these navigation tools will also focus the binder on what you are selecting and is one of the few instances in which an action taken in the editor will change the Binder selection On the far right of the header view you will find two buttons for controlling the editor splits To create a split click the one which represents the layout you prefer Once a split is open the corresponding opposing button will be replaced with a blank button Clicking on this button when both editors are visible will cause the editor associated with that Header Bar to take over and the other editor to close Below each editor pane is a Footer Bar This will change depending on the type of document visible and the current editor mode When a standard text document is being viewed for instance it will display the word and character count along with a pop up but ton for changing the text scale and a button for setting document targets In scriptwriting mode it will provide shortcuts for accessing various script entry macros Various types of multimedia and PDF will display their own appropriate relevant information in the footer bar Corkboard and Outliner group view modes have their own footer bar func tions too See Also View Modes section 5 2 for further information on the various group and text view modes available 5 1 INTERFACE OVERVIEW 23 Viewing Media in the Editor secti
145. as optional material you can include from your project for each item in the Draft As Scrivener pro ceeds down the list of items it has been instructed to compile it will consult this table for instructions on how to handle it If that item is a folder it will look at the folder row and if Title and Text have been checked will add the binder title for that item into the manuscript followed by any text that is in that folder file If the next item is a text file it checks the text file row If that row says only Text is exported then it will print just the text content of that file into the manuscript Creative use of this feature can produce outlines Titles only for all types a document with only your notes and no manuscript text chapter containers that export only their title and so forth Note that as you toggle elements on and off you ll see a live preview of how they will be inserted into the compile in the Formatting Editor below the table We ll discuss how to change the look and feel of this in the next section Global Changes You can enable or disable elements for all rows by Option clicking on any of the checkboxes If you want to apply settings to only certain rows you can use the standard Copy and Paste functions to copy settings from one row and paste them into another but be aware this action will also paste any custom formatting settings from the lower pane as well Some of the provided project
146. asn t opened for you automat ically For both methods once the installer starts Windows will present a warning dialogue asking if you wish to run the installer program Verify that your program has been digitally signed by Literature amp Latte LTD If it does not state that it is verified you could be attempting to install an unauthorised copy from a third party Click the No button and try downloading again from the official Scrivener homepage if you continue to experience problems contact us via the forums or through customer support If it is verified then click the Yes button to proceed The installer will start and you should see the Scrivener icon and Literature amp Latte logo Click Next to continue and read the licence agreement You will need to check I accept the agreement before the installer will let you proceed The next screen will ask where you wish to install Scrivener At this point the installer will verify if you have administrative rights on your computer If you do the default install location will be where all of your other program install in the Program Files folder If you do not have administrative rights you can still install Scrivener and an alternate location where you have write permissions will be selected By default this will be your Documents and Settings folder In all cases it is okay to change the defaults though do read the special note about installing Scrivener directly on a port
147. assic example of this might be a chapter in a biography that ends up becoming another biography about an other person entirely or a short story that keeps growing and starts to become a novel Another common example are from those who use a dedicated Scrivener project as a commonplace book or idea gathering tool They might start developing an idea in this project and once it is ready to become a screenplay or what have you they ll want to move it out of the idea journal Fortunately nothing could be simpler There are two ways of going about this 1 Create a new project for the pieces which merit moving them out of the parent project You can use whatever template you wish for this or even blank it doesn t matter Now with the original project open alongside the new one position the 7 7 TEMPLATES 51 windows so that you can see both binders at once Now simply drag and drop the pieces from the old project into the new project s binder That s it you re done 2 Use File Save As to create a fork copy of the entire project Once you run this command you will immediately begin working in the fork Simply delete everything from the binder that isn t necessary for this new project The first method might work better if your needs are simple If you do not have a lot of meta data and never work with linking items together it s safe to do However if you use a lot of labelling or status markings the second method will
148. ater line height or inter paragraph spacing Using Pre serve line spacing will protect these lists at the expensive of not applying your preferred line spacing to standard paragraphs z Preserving Titles If you ve got a document with a lot of headers already formatted into it you could try preserving font size style and line spacing but this will in many cases be the three things you want to apply Titles are going to be harder to manage automatically and may require manual effort to keep their formatting as intended Another thing you can consider doing is switching to using Scrivener s philosophy of using the compile feature to generate titles from your binder names and leave worrying about special formatting for headers to the computer Ranges of text that have been blocked out with Preserve Formatting subsection 15 4 5 will never be altered by this tool much in the same way that the compiler will leave them alone by default One last tip is to use pre emptive format conversion If you know that you will wish to discard the formatting of the text you are pasting you can use the special Edit Paste and Match Style command to do so This will treat the text as though it were plain text and as such it will take on all of the characteristics of the text around the cursor position where it is pasted Since the text is treated as plain text this means you will lose any inline formatting and function such as hyperlinks and
149. bdocuments of the selected document as editable index cards At the same time the document displayed as a cork board or outline is also an index card which holds the synopsis of that document and itself could also be viewed as an index card on a corkboard or a row in the outliner If that is as clear as mud then read on 12 1 1 So What are Index Cards Anyway One of the principles that takes some adjustment to get used to is the relationship be tween index cards and the text of the book itself You can type titles and text onto the card just like you would the real thing but there is sometimes confusion as to why that text doesn t get dropped into the book So let s take a look at what an index card really is There are six different components to an index card but depending on your preferences you might not see them all at once 1 The document icon 2 The title of the document 3 The synopsis of the document 4 The colour label colour swatch in top right corner optional 105 106 CHAPTER 12 PROJECT PLANNING E A scene in your book This is the synopsis forthe document represented by this m card It is meantyto be a short 3 summary of what the document contains Figure 12 1 A fully loaded index card using the rounded card theme 5 The status stamp diagonal text stamped across the middle optional 6 Keywords indicators swatches along the right optional Also not shown in the screenshot Fig
150. be better Most meta data will transfer even snapshots when dragging and dropping Anything that requires the project itself be set up a certain way however like particular labels with predefined colours will be more touchy and transfer and Scrivener Links will always fail references so long as they point to items within the dragged selection will work so long as they are all moved at once At this point in your reading if you are going through this in a linear fashion some of the above might be arcane knowledge so feel free to bookmark this page if you feel you ll need it in the future so that once you know more about the things you can do in Scrivener you can make a more informed decision 7 7 Templates Simply put project templates are ordinary projects which have had some basic structure and settings added to them In some other applications templates are almost a way of modifying the way the entire application behaves and so in a way the presence or lack of templates as features define the shape of what the software can do With Scrivener it s best to think of them as example starter projects or even better yet a learning tool Many of them come with a few example items added to the binder but these are meant to be helpful guides for laying out your book not forms that you have to fill out or features that must be worked around The items added to templates are like any other items you ve added to projects on your own T
151. blem First for visualising smaller pieces of a document as a single document but only temporarily you can select any container in the binder or even just a scattering of items and choose to view and edit them much as though they were a single document section 15 8 Second the compilation chapter 23 system enables you to publish your final work as a single document no matter how many pieces it may be divided into within Scrivener For splitting long documents in some cases you may be able to utilise use import tools which do most if not all of the splitting for you File Import Import and Split will let you supply a separator or a string of characters that mark natural sections within the original file Whenever Scrivener encounters this separator it will automatically start putting the remaining content into a new binder item continuing to split into new binder items until it runs out of material Secondly if you ve done your original outlining in a dedicated outliner program it will likely support an OPML export which you can drag into Scrivener s binder It will recreate the outline structure placing any original outline notes into the text area for each outline header For most other cases read on Splitting The Document Often when importing material that you have composed in other applications that do not support an easy to use built in outline your text will arrive in Scrivener in one large chunk Where you
152. bust and well designed for content creators down to the very core of their technology and philosophy Like all programs on your computer Scrivener saves your work into files You ll learn more about the specifics of this in the coming sections but for now simply know that there is absolutely no connection between the software and your hard work Upgrading versions registering your trial or switching to a beta build will have no impact on your data save that you of course will not be able to open it so long as Scrivener is not installed it will be accessible once the software is available again When new update is available release notes will be displayed by default and a button will take you straight to the download Click Download and Install Update to fetch the 16 CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION installer and start the upgrade process automatically Installing an update is much like installing the application initially so if you are unsure of how to proceed review the prior section on installation If you are accessing the Internet through a proxy server common in many offices the automatic tool may not work If you need to upgrade the application manually for what ever reason you can use a web browser to visit our main web site and check for the latest version there To compare with your currently installed version see the Help About Scrivener menu item The version number will be printed below the acknowledgements and credits 4 3
153. by clicking on them in the binder Again this alternate method of navigation only works when the item you click on in the binder sidebar is already contained within the locked view You will need to unlock the editor in order to use the binder to select items outside of the current view 9 3 2 Binder Affects Binder Affects The View Binder Affects sub menu contains several choices for al tering the standard behaviour to become locked rather than dynamic For example if you have a left and right split ordinarily when you click in the binder what you click on will be loaded in the active split If Binder Affects Left Editor has been en abled however all clicks will be sent to the left split no matter which is active The precise contents of this menu will alter depending upon whether you are using a vertical or horizontal split orientation Alternately the Other Editor choice will cause the binder click to always act in Opposition to its normal behaviour loading the binder click in whatever editor is not currently active To reset the binder behaviour to default use View Binder Affects Current Editor 80 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING See also z Splitting the Editor section 14 4 for further documentation on how to use editor splits 9 4 Linking Documents Together Much like hyperlinks on the Web Scrivener Links make it easy to create and use a net work of text based cross references within your pr
154. by one point Smaller Ctrl lt decreases the size of the font by one point Baseline Ctrl G Ctrl UpArrow and Ctrl G Ctrl DownArrow adjust the baseline height of the text most commonly referred to as superscripting and subscript ing Text Color provides several built in text colour options as well as access to the custom colour window and the option to remove any colour assignments made on the selected text These can also be accessed from the default Format Bar Copy Paste Font Ctrl Shift C Ctrl Shift Y copies the character attributes any thing in this menu from the current cursor position Use Paste Font to apply these settings to other selections of text Text gt Displays commands for controlling the paragraph level formatting of your text Paragraph alignment as well as spacing which is not address in this menu can also be controlled with the The Format Bar subsection 15 4 2 z Align Left Center Justify Right controls the text alignment of the current paragraph or all paragraphs falling within a selection range 298 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Writing Direction toggle between Left to Right and Right to Left writing styles Copy Paste Ruler Ctrl G Ctrl C and Ctrl G Ctrl P copies the ruler and para graph format settings including indents and tabs from the current paragraph Use Paste Ruler to apply these settings to other selections of text Spacing accesses the
155. ch as using the history navigation buttons or a such result or if you are currently viewing a collection and wish to find where the file is actually located in your project outline When used with Scrivenings mode the section you are currently working on will be highlighted in the Binder Path Reveals the location of the current document in descending order The top entry will always be the current document the entry below that its immediate parent and so on until the top of the project binder is reached These can be selected to immediately jump to any ancestor of the current item Go To Offers an alternate way to jump to a specific binder item without using the binder If the binder is hidden or you would rather not scroll and open folders for instance it will let you navigate to other areas of the project without having to alter your layout Your Favorites section 9 5 will be placed in the top of this menu making it easy to jump to them from anywhere in the project When viewing a Scrivenings session the contents of this menu will operate within the confines of the current session only thus providing a miniature table of con tents for the current session Take Snapshot This command will take a snapshot section 15 6 of the current text and store it for later use This command always impacts only one file When used in a Scrivenings session only the constituent portion of the session your cursor is currently in will b
156. check for updates by choosing Check for Updates from the Help menu B 1 GENERAL 307 The drop down menu beside this option governs how frequently Scrivener will check for new versions If you want to stay on top of the latest updates Daily is generally good enough but if updating frequently is disruptive to your work habits you can set this down to check by week or month B 1 2 Saving Number of Recent Projects The number of projects displayed in the File Recent Projects sub menu will be limited by the amount selected here up to a maxi mum of 40 Save after a period of inactivity Sets how long Scrivener waits to save changes after you stop using it Scrivener automatically saves changes made to projects So that it is not constantly saving and to avoid any slowdown this might cause when any changes are made to a project Scrivener takes note and waits for a suitable time to save them It then waits until you stops interacting with the program for more than than two seconds by default So long as you do not resume working Scrivener deems it a good time to auto save the project without the save process interrupting what you are doing You can change the period Scrivener waits to auto save with this setting If you increase the period significantly be sure to use File Save to regularly save changes to the disk When you are first starting out with the program you might want to keep an eye on the save indicator and make
157. ches picas or points that should be used in the main editor s ruler available by hitting Cirl Shift R when the editor has the focus or by selecting Show Ruler in the Edit menu Ruler snap every Use the scroller buttons to increase or decrease the step value of ruler adjustments When this is set to anything but No snap indent and tab markers will stick to increments at the level of resolution you supply here Editor Margins Adds spacing between the text editor and the surrounding view This impacts both horizontal and vertical margins at once Vertical margins will be drawn at the very top and bottom of the editor so they might not be visible if you have scrolled into the middle of a long document B 5 3 Default Zoom Controls for setting the default zoom level of the three main text editing areas Editor Document Notes and Project Notes The editor setting is a preset for new projects Once a project has been created you will need to adjust the zoom independently using the footer bar in the editor The settings for the two types of Notes will impact all projects immediately and there is no other way to change the zoom setting for these fields To change the default zoom setting use the first drop down menu to select the area of the interface you wish to adjust and then use the second drop down to select a zoom size 135 is the default zoom setting used by Microsoft Word and other popular word processors and so will render y
158. clicking the small X button in the footer bar of the binder or by clicking on its tab if Collection tabs are set to visible 8 1 1 The Three Root Folders The binder has three default root folders which cannot be deleted or moved from the top level although they can be renamed moved around amongst each other but not 59 60 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER Binder al Draft C Research E Trash Figure 8 1 The three default top level folders within each other or other folders To use Scrivener effectively it is very important to understand the significance of these folders The Draft Folder As the name suggests the Draft folder is where you place all of the files you want to include in the actual work that others will read How you structure it is entirely up to you you may have parts and chapters or you may have separate files for each scene within each chapter or even separate files for each individual paragraph if you so wish This user manual for example has each section of the manual in its own document From this header The Draft Folder on to the next The Research Folder is the con tents of a single document nested within the How the Binder is Organised section which is turn nested within the Setting Up the Binder chapter group and so on My Project Doesn t Have a Draft Folder Some of the templates that we provide with the software have had the Draft folder renamed to something more m
159. clicking the Open backup folder button Appendix C Customising Toolbars Both the main application toolbar and the Format Bar subsection 15 4 2 can be cus tomised by adding or removing buttons and organising them with separators The win dow is divided into three sections The left section contains all of the available tools that can be placed into the toolbars On the upper right side you can select between showing the list of tools for the Format Toolbar or Main Toolbar The list of selected tools are shown in the list below this selector Use the left and right blue arrow buttons in the centre column to move tools in and out of the toolbar The up and down blue arrows will move the selected tool up or down in the list which corresponds to left and right in the horizontal toolbar as shown on the screen 324 Appendix D Code Placeholder lags Table D 1 Statistics Placeholder Tags Description lt we gt Gets replaced during the Compile process with the total word count of the text currently being compiled lt wc50 gt Rounded to the nearest 50 words lt wcl00 gt Rounded to the nearest 100 words lt wc500 gt Rounded to the nearest 500 words lt wcel000 gt Rounded to the nearest 1000 words lt cc gt Gets replaced during the Compile process with the total character count of the text currently being compiled lt cc50 gt Rounded to the nearest 50 words lt ccl100 gt Ro
160. colour which will be used to render the stamp text across the face of the card The opacity of this can be adjusted in the Corkboard tab Outline colour used to draw a border around the entire card in the Corkboard does not apply to the index card in the Inspector Paper colour to use for the index cards Has no effect when index cards are being tinted by labels Paper colour for the notepad editor The text colour that will be used in the notepad editor 311 312 APPENDIX B OPTIONS Binder font used to display the names of items in the binder sidebar includ ing collections Outliner font used to display all textual information in the outliner Comments font used within the Inspector sidebar comments z Inspector Footnotes as above only with sidebar footnotes instead Corkboard settings 2 Index Title title font for index cards This impacts both index cards in the corkboard and inspector Index Text synopsis text font This impacts both index cards in the corkboard and inspector Index Text Small alternate font to be used when the Small Text option is enabled in the corkboard display settings Status Stamp used to render the status stamp which can be optionally printed on the face of index cards in the corkboard behind the synopsis text Scratch Pad The Scratch Pad Editor font setting will adjust the display font for typing in new notes Since notes are stored in rich text this will only im
161. command is available from the main editors as well as any Collection view including Search Results of course in the sidebar It will show the location of the currently edited or selected file s in the binder opening containers as necessary to do so This is most useful when the method you used to arrive at the current document did not involve clicking in the binder A 4 PROJECT MENU 289 Binder Affects gt Adjusts which split binder sidebar clicks will be opened in By default all clicks will be sent to the active editor This will adjust that behaviour so that the clicks go to a predetermined editor in all cases depending on the choice made below If the editor is not split this menu will be deactivated as all clicks will naturally go to the only available editor Current Editor default behaviour as described above Alternate Editor whichever editing split is not current active First Editor the left top editor no matter which editor is active Second Editor the right bottom editor split no matter which editor is active Enter Full Screen F11 Enters the full screen writing environment switching to text editing mode if necessary If the editor is displaying a Scrivenings session the entire session will be opened in full screen Note this option is not available to media and web pages or any other view modes Full Screen Backdrop gt Choose a background image for your full screen environment rather than
162. count for the document In scripting mode this portion of the strip will display element hints as well as the element selection menu which you can always call up with Ctrl even if the strip is not visible Background Fade Fades the background everything outside of the text paper column in and out Useful if you want to refer to material in other applications or the main project window in the background whilst remaining in full screen mode Paper Fade When a backdrop image is in use the Background Fade slider will be re placed with this one which operates in an identical fashion only it lets you blend the paper colour with the backdrop or reduce its visibility entirely When both a background texture or backdrop and a paper texture are in use this slider will be entirely disabled Exit Full Screen Mode The button at the far right will exit Full Screen mode You may also press the Esc key or F11 to return to the main project window 16 3 Floating Inspector HUD The full screen mode version of the inspector gives you full access to the inspector data which will float over the editor so it doesn t get hidden behind the background For a full discussion on these views and what they represent read Meta Data Types section 10 1 and Inspector chapter 18 16 4 CUSTOMISING APPEARANCE 161 16 4 Customising Appearance Appearance settings can be set in the Appearance option tab section B 2 Refer to the documentation pr
163. crivener for the day These tools are valuable but shouldn t be a substitute for good organisation on your computer as the tools can sometimes lose track of projects The intended use of a project is to store everything relating to a single major work be it your next novel screenplay for a film a doctoral dissertation or a serial collection of articles for a magazine This can be approached in a flexible manner It is possible to use a project as a daily journal or maybe a collection of random things you intend to one day utilise in future projects Ultimately the choice is up to you and there are ways to work around the default assumption where the Draft folder contains a single work These alternatives will be explored in more detail much later on but you should know early in the process that if you feel you would benefit greatly from having shared research and notes for multiple real world projects you won t be deeply penalised for doing so Also you should know that merging and splitting projects is fairly painless so even if you change your mind later it won t be a major setback Going a bit deeper the project file is a cohesive folder of files containing all of the pieces that make up your project using industry standard formats The accessibility of this format is meant to be used as a last resort safe guard not as a way to allow you to edit a project in places where Scrivener is not available Project damage and data loss can
164. crivenings mode or with a selection of one or more items in the Binder or group view modes Remove from Favorites Will remove the selected item s from the favorite list ignoring those selections which are not already there As with adding favourites this command can be used from the editor or group views Clear Favorites Wipe out the entire favourite list with one command Manage Favorites Displays the floating Favorite Management window wherein you can change the order in which they will appear in the interface remove one or more selected items or drag new items into the palette to add them to the list Change Icon gt Provides access to the custom icon list letting you change the docu ment icon for the selected item s Project icons can also be managed from here Your custom icons will be available as well as many built in icons that you are free to use in any of your works z Reset Icon to Default Removes custom icons from the selected item s If no custom icons are in place this menu item will do nothing ea Manage Icons Reveals the Manage Icons window where you can add or remove your own custom icons to the project For more information on managing and creating icons see Custom Icons section 8 6 A 6 Format Menu The Format menu contains all commands that deal with formatting the text of an in dividual document It contains all of the commands for changing the styling creating tables and lists and co
165. ct This will be While it is true MMD uses HTML and HTML has a perfectly valid syntax for comments it is not viable to use it because MMD already has an advanced secondary usage for HTML comments in that raw LaTeX can be passed directly through the parsing engine and land in the final tex file Thus usage of the HTML comment engine for general comments or other purposes would cause undesirable side effects 17 5 TEXT MARKINGS AND MULTIMARKDOWN 173 done using MMD s referencing syntax where a footnote reference is placed at the point of the note in the text and the content of that note is placed at the bottom of the file with a link to that reference marker Scrivener will generate all of the reference tokens so that you do not have to worry about coming up with unique markers Just use Scrivener s footnote tools compile and you ll have a completed document with footnotes If you do not wish to see footnotes in the final product you can disable this function in the compiler under the Footnotes Comments pane by checking Remove footnotes 17 5 3 Text and Highlight Colour with MultiMarkdown In short nothing is done to export Scrivener s text colour and highlighting features to MultiMarkdown as there is no suitable analogue for these tools and in most cases since they represent a function of a document s meta commentary are not considered to be suitable for semantic transfer Rather than looking at this as a limitatio
166. cters before or after the hashmarks on a title line will at best cause it to no longer render as a title correctly Title Appearance In the Section Layout dialogue the Case tab Figure 23 7 has three options for trans forming the Title Title Prefix and Title Suffix independently These transformers adjust the letter case appearance of the text while compiling so you don t have to use uppercase titles in your Binder 246 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Title Prefix and Suffix Case i Choose the text case for title elements Title Prefix Uppercase z Title Suffix Normal z x _ cance Figure 23 7 Title Appearance tab 23 8 3 Special Formatting Options Returning to the structure table the Options button in the table header bar will open a sheet which lets you set a few options for how elements should be output These settings are global to the entire compilation and cannot be set specifically per formatting rule Selective Opt Out You can always set specific parts of the Draft to ignore all format ting no matter what settings you choose in the compiler here by using the Compile As Is Inspector option which also can be strategically administrated from the Con tents compile options pane This will even ignore selected elements from the structure table such as whether Title or Notes are checked off Only the Text of such items will be output even if it otherwise would not output t
167. ction of the manual should be distributed to all parties concerned and good lines of communication should be established so that everyone knows when a person is actively working in a project There are fail safes programmed into Scrivener to let you know when another session is currently active in a project but making sure everyone is on the same page with who is editing the project will ensure no mistakes are made Guideline 2 above deserves to be reiterated never open a project for editing if another person is currently editing the project Part III Writing 118 13 1 SCRIVENER EVERYWHERE 119 Writing is easy All you do is stare at a blank sheet of paper until drops of blood form on your forehead Gene Fowler When it comes to the process of writing itself nobody can tell you how it should be done Each author has their own methods their own rituals and their own favourite tactics Scrivener was designed to recognise that everyone is different and as a result the program features an extraordinary amount of flexibility and interface power You will find workflows and tools for all manner of writing projects from a doctoral thesis the next blockbuster screenplay to a novel game design a collaborative scientific article patent claims biographies and much more Because of this there are many features you just won t need That is fine because Scrivener has also been designed to keep these features out of your way unles
168. ction type that cannot be removed Any project searches will have their query and results stored in this collection This is persistent between project sessions 3 Saved Search Collections indicated with the same magnifying glass used for Search Results on the left side of the label they will be dynamically populated with a search query every time you view the tab 8 4 2 Standard Collections Creating a new standard Collection is as easy as pressing the button Any items that you have selected in the active view including the Binder other views or even other Collections will be automatically added to it Once a Collection has been created you can add or remove items to it so it is not critical to select everything before you create it There are several ways to add items to a collection 8 4 USING COLLECTIONS 69 Remove Collection Add Collection Ch ange C olour Remove an ltem Figure 8 3 Standard Collection Controls With the tab interface revealed use drag and drop from any view including the binder Using the Documents gt Add to Collection sub menu any selection of items in cluding the active item that is being edited or viewed in the editor can be added to the bottom of a collection list z In the binder sidebar you can right click on an item s to access the Add to Col lection menu In all cases if an item already exists in the collection it will not be added again and its ori
169. d button again will switch to viewing the text of the folder This is considered to be a view mode setting as well or rather the absence of a preference All future clicks to container items will load the text editor in single file mode until you again choose a view mode from the control These three options can also be accessed via the View menu or by using the associated shortcut keys that can be found there The shortcut keys and menus work in the same fashion where invoking corkboard while you are already viewing an item as a corkboard will switch that view mode off and go to single text mode 5 2 2 Corkboard Scrivener has made the corkboard metaphor popular in modern writing software The concept of representing many documents as index cards letting you move them around to restructure your book or opening them up to edit their text is quite useful The important thing to realise with the corkboard is that each of the displayed index cards represent files or folders in your binder outline They display the title and the synopsis a short description of the item and optionally can represent a few kinds of meta data using real world metaphors as well Just remember cards are documents and conversely documents can all be viewed as cards The corkboard view is rich with features to read more about it and how to best use it see The Corkboard section 12 1 5 2 3 Outliner While the binder is in a sense a very simple outliner the
170. d in a linear list with editable text fields Fields can be added and managed using the gear menu The 5 2 VIEW MODES 25 fields can also be added to the Outliner as columns Read more about Custom Meta Data subsection 10 1 6 and the Custom Meta Data Pane section 18 7 The last two sub panes Snapshots and Comments amp Footnotes take up the entire inspector Snapshots An integrated view which displays all of the document s snapshots a way of saving the current text of the document as a version which can be reviewed or recalled at a later time and the contents of the selected snapshot in the text area below Snapshots can be created from the state of the current text or deleted with the and buttons in the header bar The Roll Back button lets you revert the main editor to an older version of the text For more information on using this see Snapshots Pane section 18 8 and Using Snapshots section 15 6 for more general information on Snapshots Comments amp Footnotes Words and phrases in the text editor can have notes attached to them The contents of the notes will be stored in this pane New comments can be created with the button and new footnotes with the fn button Selected notes can be deleted with the button For more information see Linked Notes Pane section 18 9 and Annotations and Footnotes chapter 17 5 2 View Modes There are three primary group view modes available in Scrivener View modes g
171. d keywords Scrivener will attempt to match labels and status but unless both projects came from the same un altered source this will likely produce undesired results Items should be proofed for their label and status after copying them into the target project 24 2 Exporting Binder Files To export files and folders from the binder as individual files and folders on your system select the files you wish to export in the binder and then choose File Export Files or press Ctrl Shift X This will by default also export any descendants of the selected items as well When exporting more than one file Scrivener creates a folder on the disk to hold all of the exported files Enter the name for this folder in the Save As text field and then choose where you would like the folder to be created From the Export text files as drop down menu you can choose to export text documents as one of the following zw Print Portable Document Format PDF Plain Text TXT 261 262 CHAPTER 24 EXPORTING Word Document DOC Open Document Format ODT z Web Page HTML eXtensible Web Page KHTML PostScript PS Final Draft FDX All media files will be exported as they are You can also choose to export comments and annotations meta data and or snapshots and optionally choose to strip out all no tation Notes will be exported as separate files using the text file format you chose above RTF will be
172. d synopsis will be printed and will continue to print on subsequent cards until the entire synopsis has been printed Cards with lots of text content may take several cards to print out 25 3 Printing Outlines As with corkboards you can print a limited range of content from an outliner view by simply viewing the material you wish to print in the outliner and press Cirl P Also as with corkboard printing this will not attempt to reproduce the precise appearance of an outliner as this would lead to situations that would be difficult to print with very wide outliners Instead the outliner printing tool generates an indented list with the title and synopsis for each item in the current outline view Each row in the outliner will be printed in a block on the page and within this block there are three primary sections in this order 1 Title Area 268 CHAPTER 25 PRINTING Print Preview document1 x _ _ o iea 4 as Cl ay a ce gt LOH scene a Gunpowder tea is poured into the stony vessel The protagonist swills whiskey in a fashionable way scene b There is less rejoicing this time around Elastic notions run spastic Figure 25 1 Print Preview Showing Index Card Output 2 Synopsis Area if applicable If you find the outliner fails to provide the look you desire you might consider using the compiler instead Try starting with the provided preset Enumerated Outline and customising
173. den this fact will be largely obscured from you though the background colour of the sidebar will change as will the title for the sidebar at the very top but the collection will exist and can be accessed later even after closing the project so long as you do not run another search Search Results and the Sidebar Since search results temporarily replace the binder in the sidebar it can initially confusing to figure out how to get back to the binder When the collection interface is revealed you can switch back easily by clicking on the Binder tab but otherwise you can use the small X button in the sidebar footer or simply tap Esc while in the search field to dismiss the search results For more about navigating amongst collections in general read Using Collections section 8 4 There are two ways to access Project Search You can either click in the search field in the toolbar or press Ctrl G Ctrl S to place the cursor focus there If the toolbar has been hidden a convenience window will be opened providing the same features as the toolbar search When nothing is entered in the search field greyed out text will inform you of the current search mode By default this is All Exact Phrase which means all searchable elements in the project will be analysed with the exact phrase operator which means that if you type in two words they will need to appear together in that order The search scope data type and operator
174. e Once you are satisfied with the new layout select all of the sub files and drag them back into the original folder in the binder using the above method The items will be re organised for you in the actual book structure 8 5 Document Templates New in 1 7 Document templates give you the ability to designate a set of items that can be used to create new items with stock boilerplate settings and text Much as with project templates section 7 7 everything that you add to a document template item will be added to new items created from it This includes the various meta data notes key words references synopsis and of course any text Additionally folder items designated as templates will create copies of their children too allowing you to quickly generate complex repeating structures Document templates do not provide forms that you can fill out with the tab key They are simply a convenient way to reproduce ordinary folders and files with their meta data intact 8 5 1 Setting a Document Template Folder Templates are designated by placing them into a special folder marked as being a template container which can be a folder or file group Each project can only have one template container at atime To set it up select the container of items you wish to use as templates and use the Project Set Selection as Templates Folder The binder icon will change to indicate its status and all of the items indented beneath it will have a s
175. e MathType correctly installed on your machine you will see the equation interface pop up over the Scrivener window Any changes made within this window will be saved back into the Scrivener project when you close the window by default it will ask for confirmation when closing the window or use File Close and Return to Scrivener To edit an equation later on simply right click on the equation in the Scrivener editor and choose Edit MathType from the top of the contextual menu The MathType inter face will pop up again and any changes you make will be saved back into the file when you close it Equations act much like ordinary images They can be aligned or styled in the edi tor and when they are compiled they will be converted to images and handled as they ordinarily would be for the particular format in use Equations can be saved and edited from any rich text field including project or docu ment notes http www dessci com en products mathtype 206 CHAPTER 20 WRITING TOOLS 20 7 Using Equations with MathML If you do not own MathType or your system cannot run it an alternative is to use the MathML equation language Inserting a MathML equation is done via Edit Insert MathML Equation The equation can be named for future reference The name will be used when the equation needs to be exported as a file such as when compiling to HTML As you paste or type MathML code into the main editor a preview will be
176. e a few words in here and then press the Return key to create a new paragraph Glance up to the window title bar and note the name of your project You should see a small asterisk after the name This means your project hasn t been saved yet If you don t see an asterisk try typing another word into the editor while watching for it By the time you finish examining it the asterisk ought to disappear your project has been saved 6 3 OUTLINING YOUR DRAFT 35 The Implications of Auto Save Whenever you pause for two seconds Scrivener s auto save feature will kick in and save all your recent work This is a very key thing to be aware of because many people have cultivated the habit of relying upon their last save point as being a bit of a milestone They can write freely and in an experimental fashion and if what they ve done displeases them they can just revert to the saved copy on the disk The good news is that Scrivener is designed to work with this method and in fact its way of doing so is in general superior to using the traditional model because whenever you put down an anchor point or a Snapshot in Scrivener you leave a trail of them You can view them all in a list later on preview their text and roll back to any point in a document s history This is a little out of scope for this quick tour so for now put it on your list of things to look into if this is how you work and when you re ready to start writing check out U
177. e altered to the image s file name so you needn t even be aware of the image s name to use this method but will need to avoid linking to graphics in such a way that the hyperlink extends beyond the area of the syntax where the path name should be printed Cross referencing Images The manner in which Scrivener generates image syntax is conducive to cross referencing to them It will use the image filename for the ID All figures with a generated ID will be placed in a list at the bottom of the compiled document for easy reference along with any footnotes Images that do not require an ID such as inline paragraph images will not be handled this way and cannot be linked to For images to have a generated ID Though do note that the TEX typesetting engine rarely takes such placements as literal It will place the image and tables for that matter as close to the point you specify as possible while maintaining a aesthetic appeal to the text blocks around it For instance if the placement of an image would push three words of the last paragraph onto the next page it would prefer to keep the paragraph intact and move the image to the next page instead However if an inline images has been resized it will used the referenced syntax to apply the dimen sions code to the image 21 4 MMD AND SCRIVENER 213 they must be placed in their own paragraph with no other text In example if you drag a graphic called analysis of deri
178. e comment to the inspector pane Useful for keeping footnote information out of the editor Inline Annotation Ctrl Shift A Converts the selected text into an inline annotation or toggles the writing mode to annotation mode Useful for placing notes right in the editor alongside the relevant text Inline Footnote Ctrl Shift F Converts the selected text into a footnote or toggles the writing mode to footnote mode Convert gt The convert submenu provides useful tools for the manipulation of text and notation features To Uppercase Converts the selected text to all uppercase characters To Lowercase Converts the selected text to all lowercase characters 300 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS To Title Case Ctrl 6 Converts the selected text to title case which takes into ac count common English grammar conventions Quotes to Smart Straight Quotes Ctrl amp Ctrl Shift Converts between ty pographic curly quotes and straight inch and foot marks as are necessary for some plain text formats and scriptwriting Multiples Spaces to Space Ctrl Space Useful for cleaning up a document that has been typed up with multiple spaces in between sentences and so forth Inline to Inspector and Inspector to Inline Conversions These commands al low you to convert inline annotations to linked Inspector comments vice versa and footnotes These commands work on the entire current document Options gt Pro
179. e created Notes will be stored in RTF files and the index xml file defines any custom properties they may have z search indexes this file is used to optimise the search speed of Scrivener It contains a complete plain text copy of nearly every string in the project z user lock will only appear while the project is open or in the unfortunate case of a crash wherein the software never got a chance to remove the file This stores a key that identifies your computer If you try to open the project a second time on another computer you will be warned that it appears to be open already F2 THE SETTINGS FOLDER 331 z version txt a simple marker for letting Scrivener know what version of the project format this is so that it can remain compatible with future versions of the software F 2 The Settings Folder This contains all of the settings which are specific to the project Scriptwriting compile and overall general UI settings such as whether you had the interface split and what they were viewing all the way down to whether you re tinting icons with the label colour and so on If the UI has become damaged for some reason and the project refuses to load or loads in a malfunctioned state it can sometimes help to reset the UI by removing the configuration file for it This will return your project to a factory default state in terms of visual and workflow settings only It will not harm any data Make sure the project is closed
180. e in the value in the Values column You can also add your own custom keys Click the button to insert an empty row in the table that you can fill out If you need to reference a file on your disk but do not know the path you can use the Browser for selected value s file path button This will print the full text path of the selected file into the value for the current row you are editing Note that MMD uses relative paths if it can So in many cases it is easiest to reference support files like CSS or bibliography files simply by name rather than supplying the full absolute path You would then copy these support files into the output folder after compiling 23 14 38 HTML and FODT Headers When either MMD to HTML or MMD to FODT is selected as the output format an additional meta data field will be supplied These match the XHTML Header and ODF Header keys and are simply produced here with a larger value field for your convenience Additional HTML options will be provided in this area as well which make adjust ments to the MMD engine 23 14 4 General Settings Below the meta data table are a few general output settings both for Scrivener and the MultiMarkdown engine itself Quotes language You can set this with a meta data key yourself but this drop down menu will do so for you A number of typesetting protocols are provided for Smart typography Disables MultiMarkdown s smart typography which will convert ASC
181. e instructions that come with the template to see how to set up your project so that it is formatted properly when printed or exported 19 3 Working with Final Draft That this information is only relevant to Final Draft 8 users Users of previous versions of Final Draft should use the FCF format for importing and exporting their work 19 3 1 Importing Formatting from a Final Draft Document Optional Step For basic scripts or those that will use Final Draft s standard screen play formatting indeed for most screenplays this step can be omitted as it is mainly concerned with setting up the formatting for custom scripts Proceed to the next sec tion if this is the case Whenever you import a script from Final Draft into Scrivener all of its elements will use the formatting specified in Scrivener s script settings These can be set up by selecting 184 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING Script Settings from the Scriptwriting submenu of the Text menu The Script Set tings panel should be familiar to anyone who uses Final Draft as it is set up to be very similar allowing users to create custom script formats Because a Scrivener project comprises multiple documents it is important that the script settings are set up as the user desires before importing or creating any script docu ments in the project If you are writing a screenplay using standard formatting you don t really need to do anything here However if you are us
182. e invalid characters only use this option if you are having problems importing a file under any encoding and do not feel that anything important is being communicated by the invalid characters B 8 2 OPML Import notes into When OPML files are dropped into the binder Scrivener will at tempt to convert these outlines into Scrivener outlines This can be useful if you do your initial brainstorming in a dedicated outliner application Some of these ap plications support attached notes to each outliner header If notes exist Scrivener can be instructed to apply these notes either to the Synopsis alone the main text or the document notes for that heading in the outline Note that in the case of the last two options the synopsis will still be set automatically to the first few hundred characters of the note The Titles Only option will disregard any outline notes if applicable and follows the strictest definition for OPML standards Create folder to hold OPML items Enable this if you want dropped OPML structures to be contained inside of a new folder rather than directly into your existing Binder structure B 8 3 File Format Converters A few word processor file conversion alternatives are available to you to choose from When importing and exporting as well as compiling word processor files Scrivener must convert to or from its internal format RTF Each supported file format such as OpenOffice or Word can independently use a dif
183. e no 131 132 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING indents or paragraph spacing This set up will emulate a plain text environment whilst still allowing features such as annotations and highlighting When using MultiMarkdown to format your work you will find that some format ting such as inline images footnotes and so forth will be converted to MMD markings during compile Most formatting however will be stripped and thus can be useful in an annotation setting 15 2 Editing Basics 15 2 1 Caret Movement and Selection The following list shows the shortcuts for changing the current selection To simply instead move the current insertion caret position omit the shift key where applicable Shift ArrowKeys Extend current selection in the direction of the arrow key that is used Ctrl Shift LeftArrow or RightArrow Extend the selection by word z Ctrl Shift UpArrow or DownArrow Extend the selection by paragraphs Cirl Shift Home Select from the caret position to the top of the editor Ctrl Shift End Select from the caret position to the bottom of the editor Shiff Home or End Select from caret position to beginning or end of line respec tively Note the definition of line is not a paragraph but is instead dependent upon the current soft wrap To select to the beginning or end of the paragraph use the above paragraph selection shortcut Shift MouseDrag Extend the current selection using the mouse
184. e pro cess a bit which can be useful if you intend to do advanced post processing of your own or are getting errors with a particular format and need to figure out what is causing the syntax to foul up The MultiMarkdown selection in the Compile For menu is pre cisely the same copy that Scrivener will be using to feed MMD when generated a direct formatted output and so is a critical troubleshooting step when faced with difficulties 216 CHAPTER 21 USING MULTIMARKDOWN It is also as noted above a necessary format if you intend to use the MultiMarkdown version 2 system as there is no longer an automated way of doing so in Scrivener 21 5 3 LaTex If you ve used MMD in the past you ll have probably noticed that how TEX documents are set up in MMD3 is quite a bit different than in the past In the past you could just tell a minimally annotated document to be a tex file and it would do so If you didn t like the default Memoir class you could throw in one line of meta data to change it This system while easy to use from the document end was rife with difficulties if you ever wished to slightly tweak the tex output You had to learn at least a little of the complex XSL stylesheet language to make your own class definitions The new system alleviates much of these problems by using tex boilerplate files that you can easily edit in any plain text or TeX editor These are then imported into the final tex file with the input comm
185. e saved to a snapshot Lock In Place Ctrl Shift L Locks the editor or split so that no Binder clicks will af fect it When an editor is locked its header bar will turn a shade of red subsec tion 9 3 1 14 1 3 Header Bar Title To the right of the history navigation buttons the title of the currently viewed item will be displayed As you navigate through the project this title will update to reflect the current contents of the editor In most simple cases it will display the title of the document you are currently viewing or editing Whenever the presented title consists of only the title itself you may edit the name of it by clicking within the text and pressing Enter to confirm MAC When a single item is shown hovering over the title will display the path of the item in a tooltip This is similar to a file path on your system It will show all of the folders the item came from You can also view this information graphically in the header bar icon menu as already described 14 1 HEADER BAR 123 When you are viewing a collection of items in a corkboard or outliner the name of the viewed container will be displayed That is if you click on a folder in the binder the name of that folder will be displayed in the header bar regardless of which index card or outliner row you have currently selected Use the Inspector to view the details of selected items within a group view When viewing the result of multiple item selections
186. e second provides the variants available for that family Not all fonts come with a full complement of variants If for some reason you cannot change a selection of text to bold or italic check this menu to make sure that the current font supports these variants The third menu provides a quick list of common font sizes The line spacing drop down provides some quick presets but for more complex multi type spacing select the Other Spacing item at the bottom of this menu The next three buttons section two Figure 15 2 provide toggling shortcuts to the most common text formatting tools bold italic and underscore respectively When the caret is in a range of text that matches the format style the appropriate buttons will appear activated The next portion in this section allows control of paragraph level text alignment Paragraph level alignment comes in four flavours z Left Align default Centre Align Right Align z Full Justification In all cases these adjust the entire paragraph If you need multiple alignments on a single line you will need to add special alignment tab stops to the ruler Ctrl Shift R In the third section the left colour box will alter the foreground text colour Click the button once to set the selected text to the depicted colour black by default or right click to access a pop over with convenient colour selection utilities You can opt to strip out all colour code from here wit
187. e selected in the interface A good example of this is the Format Convert To Uppercase menu command It has no meaning when a se lection of index cards is currently active rather than some text If there is a selection restriction on a feature this manual will often indicate as such using the following termi nology 5 5 INTERFACE LANGUAGE 29 Active this relates to focus or where the application is currently accepting key board input In other words if you tapped the h key that is where the h would be sent In some cases this might not do much or anything at all in an active editor it would insert an h letter z Active selection expanding on the above an active selection is when something is selected within the active area of the application An example might be some se lected text in the editor or three selected items in the binder or corkboard Active selections are often used as the target for various commands in the menus An ex ample would be the Documents Convert Formatting to Default Text Style which would reset the text formatting for any selected documents in the active selection z Inactive selection A selection can be inactive If you select the Draft folder in your Binder and then click in the editor the selection will become dimmer or grey depending on your settings Inactive selections are seldom used but there are a few cases especially when exporting Active text
188. e supports notes as well as headings Scrivener Project Import a selected Scrivener project into the current project s binder All binder items will be imported as well as some meta data key words and notes A l FILE MENU 275 Import and Split Takes a standard plain or rich text file and allows you to sup ply a character sequence such as which will be used to split the document into sections Export gt Provides tools for exporting elements of the binder to the file system For more information on exporting your work see Exporting chapter 24 Files Ctrl Shift x Allows selected contents of a project to be exported as files and folders onto the hard drive This feature should primarily be used to create a hard copy backup or to share resources with someone not using Scrivener Generally speaking you will want to use Compile to export your book into one file rather than many Comments and Annotations Exports just the comments and annotations from the project into a single file Optionally you can choose to export only the selected binder items OPML File Exports the current binder selection as an Outline Processor Markup Language file OPML files are commonly read by applications that work in outline oriented data like Scrivener and is thus a convenient way of transferring hierarchal information between programs See also Exporting to an Outliner with OPML section 24 3 Outliner Contents as
189. e the safest format to use 264 CHAPTER 24 EXPORTING e Title and Synopses contents of any index cards or the synopsis field Title and Text in this case text refers to the main body text for that item or what you have typed into it using the text editor This will be the content of the research material or portions of your draft as you have written them This only includes text from file or folder items in the Binder Title and Notes uses the auxiliary Inspector Notes field for each included item As with the main text option the results of this will be converted to plain text 24 3 2 Limitations This method is intended for exporting an indented outline rather than exporting meta data If you wish to export tabular meta data lists try Exporting Meta Data to a Spreadsheet section 24 4 Only text items including folders naturally in the binder can include their con tent in the _ notes field Research items such as graphics or PDF files can export only their titles synopses and document notes 24 4 Exporting Meta Data to a Spreadsheet Outliner views can be exported to formats which are suitable for loading in spreadsheet software like OpenOffice Spreadsheet or Microsoft Excel many databases and other miscellaneous programs that support compartmentalised data If you wish to export a specific set of columns or even all possible meta data use File Export Outliner Contents as CSV This m
190. e top of any file that directly follows a folder z Text and folder separator inserted at the top of any folder that directly follows a text file Each individual rule has four options some of which change their behaviour depend ing on the compile format z Single return a single paragraph break will be inserted causing the final appearance to run from one document to the next with no visible seam and is the most minimal option you can choose z Empty line two paragraph breaks will be inserted causing a visible space between the items z Page break a page break code will be inserted causing the following item s text to move to the next page of the manuscript Custom Anything entered into the adjacent text field will be placed between the two items Note that the text or symbols entered here will be buffered by a single return on each side forcing it to fall on its own line The value will be centre aligned The following formats have different options and behaviours from those listed above Plain text Files Fifteen empty lines will be inserted between the two documents setting them apart from one another since plain text files cannot utilise page breaks being composed of no pages themselves 23 7 COVER 237 HTML and XHTML Empty paragraphs will be inserted between the two documents spacing out the text As with plain text single web pages do not themselves have pagination within them ePub and Kindle
191. e up and down the outline Left and right will ascend and descend the hierarchy When a container is selected the first time you press LeftArrow a container will be closed the second time will jump up to the next parent Combining the Shift key with the UpArrow and DowArrow keys will select multiple items in the chosen direction Copying Items While ordinary copy and paste functions are not allowed in the move ment or reproduction of binder items copying a selection of items can be useful In most cases this will place a list of names on the clipboard You can effectively copy any number of items by duplicating them with the Doc uments Duplicate sub menu They will be copied in place and you can then move them to their intended location 8 4 Using Collections Collections are a way to augment the binder method of organisation and they will tem porarily supplant the binder view in the sidebar allowing you to reorganise or arrange collections of items in a flat list regardless of their position in the actual project or hier archal relationships with one another 8 4 USING COLLECTIONS 67 You can think of collected items as being a bit like an alias or a shortcut to that item Changes made in the editor to items within the collection will also be made to the original item in the binder it is better to think of them as being the same thing A single item can be in one collection or in many Each instance will point back t
192. e we do not recommend doing this for performance reasons Flash drives are considerably slower than their hard drive counterparts but if portability trumps http www literatureandlatte com forum viewforum php f 33 4 5 INSTALLING SCRIVENER ON A PORTABLE FLASH DRIVE 17 performance it is safe to do so We recommend installing Scrivener onto your hard drive following the instructions given and then copying the Scrivener folder from Program Files or your user folder to the stick drive using Explorer rather than using the installer directly on the stick drive While possible this method is not currently supported Chapter 5 Intertace The Scrivener interface has been carefully designed to cover a wide range of uses At its most minimal the interface could look no more complicated than a basic word processor like WordPad In this section we will go over some of the basic interface elements that will be present in nearly every project you work in Advanced features will be gradually introduced in their own sections as they pertain to specific areas of the writing process 5 1 Interface Overview When you initially run Scrivener you will be presented with a Getting Started and project template selection window This is actually a full featured launching pad for all of your future and existing projects Whenever you are ready to start a new project the details of which you ll read about later on such as a new novel or paper for a j
193. e you take them unless you use Paste and Match Style 17 1 1 Inline Annotations Annotated text will appear red with a bubble around it To ensure your text exports as expected you must check that the text surrounding your annotation would make sense were the annotation not present including how you set out your whitespace spaces newlines etc In other words if you place an annota tion between two sentences make sure that there is only one space or two if you use two spaces between sentences separating the sentences outside of the annotation On the other hand when you choose to compile annotations into the document inline all spacing within the annotation will be preserved the end result will look like it does in the main editor Since you can choose to omit annotations from the text when you export or print it they are very useful for jotting down notes and ideas inside the main text that are not really part of the main text but which would be better placed next to the section of text to which they refer than in the Notes pane When you export to RTF format annotations can also be converted to RTF comments that appear in marginal boxes in compatible word processors rather than omitted as well as a few other display options for other word processors or formats For details on what options are available for omission or conversion during compile see Footnotes Comments section 23 12 166 CHAPTER 17 ANNOTATIONS AND FOOTNOT
194. eady linked without removing the underlying link The same holds true in vice versa if you have a selection of text already linked to another document with a hyperlink or Scrivener Link trying to annotate on top of that link will destroy the link as text can only be linked to one destination at a time To annotate a link consider using inline notes or place the link anchor around the linked text rather than on it 17 2 1 Managing Linked Notes Deleting notes can be accomplished by selecting the note s in the inspector and then clicking the button by clicking the small X button in the top right of each note tapping Shift Del or by simply deleting the text that the note is anchored to in the editor 17 2 2 Linked Comments Linked comments can be assigned a custom colour By default when you use one of the previously mentioned techniques for adding a note the highlighter anchor box in your text will be yellow as will the corresponding note in the inspector These two colours will always match making it easier to see where you are in your text in relation with your notes To change the colour of a note a convenience tool has been designed into the right click contextual menu when clicking on the note in the inspector Six default colours have been provided for rapid usage but you can also opt to use the colour palette to change the colour to a custom selection Scrivener will also remember the last colour you chose and automatically u
195. eaningful to that template s purpose For example the Novel template has the Draft folder renamed to Manuscript The Draft folder can be renamed to whatever you prefer and in fact some people use that to type in the name of their work The key thing to look for is the special icon Only one item can have that icon so no matter what it is called that is your Draft folder Everything that goes inside the Draft folder will be compiled into one long text file when you use the Compile command from the File menu excepting documents that have their Include in Compile setting unchecked Thus the Draft folder is central to Scrivener ultimately you are aiming to complete and arrange everything inside the Draft folder so that each of the elements it contains form an organic whole that can then be output as a single file to the format you require which could be anything from a web page to a Word document to an e book Because the Draft folder is what is used to create the final manuscript it is unique in that it can only contain text and folder files While media files cannot be placed di 8 1 HOW THE BINDER IS ORGANISED 61 rectly into the Draft folder images can be placed into the text files themselves in their appropriate locations within the text just like in a normal word processor A good way to think of the draft is like a long spool of paper or a scroll In a normal word processor this entire spool w
196. eatures to accommodate many different purposes in cluding novels screenplays academic papers and dissertations general non fiction jour nalism blogging and much more While it strives to present as simple an interface as pos sible once you start digging into the application you will find a degree of flexibility and complexity to suit even the most esoteric needs To help organise all of these concepts the next three sections take a pragmatic look at the primary stages of any major project Preparation Part II Writing Part III and Final Phases Part IV and detail Scrivener s tools for aiding you through the drafting process and ultimately exporting and printing http www literatureandlatte com support php 6 CHAPTER 2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL your work In each section the features most useful to you during those phases will be explained in depth If you want to find a specific feature consult the appendices at the end of the manual for a cross referenced list to every menu item and window 2 1 Terms and Conventions Whenever the documentation refers to an action that must be taken by you the visible name for that action will be formatted like so Button labels menu items and keyboard shortcuts will all be displayed in this fashion Menus will be displayed in a hierarchy using the character to separate top level sub menu and items Example To highlight a portion of selected text in yellow invoke the Format
197. ecifics or what we might call the workflow One of the thing that attracts people to MMD is that it focusses solely upon the text All formatting is done with easy to read text codes For the most part these are also very easy to type in You don t have to memorise keyboard shortcuts for formatting commands because they all use common punctuation marks On that note you re going to have a stare at a little more punctuation than you might be used to This isn t as bad as writing in HTML not by a long shot but there is very lit tle rich text to MMD conversion in Scrivener You won t be looking at normal italicised fonts and such Some people welcome that others are glad that 1995 happened and never want to see codes again If you d like to see just how much punctuation we re talking about you can find the Scrivener user manual project on our support page Download that and browse through the project Keep in mind that as a technical document it has a more dense formatting requirement than a novel or non fiction document might Even so you should find that it doesn t look all that much different from a standard document This chapter will not attempt to teach you MultiMarkdown There are excellent re sources available on the Internet for this including the link at the top of this section If you already know Markdown then you already pretty much know how to write in MultiMarkdown especially with Scrivener which handles so
198. ect statistics can be called up at any time with Project Project Statistics or Ctrl on the keyboard This sheet has two sections to it Draft everything included in the Draft folder Note that compile options which modify export content in any way can impact this counter If your compile is set up to only export titles in an outline format you ll get a pretty small word count In general consider what your document looks like when you compile that is what will be counted z Selection a count of everything you have currently selected in the Binder includ ing all of their children items as well which can be optionally disabled Each of these sections have identical statistics available to them The word and char acter counters are self explanatory The two page count estimates are based on different algorithms Pages by paperback uses an industry standard formula for English language publishing of taking the average number of words per page and multiplying it by the average number of characters per word five including a space for six total the product of which is then used to divide against the total character count of the project By example a book with 720 000 characters with an estimate set to 250 words per page will produce a result of Z200 480 If you need to adjust the average number of characters per word switch the 250 6 counting mode to Characters and provide the product of the words per page multiplied by
199. ed General and on the right hand side a button Click that to create a new tab Now you have two project notebooks These are completely independent from one another and so can be used to store different types of notes To rename a notepad double click on the tab Notepads can also be re ordered by clicking and dragging on them Delete the selected notebook by clicking the red X button beside its active tab 12 3 2 Using Multiple Notepads in Inspector With multiple notepads you ll probably want access to them in the Inspector as well To see how this is done view a document and open the Inspector click on the notes header again and you ll see the new notepads you created Chapter 13 Cloud Integration and Sharing It is becoming increasingly important to have the ability to make your work instantly available everywhere you go no matter what device you might currently be using Shar ing files amongst a circle of colleagues proofers and editors is also becoming common Synchronisation should always be done with care no matter what method you use Computers will do exactly what we tell them to do even if the outcome is not what our original intention was Whenever using automated syncing tools be sure to double check your settings and backup frequently 13 1 Scrivener Everywhere Keeping more than one computer synchronised can be a lot of work but keeping one Dropbox folder or similar service synchronised between com
200. ed in Navigation preferences section B 4 the definition of con tainer will be expanded to include document stacks as well Expand All Alt Expands all of the visible items recursively When this command is used in the binder it will expand the entire binder including all non Draft sections When used in outliner it only works within the context of the currently viewed portion of the binder 2 Collapse All Alt As with Expand All this works the other way closing all visible open items recursively Note that in both cases you can use the Option key in conjunction with a mouse click to selectively perform this function on the arrow and everything beneath it clicked 2 Collapse All to Current Level Alt Hyphen Working in a similar fashion to Collapse All this command will collapse the entire outline only up to the currently selected item s level Previous Container Ctrl Shift UpArrow Will select the previous visible con tainer in active outliner no matter what the depth In this case previous means a container higher on the list than the current position If a container is currently hidden it will be skipped If you only wish to select the parent container of a the current item you can use the LeftArrow key Next Container Ctrl Shift DownArrow Works the same as Previous Container only selecting the next visible container downward from the current position Reveal in Binder Ctrl Shift 8 This
201. ed something else if you have renamed it or started with a template In cases where you wish to proof only a portion of the book or are working in a compound project that includes several editions or articles located in the Draft you can use this drop down to select only a portion of the draft folder Whatever container you select will include everything from that point downward or in outliner terminology its descendants You could for example choose the folder called Chapter 1 All of the scene files included in the folder will be used in the Compile including the chapter folder itself but nothing outside of that folder will be used 23 5 CONTENTS vi Include Title W E Forward Be os aC Chapter 1 E scenea E sceneb E scene c I lt lq m Chapter 2 scene d E scene e Pg Break Before As Is N m ba Alt click to select or deselect all 23 5 1 Content Item List Figure 23 1 Compile Contents Pane 233 The item list is the large table in the middle displaying the contents of the current com pile group In the case of the illustrated example marked as 2 Figure 23 1 the Draft has been selected and so the entire Draft contents are revealed in the list below it There are four columns in this list It is usually a good idea to initially scan the
202. ed within the editor itself including its formatting B 5 1 Default Main Text Attributes These settings determine how new documents will be configured They will not adjust the formatting of documents you have already created in any projects so you needn t worry about these settings destroying your existing formatting To reset a document to the application options use the menu command Docu ments Convert Formatting to Default Text Style The top half of the tab is dedicated to setting up the default settings for new text docu ments files and folders You will have access to the full standard ruler settings as well as font controls via the A button to the far left All changes you make here will be immedi ately previewed against the provided sample quotation These settings will impact all of the new text documents you create so use the special effects with care See the Appearance tab subsection B 2 2 to change the colours used in the editor B 5 2 Editing Options Use block insertion point Adjust the width of the insertion point from its default of 1 pixel This will dramatically increase the visibility of it however with variable width fonts like Calibri this setting can produce odd results as the cursor will most often be wider than the character following it It is best used with a fixed width font like Courier or Consolas Use font hinting Most fonts have advanced metrics for handling small characters re fe
203. editor will be changed to a dusty red colour which persists even when the split is not active Either or both splits can be locked independently This feature can also be accessed from the header bar icon menu subsection 14 1 2 Locking the editor prohibits external clicks from impacting the locked editor This means that clicks in the binder corkboard or outliner when Auto load is enabled will be blocked This makes it easy to keep your editing session while you use the binder or these other views to explore the outline What locking will not do is prohibit actions taken from within the editor itself This includes use of the binder navigation arrows his tory buttons manually dragging items to the header bar or menu navigation commands Locking is meant primarily to keep the interface from taking actions that it would or dinarily take automatically Locking will not inhibit intentional actions that you make These actions as with the View Go To sub menu will navigate as requested and cancel the lock state A common exception to this rule of thumb is when it makes sense to scroll your view or select items within it based on an external selection If the editor is a locked Scrivenings session where more than one text file is viewed at once then if you click on a portion of the outline that is contained within that session Scrivener will scroll to the right spot for you In a large locked corkboard you can jump to individual cards
204. election of more than one paragraph line to activate This feature will re organise each selected paragraph in an ascending or descending fashion Append Selection to Document Provides a sub menu populated with all of the doc uments in your project By selecting one of these the text currently selected will be added to the end of that document this can be a folder or a file If it is your intention to move the text instead of copying it after issuing this command you can simply press the Delete key Use the New sub menu choice to create a new document containing the selected text You will be asked where to place this new document in a subsequent dialogue box Link When adding a link this tool works for hyperlinks of all types To create a new Scrivener Link see below If the cursor is not placed within a link you can use this command to make a new one It will be inserted into the current document at the cursor position automatically selecting the nearest word if necessary The dialogue will provide you with several common prefix options or optionally no prefix If the cursor is currently placed inside of a link including Scrivener Links this command will let you edit the destination for that link Scrivener Link Creates a new Scrivener Link to a chosen document at the current cursor position using the linked to document name or if you have pre selected text the original text will be turned into a link and no na
205. emember to run a manual save at least once a day for maximum protection On the other hand if you open and close projects multiple times a day you might find the default limit of only five copies too limiting Mistakes you d like to revert may have rolled off the backup list because five backups were created in the past day or two Increasing the number of stored backups to a higher value means more drive space will be used for each project but will ensure you have something from more than a few sessions ago to restore from 56 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT In cases where security is a concern if you are working with confidential files in a protected area for example the automated backup system might present a security risk if it produces files in an unencrypted area of your hard drive If you are working in an encrypted environment make sure the backup location is set to also output to that area or use the File Back Up Exclude From Automatic Backups menu command to restrict the sensitive file from getting backed up with the rest Read about the various options available in the section on the Backup tab section B 9 in Scrivener s preferences 7 8 2 Managing Backups for Large Projects Very large projects can conflict with what would ordinarily be good settings for the auto mated backup system If a project has reached a point where backing it up automatically has become a nuisance rather than decreasing the amount of backup secur
206. ements It is important to know that while it may sound otherwise the Replacements in the Preset tab are initially stored in your project as well Everything in the compile pane is stored in your project The fundamental difference between these two tabs is what happens when you work with other presets Preset Replacements will be saved into custom presets when you create your own or update an existing one but Project Replacements never 250 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT will Likewise Project Replacements are totally protected from any changes made to your compile preset If you switch from the template settings to an outlining preset for instance the Preset Replacements will be reset usually to blank but the Project Replacements will be safe So in summary z Project Replacements always stick even if you change presets and are never saved into a preset These are best for things that are highly specific to a particular work like name substitutions or expansions specific to the project z Preset Replacements are saved into your project file as well but are volatile in that changing a preset will reset the list to whatever that preset defines including noth ing if that be the case These are best for things which suit an entire category of works An example of how Preset Replacements work 1 You have a project you created using a built in template This template comes with a few replacements built in but you decided y
207. emplate subsection 8 5 4 for it so that you do not have to constantly re apply icons to new files or folders 8 6 CUSTOM ICONS 75 The icon menu is organised into two major parts The first part displays up to five of the most recent icon selections you ve made so you can quickly use them again if you have never used the feature before you won t see this yet The recent icon list is retained between sessions and is universal to all of your projects The second section in the menu displays sets of icons grouped together to save space and finally all of the remaining ungrouped icons that are available 8 6 1 Creating and Managing Custom Icons It is easy to make your own icons even if you do not know how to edit images in a graphics program Load the icon manager with Documents Change Icon Manage Icons and click the button Find the graphics file you wish to convert to an icon on your disk with the file chooser and click the Open button If the graphics file is larger than 16x16 pixels Scrivener will automatically resize it for you You can also drag and drop images into the list to import icons What to do about strange results After you click the Open button what you see in the icon manager is what you will see in the binder and other views If the icon looks strange to you in this window then it will look strange everywhere Com mon problems are files with lots of white or transparent padding around them Open
208. en these view settings quickly without having to go through the process of hiding the binder toggling the tool bar and so forth You can even specify that outliner column settings and other details will be restored from a layout To show the Layouts panel select Window Layout Layout Manager If you do not have any layouts saved yet you ll be presented with a window and an empty list You can try the feature out immediately by clicking the button A screen shot of your current project window will be taken and placed into the right side of the screen and you ll be given the opportunity to name the layout something meaningful With a combination of names and screenshots your layouts should remain accessible and easy to find Switching to a saved layout is easy just select the layout and click the Use button in the footer bar of the left list Another way of switching layouts is to use the main menu instead of the Layout panel When you save a layout it will be added to the Win dow Layouts sub menu To remove a layout you no longer need select the layout and click the button in the footer bar You will be warned that once it is deleted you ll be unable to retrieve it This warning can be dismissed so that it no longer appears if you wish To update an existing layout with the current project window layout simply select that layout in the list and click on the gear menu in the footer bar choosing Update Selected Layout
209. ener allows you to break things down into smaller pieces since it organises all of these files for you and keeps them in a logical order in the binder In fact some people break things down into pieces as small as paragraphs others stick with chapter sized chunks You can use index cards to represent beats scenes whole chapters or even a mix of these de pending on how much attention you need to give that portion of the book It s all very flexible and in many ways you can use the Scrivener outline to structure things accord ing to how you think not according to how the book will appear That may change later on when you are ready to compile but this can be ignored for now there are good tools for breaking things down and merging things back together at whim Working in a fluid fashion at every stage of your project is more important than trying to force yourself to work toward a strict goal 6 4 Scrivenings Mode Scrivener contains features intended to make that balance a little easier to work with Unlike most applications of this type you can choose to view many different sections at once and edit them as if they were a single file without actually merging them all together permanently Doing this is easy let s try it now Select the Draft item in the binder again this time by clicking on it once with the mouse You ll get a corkboard again now invoke View Scrivenings or press Ctrl 1 You are now viewing the collection of document
210. enote a new chapter With some compile formats page breaks can be important particularly the e book formats which use section breaks to determine the automatically generated table of contents As Is Linked to the Inspector option Compile As Is All formatting set in the formatting pane section 23 8 will be ignored for the checked document This also means no extra material will be added including titles or synopsis Text will always be included even if it would otherwise be excluded In the lower right corner marked as 3 is an override which can reverse the settings of the Include in Compile checkmark By default the behaviour follows the logic of the document settings You can however inverse the logic and only export those items marked to not be ordinarly exported or just ignore the flags altogether and export ev erything 23 5 2 Front Matter Front matter is traditionally defined as the material preceding the main content of a book including everything from the title page to the preface usually terminating with the first part or chapter In print publishing this often includes a different header and footer style as well as Roman numerals for the page numbering As it becomes increasingly important to be able to deliver material in multiple for mats there is a rising necessity for swapping out front matter dynamically depending on your compile format You may need from one single project a PDF delivered to a
211. ent Templates Custom Icons 9 Navigating and Organising 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 25 9 6 General Navigation Golo Men s socors casi Controlling Binder Integra WOU E A E en Linking Documents Together Using Favourites Layouts Panel 10 Setting Up Meta Data 10 1 10 2 10 3 Meta Data Types Project Keywords Project Properties 11 Gathering Material 11 1 11 2 1153 11 4 File TBO es s00 9k eee Linking to Files on Your Computer 6 vcs enw seus Scratch Pad Panel oa ace aos Text Appending Tools 43 46 47 47 48 49 50 50 51 55 58 59 59 64 65 66 72 74 76 76 77 78 80 85 86 88 88 95 96 98 98 102 103 104 CONTENTS 12 Project Planning 12 1 12 2 12 3 The Corkboard The Outliner Project Notes 13 Cloud Integration and Sharing 13 1 Scrivener Everywhere II Writing 14 The Editor 14 1 Header Barocci neses 14 2 Footer Bar ssacdedade 14 3 Viewing Media in the Editor 14 4 Splitting the Editor 15 Writing and Editing 15 1 Rich Text Editing Philosophy 15 2 Editing Basics sss csu 15 3 Editing with Scrivener 15 4 Formatting Tools 15 5 InlineImages 15 6 Using Snapshots 15 7 Auto Completion 15 8 Editing Multiple Documents 16 Full Screen 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 Using Background Image and Textures 05 The Control Strip Floating Inspector HUD Customising Appearance 17 A
212. ent from formatting alterations In MMD all this checkbox does is restrict the document from emitting a title header if it otherwise would have Thus it can be useful for injecting sections of pure IATEX use custom header depths that otherwise violate the outline s literal depth and so on 21 4 1 Images As mentioned before briefly images can be dropped into the editor where you would like them to appear just as you would do so in a rich text work flow Also as with rich text if you resize the graphic in the editor instructions will be sent to the display formats to size the image in accordance with your specifications This uses a soft sizing technique which merely resizes the graphic in real time using the display or typesetting image it does not harm the original pixels There are cases where you might not want the image to be in the editor The image might be too large to comfortably work around being print resolution or you might find that the inclusion of many graphics in your files slows Scrivener s saving routine down While you could use the image placeholder tag that is available to rich text authors you might as well use MultiMarkdown s image syntax for its expanded feature set To do so simply write the image syntax as your normally would and where you need the image s path to be printed create a Scrivener Link pointing to that image in the binder It is important to note that any text in the hyperlink itself will b
213. ent parts of the application without using the mouse The first lets you cycle between com mon elements while the rest will jump immediately to that element of the inter face no matter where focus is currently placed Note that in all cases the elements you wish to cycle or jump to must actually already be visible These shortcuts will not automatically reveal parts of the interface that are currently hidden z Left Right Top Bottom Editor amp Binder Ctrl Tab This menu item follows a chain of the three most common areas of desired focus the primary split secondary split and the binder It will cycle between these three going left to right and the label of this menu item will be changed to indicate where the next target will be Binder Moves focus to the binder sidebar from anywhere in the interface if visible 288 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS z Left Bottom Editor Moves focus to the Left or Bottom editor if the editor has been split Otherwise selects the primary editor if there is no split Right Top Editor Moves focus to the Right or Top editor if the editor has been split If it has not been split this shortcut will not be available Outline Provides navigation and disclosure commands which work in both the out liner and in the binder referred to below as the active outliner Container is defined as a folder by default but if Treat all documents with subdocuments as folders is enabl
214. entire list of items and add a new collection The selected items from the search result will be added automatically to this new collection for you Next Collection Select the next Collection tab in the stack Previous Collection Select the previous Collection tab in the stack The remainder of this menu will display the available collections allowing you to switch amongst them without the tab interface open Zoom gt Provides shortcuts to the zoom menu located in the footer bar for text docu ments Temporarily zooms the display of the font up or down to increase legibility without adjusting the underlying font size This will also increase or decrease the size of a viewed PDF Zoom In Cirl makes the text larger z Zoom Out Cirl Hyphen makes the text smaller Layout gt The commands in the Layout sub menu affect the main window elements Show Hide Binder Cirl Shift B Toggles whether or not the binder subsec tion 5 1 2 sidebar is visible on the left of the main window You can hide the binder to concentrate on editing or composing the current document if you so wish Show Hide Inspector Ctrl Shift I Toggles whether or not the Inspector sub section 5 1 5 is visible on the right of the main window The inspector dis plays all meta data for the current document including synopsis and notes The inspector is hidden by default No Split Ctrl Split Horizontally Ctrl Split Vertica
215. ents How you view more than one document changes depend ing on your approach Viewing more than one document can be as simple as clicking on a folder By default this will view the items within that container as index cards on a corkboard However using the Group Mode segmented control you can easily switch your view over to Scrivenings the left most icon showing a stack of papers Another way of switching is to use the View Scrivenings menu command or pressing Ctrl 1 on your keyboard As with corkboard or outliner you can also form scrivenings sessions by selecting multiple items in the binder Unlike corkboard and outliner scrivenings can be taken into full screen mode Simply press the Full Screen button in the toolbar after setting up the session Read more about full screen mode chapter 16 for general information on this feature You can tell when you are in Scrivenings mode by the horizontal divider lines that will be drawn between each section represented in the session Meanwhile the inspector will follow along so you can see which document you are in by glancing at the index card in the inspector Scrivenings sessions are one of the few areas in Scrivener that consider your text from a flat perspective There is no indication of depth while editing documents A prologue at the very top will be printed right along with items which are buried in sub folders This is intentional so you can concentrate solely on the same flow
216. enu item will be disabled unless an Outliner is currently the active view This method is primarily intended for tabular data export If you would prefer a hierarchal export more suitable for outlining you might want to try Exporting to an Outliner with OPML section 24 3 Formats The three formats below are all commonly accepted by most spreadsheet appli cations Check with your preferred software for details Scrivener will export the first row in the file as headers so your importing software should be instructed as such if applicable Comma separated values best for most spreadsheet software Tab separated values Semi colon separated 24 4 EXPORTING META DATA TO A SPREADSHEET 265 Only include columns visible in outliner When checked the column list and the or der of those columns will be used to create the data file When deselected Scrivener will export all meta data columns in the order that they appear in the View gt Outliner Columns sub menu Chapter 25 Printing Given that there are two discrete functions in the binder your draft or works in progress and all of the support files and notes around it you need two fundamentally different print modes Since proof printing and final printing the draft are closely related to the act of compilation itself this function has been built into the compile interface For all other forms of printing either piecemeal or in groups the standard print mech
217. er 19 Note that Scrivener does not supply word processor stylesheets presets are strictly saved formats which can be applied to your text Once applied they are static changes to the text and will not be updated later if you change that favourite style A 6 FORMAT MENU 299 Show Hide Ruler Ctrl Shift R Toggles the visibility of the tab stop and page margin ruler for the active editor Note that all formatting tools have been moved from this ruler to the format bar Show Hide Format Bar Alt RightArrow Toggles the visibility of the character and paragraph formatting bar which provides quick access to many of the most com mon types of formatting tools Highlight Ctrl Shift H The highlight menu lets you place a background highlight be hind the selected text much like using a highlighter marker on paper For more in formation on how to use highlights see Text Colour and Highlights section 17 4 These options can also be found on the Format Bar For more information on annotating and footnoting your text see Annotations and Footnotes chapter 17 Note that while the menu system refers to these as footnotes it is possible to export them as endnotes during compile Comment Shift F4 Attaches a comment to the selected text or previous word making a new linked comment in the inspector pane Useful for keeping notation text out of the editor Footnote Shift F5 As with Comments adds a linked footnote styl
218. er a sequence of words separated with non breaking spaces as a single word Auto number Scrivener has a number of internal counters which are repre sented as tokens in the text These will be counted and printed in the desired format when compiling For full documentation on how to use the various counters see Placeholder Tags Appendix D Draft Word Count Inserts a token which will be calculated during Compile which indicates the word count for the entire manuscript There are a number of rounding options available for cases where precise counts are undesired Draft Character Count gt As with Draft Word Count inserts a token for the total character count Again rounding options are available Endnote Marker This special placeholder will collect all of the endnotes in a project and place them at the location of the marker This will be especially useful for some academic formats which do not place endnotes at the very end of the text If you are using multiple streams to compile both footnotes and endnotes this marker will not impact footnotes 280 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS This requires endnote grouping to be enabled in the compiler See Foot notes Comments section 23 12 for further detail This method does not work with rtf and doc formats Current Date amp Time Ctrl F6 Inserts a plain text date stamp at the current cur sor position Sort Paragraphs gt Requires a text editor s
219. er coming across a match and then going back to search without having to call up the palette again Also like the standard Find panel it can run in background mode as well Once a search criteria has been set up you can close the window and use menu commands or keyboard shortcuts for stepping back and forth from one match to the next in the Edit gt Find sub menu The rest of this section will go over each of the individual formatting search types Highlighted Text Looks for text that has been highlighted using the highlight feature section 17 4 Limit search to color When the checkbox is enabled only those highlights matching the chosen colour will be found If this is disabled all highlight colours will be considered a match Note that the colour must be precisely the same so stick to using basic or custom swatches or the built in highlighter defaults when using this tool Click on the colour chip to display a list of the built in highlight colours or use the More entry to search for a custom colour Comments and Footnotes Will search within any inspector based comments or footnotes in the project By default all will be considered as potential matches but you can narrow this down by selecting one of Comments or Footnotes from the Type menu Inline Annotations and Footnotes Tools for stepping through all inline annotations or footnotes in the project This search tool only has the two standard filter crit
220. er sequence In the example above hitting tab after typing something in a Scene Heading element automatically inserts a hyphen surrounded by spaces so you can easily enter a chronological marker Auto Complete Tab The Auto Complete tab allows you to set a custom list of words that will appear for auto completion while typing in the current element Use the and buttons below the list to add or remove new words to the auto complete list and double click on words to edit them When typing your script hit Alt to bring 190 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING up the suggestion list beneath your cursor Additionally if you have your options set up to offer suggestion automatically while you type and the first letters typed in will match a phrase in this list you will be presented with the auto complete list Note that the auto complete list only appears after you start typing a word For each entry you can check the Go to Next Line box which will force the editor to move to the next element as it would if you pressed Return once it has been entered 19 4 2 Managing Scripts At the bottom left of the main script settings panel is a drop down menu entitled Man age This allows you to reset your script elements to the default screenplay settings to save your format for use with other projects to save it for back up somewhere on your hard drive or to share it with others and to load from file an existing format mode created either
221. er tools specifically designed for writers in its editor interface The rest of this chapter will focus on these tools in a comprehensive fashion where you can glance through the list of topics covered and pick which items you feel are best suited to your writing style and the task in hand You could read this section from start to finish but it is meant to be a collection of individual nuggets that you can learn independently as you gradually build up your knowledge of the application 15 3 1 Scaling Text The text of the editor can be scaled up and down without affecting the font size via the ability to zoom the scale of the text Each split can have its own zoom setting addition ally full screen mode can have its own independent zoom setting as well All of these settings are preserved between sessions and saved into the project file itself In the standard text editor interface zoom can be set using the zoom tool in the footer bar section 14 2 In full screen mode this same tool is provided within The Control Strip section 16 2 You can also use the menu commands 1 View gt Zoom Zoom In Ctrl to increase the zoom factor of the text 2 View Zoom Zoom Out Ctrl Hyphen to decrease If you prefer to always work from a certain zoom setting the default zoom level for both standard editors and the full screen mode editor can be adjusted in the Editor option tab section B 5 Note that this setting will impact all n
222. er will generate one for you based on the author title and date If your publisher has provided a unique identifier for you then you can check the box and type in your own For multiple authors and contributors separate each author with a semi colon to en sure that they all get registered as separate individuals in the e book The ePub format allows for multiple authors so that book searches can be done on each author indepen dently Amazon s KindleGen utility does not recognise multiple authors so only the first name will be applied to the mobi book To ensure all authors are listed in the mobi file refrain from using semi colons to separate the names or add them later with a tool that is capable of adding multiple names to the mobi file you ve compiled 23 14 2 MMD The Meta Data pane for MultiMarkdown compilations provides a front end to the pre liminary meta data block at the top of most MMD files Note that what you type into 23 14 META DATA 259 Key Value Pairs Keys Values 4 The Autobiography of Anonymous w Author Anonymous Date February 2013 Revision 3 1 Add Key Z Browse for selected Value s file path General Settings Quotes Language English v V Smart typography Don t generate id attributes for headers V Notes extension F Use MultiMarkdown 2 compatibility Figure 23 12 Compile Meta Data MMD the text area below the field will be printed into the
223. er you like Closing the name generator window will erase the shortlist so if you intend to keep it be sure to copy the list to the clipboard before you go 20 3 1 Name Meanings Along the top of the window you will find two tabs one labelled First Name Mean ings Click on this tab to reveal a spreadsheet with all of the names in the database organised by gender origin name and meaning You can narrow down the list using several optional filters at the top of the window and even search for letters or words in either the meaning or the original name As with the main name generator interface you can copy rows out of the spreadsheet with the Add Selected to Shortlist button This will copy all of the data in the row for 204 CHAPTER 20 WRITING TOOLS your future reference The shortlist is shared with the name generation tab so you can mix meanings with full names that you ve generated 20 3 2 Adding Your Own Name Lists You can add your own custom name lists to the generator Name lists should be format ted so that each name is on its own line with the origin of the name after it separated by a comma Parker English Paino Italian It might be easiest to produce these lists in a spreadsheet and export as a CSV file Click on the Import tab in the name generator window and click on the Browse button for first or last name Locate the file in the chooser dialogue and click Open then the Import File button
224. ere originally designed for full colour press These will unnecessarily enlarge the size of your e book make it difficult to send out proof copies via e mail and could even cause e book reader devices to run out of memory Cover image Cover images must be selected from resources within the current project If you have a cover that you wish to use with your book make sure you have im ported it into the binder first All images will be listed in this drop down menu and will be displayed in the grey preview area in the middle of the pane once selected Cover page title ePub only You should not supply the name of your book here This 23 8 FORMATTING 239 Override text and notes formatting Type Level 1 E E E Level 1 E E F E Level 1 Section Layout Page Padding Olines A a Hr I B I U i SEE IETEN EE E ee a Chapter 1 Title f PROOF COPY Not for distribution Wa Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua i Figure 23 4 Compile Formatting Pane is what will be used in the table of contents internally to identify the cover page The standard Cover has been provided as a default 23 8 Formatting The Formatting pane is where you will design the look and structure of your document It is separated into two main areas both of which we will gradually introduce 1 Structure and Conten
225. erein Dropbox Simperium Simplenote DenVog Index Card for iPad Hog Bay Software PlainText WriteRoom OpenOffice org and derivatives NeoOffice amp LibreOffice z Final Draft Movie Magic Screenwriter CeltX Mariner Montage EndNote Bookends z Sony Reader Amazon Kindle and KindleGen tool Calibre z Adobe Acrobat Pro Adobe Reader 332 333 RedleX Mellel Nisus Writer Pro Papyrus Aspose za Twitter Fountain Preemind za WordNet All products above and otherwise mentioned in this text are trademarks of their re spective owners Literature amp Latte take no responsibility for any text lost through synchronisation As with all synchronisation processes you should ensure you back up regularly and double check that the right documents are being synchronised Visit our web site for a copy of the licence agreement By using this software you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this licence http www literatureandlatte com licence php
226. erface elements will be capitalised as proper nouns to help differentiate them from standard nouns when appropriate A Collection is an interface element while the word collection can be used to indicate a casual grouping of items and not necessarily a formal Collection 2 2 FINDING THINGS 7 Some of the names for various elements within Scrivener are customisable on a per project basis and how you name these may impact the interface A good example are labels a type of meta data you can use to assign a colour to a piece of your draft This can be renamed by you and the interface will change to reflect your preference In all cases this documentation will refer to these malleable elements by their default names Screenshots and terminology will be based upon the Windows 7 Aero theme Ordi narily this will not represent a discrepancy between the descriptions and what you see on your computer but if you are using a Windows Classic theme or an older version of the operating system you may see references to disclosure arrows in tree and outline views where you see plus and minus signs In cases where file paths are printed the standard Windows convention of printing paths will be used An example might look like C Program Files Scrivener Scrivener exe 2 2 Finding Things Since this PDF has been birthed within the age of digital documentation and has yet to make its way to print form a proper index has never been compiled for it
227. eria available to it Coloured Text The interface for this type of search is similar to the highlight search type You can provide a custom colour restriction in the additional criteria section Do note the colour choice still needs to be precise so using custom swatches or built in presets will generally be easiest As with the highlight tool you can click on the colour swatch to select from a built in default 20 2 GOALS AND STATISTICS TRACKING TOOLS 199 Links You may search for URL or internal Scrivener Links using this tool By default all links will be returned but if you wish to narrow the search down to a particular link type use the Link Type menu to make this choice 20 2 Goals and Statistics Tracking Tools At some point most writers will need to get some idea of the progress of their work by checking the word character or page count There are several ways of doing this in Scrivener To get word character and page counts for the whole of the draft that is the contents of the Draft folder or for any documents selected in the binder use Project Project Statistics To calculate the printed page count statistics Scrivener internally generates a compile document based upon your compile settings so you need to note that if you have compile set up to print off synopses and nothing else only the synopses will be counted This can also mean that there will be a delay in displaying this panel with larger projec
228. ernate Background Snapshot Text Background Document Notes Background Project Notes Background Recent Search Background Text Page Links Visited Links Invisible Characters Text Selection Background Annotation Text Ghost Annotation Text Footnotes Text Footnotes Background Description Background colour for the Binder Background colour for the Outliner Background colour to use for alternating rows The paper colour for the snapshot text area Note this will apply both to snap shots shown in the inspector and snap shots displayed in the main editor Document notes editing background or paper colour As above but for project notes so that the two can appear distinctive from one another Background colour for the search results collection and its tab Default display text colour only dis plays text in this colour that does not al ready have a colour applied to it Main editing background or paper colour Internal links will be coloured according to this setting Recolours visited hyperlinks not Scrivener Links after you click on them Text colour used to draw special symbols depicting invisible characters Text colour when it has been selected Text will be recoloured to this when it is an annotation When View Ghost Notes Mode is on inactive annotations will take on this colour unless they are selected Text will be recoloured to this when it is a footnote The shading used to fi
229. es Linked images are useful when the actual graphics in your project text are incomplete or placeholders for larger production ready graphics If you are familiar with desktop pub lishing tools like Adobe InDesign then the manner in which linked images work will be familiar to you For those not aware linked images are the placement of graphics in your text in such a way that the representation of the image in your editor is being generated by files outside of the document as opposed to be saved as a part of the document To create a linked image use the Edit gt Insert Image Linked to File menu command Linked images will look and act like embedded images in every way You can by and large ignore the difference between them while working When compiling with linked images the current version of those images on disk will be used to create the embedded copies used in the compiled version Since nearly all of the compilation formats do not support active image linking Scrivener must take the current version and embed it in the final copy So if you are in a workflow that involves external 152 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING help from designers be sure to get your external images up to date before producing final compiled copies For increased performance Scrivener uses a cached version of your image when you create a link to it while the project is open Whenever you re open the project this thumbnail will be updated with the curre
230. ettings panel contains some optional labels that will be used in some of the built in compile format presets and can be used on your 10 3 PROJECT PROPERTIES 97 own using the referenced placeholder tag to the right of each field which can be copied and pasted for your convenience As you might note from looking at this panel Scrivener will attempt to use reasonable defaults for these fields if they are not changed by you Project Title The Project Title is ordinarily taken from the name of your project file on the disk but in cases where that does not match reality as it is often convenient to use naming conventions in your project file names to set large revisions apart you can use this field to override the default and use your own title for the work Abbreviated Title Especially useful in headers long titles often need to be shortened to fit in the header area so you can optionally use the lt abbr_projecttitle gt place holder to display a shortened version of it If nothing is supplied here it will use the project title value modified or not as a fallback Author s Full Name Surname and Forename If you need to use a pen name these would be the fields you should modify Chapter 11 Gathering Material 11 1 File Import Whether you are using Scrivener for the first time and want to use it with documents you have already created in other programs or whether you just have reference files lying around that you w
231. ew projects or recently upgraded projects not projects that have already been created as each project can save its own individual settings 15 3 2 Contextual Menu for the Text Editor The text view s contextual menu contains many standard commands such as Cut Copy Paste Spelling and so forth along with a number of commands specific to Scrivener Several common tools such as searching dictionary access will be located in the Writing Tools sub menu The Scrivener specific commands the appearance of which will depend on the selec tion are listed below 15 3 EDITING WITH SCRIVENER 135 Text Editing Contextual Menu Remove Link When the active selection contains one or more links you can strip the links out with this command Split at Selection Ctrl K Splits the current document into two documents at the selec tion point the current blinking cursor point or the initiating edge of the selection which will be on the left by default or on the right when using right to left lan guages Split with Selection as Title Ctrl Shift K Splits the current document into two docu ments using the current selected text as the title for the newly created document The selection will remain after splitting making it easy to remove the redundant title text if necessary or style it like a header For more details on splitting docu ments read Managing Documents with Split and Merge subsection 15 3 3 Append Selection to Docume
232. ext and it will be output precisely as shown in the main editor Absolutely no options from the Formatting pane will be used when outputting these sections Insert subtitles between text elements When either Synopsis or Notes elements are enabled Scrivener will insert a subtitle to help set apart these sections from the main text which will itself also be titled These titles can be formatted like every thing else in the formatting editor in a unified fashion You only need to edit the formatting of one subtitle to impact them all 23 9 SCRIPT SETTINGS 247 Place notes after main text The default is to place any Inspector notes above the main text for the item being compiled When checked notes will be placed below the main text area instead 23 9 Script Settings This set of options lets you configure a few details which impact how a script will be formatted when using the Final Draft FDX format Include footnotes as script notes Inline and linked footnotes will be converted to Final Draft s script notes feature Footnotes will be removed from the compiled docu ment if this option is not enabled Include comments and annotations as script notes Inline annotations and linked comments will be converted to Final Draft s script notes feature All comments will be removed from the compiled document if this option is not enabled 23 10 Transformations The Transformations pane provides a number of useful text and format conversions
233. ext modify it and then use the Format Formatting New Preset From Selection menu command to create the new version Deleting a Preset Deleting a formatting preset can be done at any time by using the For mat gt Formatting Delete Preset gt sub menu This command cannot be undone but if you do accidentally delete an important preset you can re create it by finding an example in your text and creating a new one from scratch 15 4 4 Resetting Formatting Oftentimes after you ve gathered material from the Web or imported documents that you ve written in another word processor the formatting of the imported material will not match the default font in Scrivener for new documents While you can change this default at any time with the Editor options tab subsection B 5 1 this will not impact documents you ve already created or imported as Scrivener has no way of knowing if that is what you really want to do Often it might be okay to leave the file as non standard especially if it is research material that you never intend to include directly in the draft or even edit If you do want to retrofit these documents to your current defaults you can do so with the Documents Convert Formatting to Default Text Style menu command Since this command works at the document level you can select as many cards outliner rows or binder sidebar items as you please and convert them all in one go After clicking the menu command a wi
234. f the text Some one who is publishing in HTML might for instance wish to use the open and close syntax for HTML comments Those using MMD to create LaTeX files might do the same as HTML comments allow one to write raw LaTeX into the editor 23 12 3 MultiMarkdown Options The MultiMarkdown compile formats handle footnotes uniquely from the other format ters Scrivener will by default automatically generate and ID the necessary footnote syntax for you An MMD marker will be inserted wherever the footnote has been placed 23 13 PAGE SETTINGS 255 in the document and the appropriately matching footnote text syntax will be inserted elsewhere in the compiled MMD flle Convert to HTML styled text Since MultiMarkdown has no good analogue syntax for comments by default Scrivener will insert a styled HTML container around the comment Both inline annotations and linked comments will be treated identically in this fashion Since MMD will pass HTML straight through its engine the result will be a range of text coloured with whatever colour the annotation text or com ment background was set to The appearance sans the bubble around the text will thus be identical When this option is disabled annotations and linked comments will be exported in the same fashion they are for plain text files enclosed in the defined markers This latter option should be used with MultiMarkdown version 3 which is no longer XHTML based when using non HTML target fo
235. ferent converter It may help to switch to a different converter engine if you are having difficulties with the default selection or find the quality of the conversion unsatisfactory 322 APPENDIX B OPTIONS Improving Quality If you have a copy of Microsoft Office 2007 13 installed on your computer then you may be able to set Scrivener to use Office s conversion utilities This will result in the best overall conversion of doc and docx files but these settings will not be selected by default since it is not possible to detect whether your copy of Office contains the necessary utilities that we need to make use of it Office 365 and certain versions of Office distributed via download may not make these conversion systems available to third party developers and in those cases the Office selection should be avoided or may not even appear as an option to begin with The Doc2Any conversion option will retain hyperlinks and some symbol characters where the Scrivener conversion option will not However the latter conversion engine will prove superior in nearly every other way so unless you need hyperlinks or have many instances of characters being marked as unrecognised you should use the native Scrivener conversion engine B 9 Backup Scrivener has a fully automated backup system The options in this tab will control the various aspects of it Turn on automatic backups Enables the automated backup system It is best to leave
236. file types when import ing enable Import supported file types only in the Import Export options tab sec tion B 8 11 1 2 Web Page This lets you enter the URL of a web page that you would like to import into Scrivener The web page will be archived on import meaning you will no longer need to be con nected to the Internet to view it Web pages cannot be imported into the Draft which only supports text so you must ensure that a non Draft item in the binder is selected for this item to be available Functional Web Pages Many web pages these days are functional in that you can do things inside the web page after you load it A good example of this is Gmail Google Docs or even a simple search form These sorts of pages if they require a in the future 11 1 FILE IMPORT 101 login will not import correctly You will need to use copy and paste or somehow export the material from the web site to your drive in order to archive them You may also drag and drop URLs from many supporting browsers location bar into the Binder itself just as though you were importing a file from your hard drive 11 1 3 OPML and Mindmap File New in 1 7 OPML and MM files can now be dropped directly into the Binder The options for impacting how this is done are now located in the Import Export options tab subsection B 8 2 Outliner files using the OPML format can be imported into Scrivener retaining their original hierarchy and c
237. first To reset the UI delete the ui ini file in this folder F 3 The Snapshots Folder The snapshots folder is where all of your old snapshots are stored A new sub folder will be created within it for each item in the binder that has snapshots The folder contains an XML file with some information about the snapshot such as its descriptive name and time stamp as well as any link information that existed when the snapshot was taken The snapshots themselves are standard RTF files and so can be accessed in an emergency if necessary The presence of these folders are the one thing that Scrivener uses to determine if an item in the binder has snapshots If you delete the folder it will no longer have snapshots Thus if you are intending to distribute the scriv file for whatever reason and wish to wipe out all of the old working data it is safe to delete these folders on a one by one basis or indeed the entire Snapshots folder itself to totally clean out the project of all old versions You will probably only ever want to do that on a copy of the original project Appendix G Legal Scrivener and this manual are copyright 2006 2014 by Literature amp Latte LLC All rights reserved Literature amp Latte are not affiliated with or endorsed by the following companies and their products or services Microsoft Office and all products therein Microsoft Windows Apple Pages Numbers Mac OS X and all utilities mentioned th
238. footnote Footnote Highlight Style See Inline Footnotes subsection 17 1 2 for general tips on footnotes in Scrivener Compiled Footnote Numbering By default when you compile the document to any format linked footnotes will be numbered in the order they appear and this number will be saved into the footnote as a static identification of it This is entirely unlike standard word processors which generate the final document appearance while you are working Scrivener s numbering system is designed to work in a more stable fashion allowing author and editors to refer to static numbering that is tied to the last generated hard copy Consequently the addition or removal of footnotes from the sidebar will not disrupt the stored numbering of existing footnotes This way you can continue to write and make changes to the source project without losing frame of reference with the hard copy that is out for proofing An option has been provided to prompt you whenever you compile This way you can do test compiles on your own without disturbing the original numbering that is out for edit Compile footnote numbering can with very large texts that have a lot of footnotes take a long time to process If you find compiling takes an inordinate amount of time you should try disabling the automatic feature causing it to work on demand via the Format Options Prompt Before Updating Footnote Numbers menu command 170 CHAPTER 17 ANNOTATIONS AND FO
239. for text documents inside the Draft folder 92 CHAPTER 10 SETTING UP META DATA Compile As Is All options set in the compile formatting options pane section 23 8 will be ignored for the checked document This means no extra material will be added nor will text be removed including titles and no reformatting of the text will be done As with the above two items this checkbox has no meaning for items outside of the Draft 10 1 6 Custom Meta Data New in 1 7 Custom Meta data is a free form feature which you may find a use for if you are looking for the ability to mark sections with a specific piece of information that is often different for each item in the outline but has a common theme This is in contrast to things which have common information shared amongst many items Labels or Status might do better for that or things which lack a cohesive theme where Keywords might be best An example of something for a work of fiction with a cohesive theme and a lot of variety in what gets stored for each item could be timeline information It is very likely that most of the items in the outline will be taking place at different points of time Thus a special column for timeline date with a free form field is an exemplary usage for custom meta data Another example from a non fiction book on edible plants could be Latin names for the plant discussed in that outline item This information is something you would probably want to print in the boo
240. for the synopsis but an override for the corkboard In all cases specific types of meta data can be displayed as columns in the Outliner view including custom meta data 10 1 1 Setting Up Label amp Status The next two forms of meta data are flexible in what you can refer to them as Using the Project Meta Data Settings Ctrl Shift M you can set up custom names for both the label and status and the interface will adjust accordingly no longer referring to them as Label and Status for that project If you wanted you could have POV and Lo cation instead of Label and Status or Focus and Type or Monkeys and Ba nanas or anything else you want The documentation will continue to refer to them as labels and status for convenience They are also after the title the most visible items in the entire interface They can be represented in the corkboard and outliner views are best administered in the inspector and are given priority placement in most of the print ing methods Labels having an associated colour can also be used to visibly tint various interface elements such as binder or outliner rows or even the entire index card paper The default blank project and many of the templates come packaged with a few exam ple status amp labels but you will most likely wish to create your own To add or remove project labels use the Project Meta Data Settings menu item T
241. g might lead you to believe a space exists where in reality there is none Consequently it is often a good idea to reduce the level of formatting in your projects as much as possible This doesn t mean that a project needs to look unappealing If you reduce the para graph spacing to zero the double newline that is required between paragraphs looks only slightly larger than normal Meanwhile because formatting is ignored by the compile process you can feel free to take advantage of any formatting tools you like to pretty up your document safe with the knowledge that none of it will ever appear outside of Scrivener Some like to use a monospace font like in many plain text editors Indeed with tables this can make editing much easier However many others use whatever font is appealing to them maybe saving monospaced fonts for those sections that require a little perfect placement What about special characters This is often a matter of taste and workflow but you should be aware that many of the default outputs do not handle Unicode well and it is often better to either use codes for special characters or let MMD handle the more com mon ones such as typographic quotation marks You will often find that MMD works in a more error free fashion if you disable all of Scrivener s Corrections section B 6 pref erences You won t need to worry about which way your quotation marks are pointing just leave them straight and let MMD handle the t
242. generated below in the grey area There are three buttons which can adjust the display The and buttons are used to zoom the size of the rendered equation up or down The Grid button enables the formatting grid aid The spacing metrics for each element will be drawn as well as the elements The final size of the window determines the size of the graphic so be sure to shrink the window to the size of the equation prior to closing it Chapter 21 Using MultiMarkdown For those who prefer structural writing solutions to rich text and if this means nothing to you you can entirely skip this section Scrivener allows you to import and export using Fletcher T Penney s MultiMarkdown syntax MultiMarkdown makes it easy to generate documents in any number of formats for instance ATEX and HTMLS using a basic markup syntax for instance using asterisks to define bold and italics It is important to note that if you have used normal word processors such as Mi crosoft Word or OpenOffice org and rich text for years and have never heard of Mul tiMarkdown structural writing or such formats as BTFX you can ignore this aspect of Scrivener Scrivener was designed primarily as a rich text application MultiMarkdown is implemented in such a way that those who want it can access it easily but those who have no need of it need never be bothered by it If you are curious about the process and would like to consider adapting it you should
243. ght be viewing one of the index cards in the corkboard that pops up Just click once in the background of the corkboard to de select any cards Type in a sample line here so we can track it around the interface as we explore this feature This field is not only accessible from the Draft but any document can view the project notes in their Inspector as well Try clicking on one of those index cards in the Draft corkboard and make sure the left most button in the bottom of the inspector is clicked the one that looks like a little notepad By default this will show you the document notes for that selected card You can click on the header bar where it says Document Notes and select Project Notes instead The sample line that you typed in above 114 CHAPTER 12 PROJECT PLANNING will become visible and the background colour will change You can see how accessible project notes are Even when viewing nothing at all they are visible and they can always be selected when viewing anything in the binder even a movie Project notes can also be viewed in a floating window To view the project notepad invoke the Project Project Notes menu command or press 3 P The text area is a mirror copy of what you see in the Inspector See also The Inspector subsection 5 1 5 12 3 1 Managing Project Notes Open project notes by using the Project Project Notes menu command Along the top of the Project Notes window you ll see a tab labell
244. ginal position will not be changed so it is safe to err on the side of over selection Remove items by selecting them and then clicking the key Figure 8 3 in the lower title bar or by simply pressing Delete on your keyboard Delete the entire Collection by first selecting the tab you wish to remove and then clicking the button in the upper title bar Items can be re ordered within the list using click and drag or the same Ctrl ArrowKey combinations used in the Binder Since there is no hierarchy in a Collection you will not be able to promote or demote items To view all of the items in a collection as a group view simply select all of them in the sidebar using Cirl A This will create a multiple selection so you will be unable to move items around within it but otherwise it creates an effective view of the collection in the order it appears in the sidebar using any of the three group view modes 70 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER Collections Search Results New Collection fn e p Search Results E Scene A Figure 8 4 The special Search Result collection 8 4 3 Search Result Collection If you ve used Project Search then you ve been using a Collection without perhaps real ising it Search results are placed into this special collection every time you run a search and the criteria of your search are saved into it along with the project This means the last Project Search that you ran will always be
245. h the top left square that has a red slash drawn through it 15 4 FORMATTING TOOLS 145 J Show Colors Figure 15 3 Right click on the text colour shown or highlight button to access the quick colour selection palette as well as access the standard colour palette For more information on using the colour tools see Text Colour and Highlights section 17 4 The second colour selection drop down works in an identical fashion to the first but it sets the background highlight colour for the selected range Click once to toggle the current highlight or use Cirl Shift H for the selected text or use the arrow button to access further options as described above The final fourth section of the Format Bar accesses tables and lists Clicking the Table button will bring up a configuration palette so you can change the selected table s dimensions and aesthetic characteristics To create a new table click the arrow button and select Insert Table The list tool provides most common list formats Clicking the button once will start a standard bullet list but lists can be enumerated or bulleted in a variety of methods by clicking the down arrow They will transform the current paragraph even if empty into the first list item and will continue generating new list lines until you enter a blank line While using lists at the beginning of the list line it is possible to indent or outdent lists with Tab and Shift Tab The format ba
246. h to replace it whether the search should be case sensitive or apply to whole words only and specify what should be affected by the replace any combination of text titles notes synopses and snapshots Note that a Project Replace cannot be undone except by using swap to exchange the search term for the replacement text and repeating the Replace All oper ation which in some cases might have unexpected results A progress bar at the bottom 20 1 SEARCHING AND REPLACING 197 of the sheet shows you the progress of the replacement operation bear in mind that it could take a little while on large projects As with all tools that make widespread changes in a fashion which cannot be undone it is often a good idea to back up your project prior to use it A simple mistake can render your entire draft illegible or even worse produce subtle flaws that even your editor ends up missing Using the Whole words only option can mitigate this a great deal Without that option searching for the character name Sam and replacing it with Joseph could end you up with such bleakly amusing concoctions as Josephe in place of every same You can choose the scope to optionally affect a variety of document meta data as well as just the text of a document The following options are available 1 Text standard text editor contents including any linked footnotes and comments from within that text 2 Titles the titles of
247. han one binder item at once producing quick lists of links Select Text and Link Often you will want to link a phrase to a specific document without having the name of that document be a part of the link To create links in this fashion select the text you wish to link and then right click on the selected text Use the Scrivener Link sub menu to create a new link This menu is also located in Edit Scrivener Link This sub menu functions in a very similar manner to the Go To menu section 9 2 by providing an organised list of every item in the Binder The menu is organised as follows New Link Ctrl G Ctrl D Brings up a sheet which gives you the option between creating 82 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING a new item and choosing where to place that item or to navigate through a list of items that already exist There are two tabs available in the sheet The default tab Create New Linked Document will let you generate a new document and attach it to an existing con tainer or optionally another item forming a new container The Destination drop down menu provides a list of all the containers in the project Binder Use this to select where the new document should be created By default it will select the Research folder for you If you have unchecked Only show containers in destination list then the drop down menu will display all items in the Binder allowing you to form new containers by creating new items
248. have to look them up Dropping these articles into the References inspector pane establishes a general link to them pertaining to the whole section of the draft that document To create links simply drag documents from the binder or the Finder and URLs from your browser into the table to create links You can also use the button in the References header bar Double clicking on the icon of the reference will open the document either inside Scrivener or in the default application or browser depending on the reference type Ref erences will by default be opened in the opposing split opening one if necessary but you can opt to open a reference using an alternate method by right clicking on it in the table It is possible to open references in a Current View replacing the current editor Other View as a split view using the last split type you used if one needs to be created The button has three options available z Add Internal Reference presents a menu containing all of the items in your project binder Click on any item even a folder to create a reference to it The default description for it will be its binder title z Look Up amp Add External Reference use this menu to load a file browser Any file you select in this browser will be added as a link to the reference list The default description for it will be the file name 18 6 KEYWORDS PANE 177 z Create External Reference creates a new row in which y
249. he first line to indent by half an inch while the rest of the paragraph is set to zero or directly adjacent to the margin Scrivener s default formatting settings demonstrate the best way to use indentation if you need to use it at all Hanging Indents These are produced using the same tools as ordinary first line indents only to produce a hanging indent you will need to inverse which marker comes first If the first line indent marker is to the left of the left indent marker then the body of the paragraph will be pushing inward while leaving the first line hanging over the blank space left below it Right Indents These are rarely used as they will often restrict flexibility down the road depending on your ultimate page size and it can be confusing to calculate where they should be set to For instance if you prefer to proof with a more generous page margin of 1 75 but need a 1 margin for submission an appropriate level of right indentation away from the margin would differ However there are cases where it is necessary of course and in such cases you will need to restrict yourself to using a more limited set of paper and margin sizes 15 4 FORMATTING TOOLS 143 Sometimes when importing material from word processors you may get text which is already indented artificially causing it to wrap before it gets to the edge of Scrivener s editor window You can either pull the right indent marker all the way to the right
250. he interface provides tabbed tables for two meta data types Label and status lines can be added or removed with the and buttons Edit an existing entry by double clicking on the text For labels the colour can be changed by double clicking on the colour chip to the left The order in which these items appear in their respective menus is determined by their arrangement in this table Click and drag rows to rearrange them When you create new items in the binder either by adding items or importing they will automatically be supplied by a default label and status value Ordinarily this will be assigned to the No Label or No Status choices which is a special entry that cannot be deleted but they can be renamed If you wish to change this behaviour select the alternate value by clicking on its row and then click the Make Default button 90 CHAPTER 10 SETTING UP META DATA Once you click the OK button the interface will update with your changes it neces sary and the new options will be available from respective meta data drop down menus throughout the interface 10 1 2 Label Colours Labels can have a colour associated with them and are completely customisable you can even rename Label to POV or something that better fits your project see below Labels are one of the most flexible meta data types in terms of how visible they are in the interface so you can pick a colour to reflect how prominent you wish them
251. he right side set to Scrivenings You can adjust the comparative size of the splits by dragging the strip along the middle that separates them This can be done freely though there are limits to how small a split can be made MAC To reset the splits to be of equal width or height double click the splitter bar with your mouse 14 4 2 Managing Split Views If you wish to swap the actual position of the material in the editors so that the content on the left now appears on the right for example use the View Layout Swap Editors menu command Chapter 15 Writing and Editing 15 1 Rich Text Editing Philosophy Scrivener supports a rich text editing environment which means that it is loosely what you see is what you get Unlike word processors or desktop layout applications how ever the precise formatting that you use when writing in Scrivener may in fact look nothing at all like the final product The compiler will be covered in greater detail in a later section chapter 23 but suffice to say that you can work in one font say the default Courier New but publish in an industry standard font like Times New Roman without having to change your source text What this means for you is that certain aspects of your editing can be conveyed through the compiler like a range of italicised text while the base font itself can be changed beneath that Scrivener s editor can thus be used like a typical word processor but with the kno
252. hen clicked on in the search results rather than revealing their children in accordance with the selected view mode This option is enabled by de fault because generally speaking most search results are based on the text of the matching item not its descendent items and so the reason the item is in the search list at all is because of its text B 4 2 Return Key Behavior Return ends editing synopsis in corkboard and outliner By default the Return key will submit the edits being made to the synopsis in index cards and the synopsis outliner field When disabled the Esc key can be used to stop editing or clicking anywhere outside of the card with your mouse B 4 3 Media Rewind when paused by Use the slider to set how many seconds Scrivener should rewind the media stream back when using Auto Rewind subsection 14 3 3 This preference is not used unless the media player has been set to automatically rewind on pause B 4 4 Scrivener Links Open clicked Scrivener Links in Select whether the current editor will be used to load the target of a clicked Scrivener Link acting more like a web browser or instead if a split view will be created if necessary with the target loaded in the other split B 5 EDITOR 315 You can override this setting at any time by right clicking on the link and choosing a target from the Open Document Link In contextual menu B S Editor The options for the main text editor control how text is display
253. hey can be deleted modified duplicated or set aside and ignored In fact you can create your own templates for future use which will be covered in more detail in the following pages This is often a useful way of further customising Scrivener s default behaviour as many settings found in menus are specific only to the projects you make them in Since the built in templates are just starter projects you can use them to create your own derivative templates based upon them Like many others you may decide a better starting point for you is just the blank starter or a slightly modified version of it with a few of your preferred project settings 52 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 7 7 1 Using Built in Templates Most of the built in templates will provide you with a readme style document at the very top of the Binder that explains what the purpose of the template is what has been modified and set up for you and how best to use it to develop your project Most also contain a sample PDF showing how the final manuscript will be formatted if all of the project settings are left alone For templates that do not come with a help file here are a few things to keep in mind as you explore templates It is worth saying again templates are just starter projects With the exception of a few and somewhat technical differences there is nothing in a template generated project that is different from a blank project In fact a blank project is essential
254. higher up will be viewed In cases where the current view mode conflicts with the selection corkboard will be used as a fall back An example might be if you have scrivenings mode enabled as your default view mode but you are currently viewing an image or PDF Since scrivenings does not apply to these items this command will switch you over to corkboard 78 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING Editor Selection Alt Shift RightArrow Isolates the current selection or active document in a Scrivenings session in the editor in single text mode no matter what type of item it is Useful for viewing folder text or eliminating every thing else in a Scrivenings session so you can focus on one piece Via clicking on the item icon in the editor header bar z In full screen mode the Go To menu is accessible in the control strip along the bottom of the screen as a button In all cases both sub folders and items can be selected When a sub folder is selected it will be loaded with the default view mode Corkboard by default and when using the button in full screen mode it will load the text of that item The header bar menu is provided as a convenience and more readily applies the navigation action to a particular split whereas one must first ensure the right split is active before using the application View menu 9 2 1 Navigating Within Scrivenings When the active split contains a Scrivenings session section 15 8 the Go To
255. his view each of the corresponding documents will be updated as you work The overall effect is as if you were working in a single long document but in fact you are editing potentially dozens or even hundreds of files as you go Scrivenings frequently referred to as a Scrivenings session are temporary editing sessions You don t need to worry about saving them or what will happen if you click on something and they go away It is merely a way of pulling together a number of files so you can edit their text at once and then releasing them when you move on For more information on how to best take advantage of this editing mode see Edit ing Multiple Documents section 15 8 We will also explore a simple usage of it in the following Quick Tour section 5 3 Full Screen Editing Mode Full Screen mode is a special interface which will blot out not only the rest of Scrivener but the rest of your computer as well allowing you to concentrate fully on the produc tion of text It only works for documents and folders and while it provides access to most aspects of the inspector its default state is to simply display the text contents of the selected document or documents if you are viewing an combined text in a page in the middle of your screen Read more about Full Screen chapter 16 5 4 Selections Selection and Focus are often important in Scrivener as there are features which work when only certain types of things ar
256. hortcuts from one computer to another The export button has two options One lets you export a shortcut template for use with the aforementioned import feature The second option will create a human readable text file which is suitable for printing out as a reference Limitations At this time not all of the menu commands have been supplied to you in this list While you can modify most of the menu commands that already have a pre defined shortcut most that do not have one already will not be listed This limitation will be addressed in future versions of Scrivener B 8 Import and Export Scrivener supports a wide variety of file formats both for import into a project and for exporting or compiling B 8 1 Import Export Options Import supported file types only By default Scrivener will allow you to drag file types into the binder even if it cannot internally display them You will still be able to load them using external applications This option prohibits importing unsup ported file types If any have been imported into projects in the past they will remain Convert HTML files to text When importing HTML files off of your disk as opposed to downloading web pages from the Internet you can choose to have them con verted into editable text documents You can only ever drag text files or folders with text files into the Draft 320 APPENDIX B OPTIONS Import first lines of Scapple notes as titles only When dragging Sc
257. hots Show Snapshots 3 The alternate way of taking a snapshot is to supply them with a title as they are created use Documents gt Snapshots gt Take Snapshot with Title or Ctrl Shift 5 This can be done for single or multiple selections as well In the latter case the title will be added to each document in the selection Snapshots can also be titled at a later time using the Inspector Extensive Annotation A trick for more thoroughly commenting on the purpose or state of a Snapshot can be to combine it with the use of inline annotations Consider writing a short synopsis of what the snapshot was taken for at the top of the document before snapshotting and then removing it afterward Now that statement will always be clearly presented to you at the top of the Snapshot text preview The third method for creating snapshots is from the Snapshot pane itself in the Inspec tor Click the button in the header area of this pane to create a new snapshot 15 6 2 Managing and Comparing Snapshots Existing snapshots are all managed in the inspector pane To jump to snapshots click the button with the camera in the Inspector footer bar or use the Docu ments Snapshots Show Snapshots menu item In the snapshots pane you can create new snapshots from the current text with the button remove old snapshots by select ing them in the snapshot list and clicking the button or roll back to a prior version of your text using the Roll Back bu
258. ible in the Outliner For applications based on structural hierarchies like dedicated outliners you can now import and export with OPML and MM Freemind files Windows 8 Compliant Scrivener is now compliant with Windows version 8 for the desktop As with most stan dard software it will run in desktop mode rather than tile mode At this time we have no plans to make a tile version or a touch version for mobile devices running Windows 8 Marginalia Now you get a choice between using inline annotations and footnotes or placing your notes into a new panel located in the Inspector This not only lets you place long notes hetp www literatureandlatte com scrivWinChangeL ist php 11 out of the way of the primary draft but also works as a bookmarking system Clicking on the notes in the Inspector column will automatically scroll your editor to its linked position in the document Your old projects will continue using the inline system as they always have but you can easily convert to the new system with a single menu command or vice versa For more information read Annotations and Footnotes chapter 17 These changes also allow for more extensive formatting controls of footnotes annota tions and comments when compiling section 23 12 Support for New Languages Scrivener now has interface menu and dialogue boxes support for English Chinese German and Italian If you would prefer to use the software using one of these la
259. ide of Scrivener If you feel the search index does not accurately reflect the content or your otherwise suspect that the project might have been damaged by an external application you can manually rebuild the search index with the Tools Save and Rebuild Search Indexes menu com mand http www literatureandlatte com support php http help literatureandlatte com help kb 328 Appendix F Project Bundle Format A Scrivener project is stored on your computer as a cohesive and integrated set of stan dard folders and files This internal structure is designed to be logical and accessible in the rare case that you need to salvage material out of your project when Scrivener is not otherwise available On a Macintosh the operating system will hide the fact that this is a folder from you and display it as though it were a single file Since this is not a feature of the Windows operating system the contents of the project will always be visible to you If you are using a Mac you ll need to right click on the project file and select Show Package Contents The remainder of this section will discuss the contents of the scriv package as though it were a normal folder The entire folder structure is considered to be a part of the project and should never be separated from the rest Consequently it is often best to use an archive method to back up your project such as Zip compression This increases the portability of the project
260. ility You can work in the described manner to a degree where the text as you write it is formatted to how it will be delivered although it will never present a full working preview in all ways but you can also choose to completely separate that aspect from your writing experience and let the compiler handle the details of formatting for you from how titles are named all the way down to whether or not your paragraphs are first line indented or spaced apart Fortunately the distinction between these two ways of working can be made as fuzzy as you like That is you can gradually introduce more automation into the compiler as you learn how to use it rather than having to make a big jump all at once to a new way of working In the chapter on compiling you will be introduced to several basic presets that ship with Scrivener These are intended to be starting points and will not address everyone s individual ways of working or every university s style standards If you are accustomed to working in a word processor you might want to start with the Original preset and work from there If you are used to working in plain text or another workflow that does not regard formatting as part of writing then you might be interested in trying one of the other more comprehensive presets such as the novel standard manuscript or 12pt Times presets The compiler can also be a tool for producing specialised reports by selecting only portions of each item
261. ill be highlighted in blue Press the Return key at any time to conclude editing the field though clicking anywhere else in the interface will also suffice When the meta data field has been set to word wrap or if the related option to force word wrap on all fields below has been set then the Enter key will create a new line instead of ending editing The gear menu presents two display options that pertain to this pane 18 8 SNAPSHOTS PANE 179 Word Wrap All Fields Off by default meaning that fields which have not been set to word wrap will only ever show one line at a time in the display If you would prefer to see all of the text in each field regardless of its configuration enable this option Color Field Names On by default the row colour if relevant for the field will be used to print the title Disable this if the colour settings you have used make this pane difficult to read 18 8 Snapshots Pane This section of the Inspector gives you easy access to all of your existing snapshots the ability to create new ones and delete old ones At the top of the Inspector you will find two buttons Clicking the button will create a new untitled snapshot for the current document you can also use Ctrl 5 to do this while typing To remove a snapshot select it in the table and click the button To read the contents of a snapshot click on any of the rows and its text will appear in the text preview area below the table It is
262. ill default to when clicked upon It will remain this way until you manually change modes again The section on Project Planning chapter 12 goes into greater detail on how to use corkboard and outliner modes to their maximum power The section on Editing Multi ple Documents section 15 8 will cover the unique Scrivenings mode in detail 5 2 1 The Group Mode Toolbar Control Included in the default application toolbar is a so called segmented control It is in the middle of the window and contains three buttons embedded in a single row Figure 5 2 The figure depicts the control when a group of items or a container has been selected When a single item has been selected the icon on the far left will depict a single page The control displays the active view mode with a shaded background This is the last view mode that you picked and it means that editor will always use that method to display groups of content until you change it again while viewing a group To change a 5 2 VIEW MODES 27 mode simply click on any of the other buttons in the control The view for the active editor will immediately change and simultaneously set your preference for that view mode for that project You can also click on the shaded view mode that is already selected to intentionally disable it and view the text of the container that you are viewing If you have clicked on a folder and are viewing its index cards on a corkboard clicking the corkboar
263. ily get to the web site and secure a serial number for your copy Keep Up to Date Presents a form which you can use to submit your e mail address and name to subscribe to our newsletter This is a low volume list that we use to send out important updates and news Please take care to whitelist litereatureand latte com in your spam filter prior to submitting this form as you will be sent a confirmation e mail which must be responded to before you will be subscribed You can also click on the Twitter and Facebook buttons to visit our official social pages Privacy Notice Your e mail address will never be shared with third parties or sold to marketing lists About Scrivener Displays the credits and version number of the application If you are experiencing problems and wish to contact customer support regarding them you can provide version information using this dialogue Click the red X button to close the window when you are done Appendix B Options Like most applications Scrivener installs in a ready to use state The default options have all been carefully selected to present a cohesive and useful writing environment Op tions should thus be considered a preferential and perhaps even slightly more advanced way of using Scrivener This manual has described the application in reference to its defaults but there are a great many ways to tweak the interface and behaviour of the application to suit your preferred wor
264. imilar use the icon of a highlighter pen which will be coloured depending upon the last highlight you used yellow by de fault on the format bar instead As with the text colour tool clicking once will re use the last highlighter colour and clicking on the down arrow will access the quick selection tool For highlighters this can also be accessed in the Format Highlight gt sub menu Colours and Compiling It is important to know that text colour will be exported when compiling to most formats They cannot be automatically removed without overwriting your styling and so should be used either when it is your intention to have them in the final draft or as temporary tools that you periodically strip out when done with them or otherwise intend to use the compiler to reformat the manuscript To wipe out colours set the Formatting options pane to override text and notes for matting and then specifically set the text colour to black and the highlight to white Please read about the Compile Formatting options pane section 23 8 for more infor mation 172 CHAPTER 17 ANNOTATIONS AND FOOTNOTES Some formats and some word processors do not support colour and highlights and so even if they are compiled in they may not always show up When using a workflow that omits these tools you can feel safer in leaving them in when it comes time to compile Scrivener provides tools for stepping through your entire project searching for text colo
265. imilar to the text you copied in Scrivener including some ruler settings colour highlight and so on Copy as Basic HTML Applies very basic HTML 4 01 compliant code When constructing HTML e mails or working with an older web site this is what you will want to use Copy as BBCode Translates most basic formatting into BBCode suitable for fo rum posts Because BBCode does not support as many formatting features as full HTML CSS some elements will be lost Copying without Comments or Footnotes Will strip out all annotation and footnote text while retaining all other formatting Most often this is useful for producing clean snapshots section 15 6 after an editing session This command will remove all notation including linked notation The following menu commands operate on selected documents not text Copy Documents as Scrivener Links Ordinarily when you copy a selection of documents pasting them will just list the names of the documents This command will also build links back to each of the respective documents Copy Documents as ToC Will create a basic Table of Contents out of the selected documents which is meant to be pasted into a Scrivener document See Cre ating a Table of Contents chapter 22 for further information 278 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Paste and Match Style Cirl Shift V This pastes the contents of the clipboard without any of its existing fonts and styles Useful for when you have c
266. in the Draft to be included such as just the title and its synopsis 222 CHAPTER 21 USING MULTIMARKDOWN and meta data The enumerated outline preset demonstrates one such strategy where an indented outline of all your draft titles will be exported as a file Many authors will be taking their finished drafts to a word processor desktop publish ing or scriptwriting application for final post production work We will discuss several common applications on the market and how best to work with them in Scrivener Finally we will also discuss more traditional methods of printing and exporting as well as a few techniques you can use to add final polish to your manuscript The topics that will be covered in this part are Compiling the Draft chapter 23 Discusses compile strategies format compatibili ties and gives a detailed run down of every possible compile option Exporting chap ter 24 Transferring the contents of your project to your hard drive is a great way to back up your work outside of Scrivener entirely or share bits of your project with other people This chapter discusses the options available to you and how best to use them Printing chapter 25 There are two ways of printing in Scrivener One operates as an extension of the compile feature itself and is the preferred way to print proofs or final submission ready manuscripts The second method lets you print quick one offs of any file in the binder Chapter 22
267. inal Draft version 8 or greater you can import scripts directly into any area of the Binder and have them converted to Scrivener s scripting format OPML Outline Processor Markup Language commonly exported from outlin ing style applications this format well let you transfer an outline tree from one application to another Many applications will also save text notes attached to out line nodes and if Scrivener detects them it will use this material in the main text editing area MM Mindmap the primary format for Freemind and related software Import mm files directly into Scrivener to translate their hierarchy into outline format As well as these text file types Scrivener also supports all of the main image file types TIF JPG GIF PNG BMP etc all of the main audio visual formats WMV AVI MPG WAV MP3 etc In addition to the supported types it is possible to import any type of file at all While Scrivener will not display unsupported file types in the editor you can still archive these files into your project for portability or convenience and use the Documents Open in External Editor menu command to load the file in your preferred editor for that file type Changes made to the file will be saved into the project automatically See Viewing Un supported Document Types subsection 14 3 4 for information on how to work with these types of files If you would prefer that Scrivener filter out all unsupported
268. indent to the target text This is by design as Body is nothing special and can even be deleted or completely redefined There are two basic types of presets available 1 Paragraph style this will save all of your ruler settings as well as alignment and line spacing attributes and anything else found in the Format Text sub menu 2 Character attributes this will save any format level adjustments like bold under score kerning or anything else found in the Format Font sub menu These two types can be used exclusively or combined into a single Preset controlling all aspects of the text appearance and both can optionally also apply font size and font family information The Preset menus will display small icons in blue next to each entry indicating whether the style will impact one or both of these types when applied to your text Win note on format bar Presets Button Missing from Toolbar if you are upgrading from a prior version of Scrivener you will need to add the presets button to your Format Bar using the Tools Customize Toolbars menu command New installations of Scrivener will come with this button by default 15 4 FORMATTING TOOLS 147 Applying Presets To apply a preset first select the text you wish to apply the preset to then use one of the following methods Use the Formatting Presets button on the Format Toolbar to select a preset from the drop down menu Use the Format g
269. individual files on our com puter as holding discrete chunks of information You will likely find your work becomes more fluid and visible to you as you can now survey not only the major peaks of your work chapters but smaller components within those chapters too The next section will demonstrate how Scrivener approaches this concept and how it can allow your book to emerge as a genuine outline That is what the binder can do for you and unlike other word processor applications or plug ins that tout outlining capabilities you can use your own internal authorial outline which may or may not have anything to do with the visible structure e g chapter names space breaks between scenes subsection numbering of the book itself 8 1 3 Folders are Files are Folders As you no doubt instinctively know a folder is a place where you organise files You can create folders on your disk and then put files and even other folders inside of them to keep everything nice and tidy Let s throw away all of those notions for a moment and take a new fresh look at folders because in Scrivener folders are an entirely different animal Select a folder in one of your projects by clicking on it in the binder You ll probably get a corkboard view of its child items or perhaps an Outliner view if that is how you have things set up This is all pretty straight forward but what happens if you close the corkboard view With the folder still selected click
270. ine and can be applied to any of your projects but once they are applied those settings are in your project You can also save custom setups as your own presets to be used in this same fashion or export them as portable files which can be used to share settings with colleagues or update a second computer At its most basic usage you can select from a number of handy presets using the Format As drop down menu on the top and then supply a target file format using the Compile For drop down menu at the bottom If you require more detailed control of the exported file you can click the expansion button with the blue arrow to the right of the preset selection menu to reveal the full Compile interface From here it is possible to control practically every element of your draft as it is processed into a single file 23 1 Built in Presets In some cases you may not need to look any further than the supplied presets that have been bundled with Scrivener Some of these have been designed to conform to common industry standards in terms of manuscript submission and working with agents and edi tors others have been designed as useful working tools such as the ability to export an 226 23 1 BUILT IN PRESETS 227 indented outline or the distribution of proofreading copies If you wish to customise these presets you will want to read the section on Expanded Compile Interface directly following and any of the Option Panes which are relevant to
271. ing a custom format or if you have an FDX script that uses a custom format which you wish to retain after import into Scrivener you need to set up Scrivener to use that custom format first Fortunately this is very easy to do as Scrivener can read the formatting directly from an FDX file but you must do this before importing the script itself Remember Scrivener can hold many different script documents but can only use one script format in a project at a time this is why setting up the format must be done separately from importing a script To import the formatting from an FDX file 1 Open the Script Settings panel by going to Format Scriptwriting Script Settings 2 Inthe Script Settings panel click on the Manage pop up button in the bottom left 3 Select Load from Final Draft fdx 4 In the open panel that appears select the FDX file that contains the elements and formatting you want to use and then click OK and OK again on the Script Settings panel to accept the changes This doesn t import the actual script it just imports its elements and formatting for use in the current project To test the new format create a new document choose scriptwriting format Format Scriptwriting Script Mode FDX Script Settings and start typing changing el ements using tab and enter or using the pop up menu in the footer view beneath the editor You will see that the script uses the format
272. ing the Compile For drop down menu select Print then click the Compile button Once Scrivener has finished processing your draft you will be presented with the stan dard Windows print dialogue From here you can select from a number of software printers designed to write a print job to a file or send the print job to your physical 270 CHAPTER 25 PRINTING printer For example if you have Microsoft Office installed on your computer you ll be able to print pages to OneNote If you have a PDF writer installed you can print to PDF though you might as well just use Scrivener s PDF generator at that point See also Read Compiling the Draft chapter 23 for more details on how to compile z If you want to print a script read Printing or Exporting a Script section 19 2 for tips Part V Appendices Appendix A Menus and Keyboard Shortcuts This appendix will address each item in every menu and will display the keyboard short cut for it when applicable It is intended to be a quick exhaustive reference of the menus and will attempt to point you in the right direction for more thorough discussion and analysis of various features when necessary The menus in Scrivener are divided into various domains in which we attempt to or ganise functions into them according to those domains If you are looking for a particular feature and are not sure where it is located then reference the table describing the men
273. input 0 5 into Scrivener since an additional inch will be added to the layout once margins are added to the page outside of Scrivener Indentation Allows simple customisation of the ruler layout for each element provid ing support for most if not all formatting requirements on the page First Line Indent Sets the left indentation of the first line of the paragraph a value which will only impact the first line and no subsequent lines from the same paragraph z Left Indent Sets the left indentation of all lines in the paragraph excepting the first Set this value identical to the First Line Indent to create a uniform block indent look Right Indent Sets the right indentation of the paragraph This setting pertains to all lines z First Tab Sets the first tab stop of the paragraph Note that subsequent tab stops may be added automatically to differentiate elements should any ele ments have the same formatting 19 4 CREATING YOUR OWN SCRIPT FORMATS 189 Tab Return Tab The Tab Return pane allows you to control the tab and return behaviour for the selected element that is it lets you specify what happens when you hit the tab or return keys and so thus can be used to aid in the flow of writing If you are creating a scripting environment from scratch you might wish to save this step for last since you will need to reference other elements which may not exist while you are going through the list initia
274. iscussions on the topic or start one of your own 21 5 Compiling This section of the documentation will not cover compilation in detail You should consult the chapter on Compiling the Draft chapter 23 for detailed information on the various options that will pertain to you Most of the MMD options are built into the existing option panes often replacing those that are not relevant or changing options 21 5 COMPILING 215 as necessary This section will instead focus on the various formats available and which compile panes to check for best harnessing Scrivener s compile automation 21 5 1 Compile Folder As with the standard HTML output in Scrivener if the compile results in more than one file being produced a compile folder will be created using the name you specified with the output document located within that folder along with any support files it needs This will most often be graphics or supporting tex documents for typesetting You may find that you want to keep this output folder static instead of having Scrivener completely regenerate it each time you compile You might wish to assemble CSS files custom tex files styles and other bits of supporting data so that you can com pile directly into a finished location rather than compiling and moving things around into the final support folder each time Scrivener will for the most part handle this trans parently for you with natural file extensions If the compile fo
275. ise They are a convenient way for you to apply notes to your document or to share and receive thoughts from those who are editing your work Since MMD itself does not have any syntax for commenting a work unless of course you consider HTML comments which reduces the flexibility of your document as these are otherwise used to pass raw IATEX code to the final output Scrivener provides two choices to you for handling them 1 Inline annotations can as with the other plain text output formats be wrapped in enclosing markers square brackets by default Creative use of this can allow 214 CHAPTER 21 USING MULTIMARKDOWN you to use the inline annotations as shorthand for a longer sequence of coding you typically use for example you could use them to supply HTML comment markers around the annotated text thus providing an easy to read way of pushing raw BIEX code into the final compile 2 Inline annotations can optionally be compiled using HTML syntax instead When converted to HTML inline footnotes which are in one way or another attached to another paragraph will be converted to lt span gt elements which have been classed as annotation and coloured with inline CSS in accordance with their appearance in the editor or sidebar If however an inline footnote falls on its own paragraph it will use a lt div gt element instead While simple MMD syntax can be applied to a span range such as italicised text a div block can cont
276. itor this process by watching the upper left corner of the window The name of the project in the title bar will have an asterisk after it whenever the project contains edits which have yet to be saved to the disk If you stop typing or clicking in the interface for a moment the mark should disappear after a brief pause and now everything is saved to the disk You can change how rapidly this happens by adjusting the inactivity interval in the General section of the application options At times or if you have selected a very long interval for some reason you might wish to manually save the project This can be done as per normal in any application by selecting File gt Save or pressing Cirl S This feature need not be used to fully save the project however Very often by the time you activate this command the project will already be saved to the disk and it will do nothing However if you work rapidly and rarely produces pauses it might be a good habit to get into It is also possible to save a separate copy of the project while working and continue working in the new copy To do this select File Save As Ctrl Shift S and choose a new name for the project After supplying a new name and clicking the Save button the active project will become the new one you created and the old copy will be closed This can be a useful tool when you wish to experiment with a series of radical structural changes If you merely wish to create a backup
277. itself to a level of detail you require and no less or greater This section will cover the majority of the tools that you may use to accomplish these goals If your methods couple the processes of writing and preparation you might find it beneficial to read portions of both this section and Writing Part II The level of fuzziness between preparation and writing in Scrivener is very intentional because the same tools you use to build up initial structures and ideas will be the tools you use to write edit and finish off your text with In Scrivener there is no separation between outline and book order or content This seamless approach will help you get straight into the writing phase even while you are still planning and evolving the work Conversely you can just easily start writing prose immediately and let the bigger picture emerge organically out of what you write To better learn the fundamentals of Scrivener such as where your works will be saved and how to use the binder to select items within your project to view or edit them it is recommended that you read the next three chapters After that point we ll discuss some more practical research planning and project usage techniques which can be learned as needed The topics that will be covered in this part are 6 6 COMPILING THE DRAFT 45 Project Management chapter 7 Creating saving backing up and managing projects on the disk z Setting Up the Binder chap
278. ity globally consider excluding the large project from the automated system While the project is open use the File Back Up Exclude From Automatic Backups menu command Once this option is checked off the automatic backup system will ignore this project entirely It will then be up to you to keep manual backups of the project The File Back Up Back Up Now feature is useful in this regard 7 8 3 Manually Backing Up Backups can be created whenever and wherever you want Use File Back Up Back Up To and select a backup location and filename The Backup as ZIP file option in the subsequent dialogue will compress the backup project into a zip file after saving it and is thus useful when backing up to remote storage locations such as Dropbox By default backups will be timestamped making it easy to find a precise version later on and reducing confusion over which version of the project is the most up to date the one without a date is your primary project It is also possible to manually trigger the automatic backup system even for projects which have been excluded by using File Back Up Back Up Now This will follow any relevant options that have been set in preferences such as how many to keep where to store them and how many to keep around Do be aware that since automatic backups rotate the oldest versions out if you use this command frequently you might end up losing a backup you later want If unsure use
279. ive you a powerful way to view and modify multiple documents at once in a variety of fashions each tailored to different tasks View modes are generally only triggered when the editor is asked to view more than one document at a time This can happen if you Ctrl click on more than one binder item or even if you just click on a folder It is also possible to manually enable a view mode allowing you to easily flesh out a single document with new index cards beneath it For the most part Scrivener will anticipate what you are trying to do and react accord ingly If you click on a single text file it will display the contents of that text file in the editor If you then click on the group containing that file it will automatically switch to your preferred group view mode the one which you used last corkboard by default An exception to this rule is when the view mode has been explicitly set to single text file mode If you intentionally disable the corkboard to edit a folder s text then the view mode will remain text only until changed no matter what type of item you click on in the binder A key principle is that view modes are just that They are alternative ways of viewing a binder item and thus like the binder are methods for organisation You can think 26 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE E E E S Figure 5 2 Segmented control in group mode with Scrivenings mode selected of view modes as being like an elaborate extension of the binder and i
280. jects are also saved automatically whenever they are closed However you can use Save to force an immediate save whenever you want Save As Cirl Shift S Will prompt you for a new project name and or location When you submit this dialogue box Scrivener will immediately start working off of the new copy If instead you want to generate a backup copy and keep working off of the original use File Backup Project To instead For more information on managing your project files see Project Management chap ter 7 Import gt Features for importing a variety of existing information from your drive or even from the Internet into your active project For full documentation on importing information into Scrivener refer to Gathering Material section 11 1 Files Ctrl Shift J Import files from the file system into Scrivener Only text formats can be imported in the Draft folder See the prior referenced section for a full list of supported formats there and elsewhere in the Binder Web Page Ctrl Shift W Import and archive a web page from the Internet by supplying Scrivener with its URL OPML or Mindmap File Convert an opml or mm Freemind file into a full outline in the binder optionally including any note text that may be saved into the file Note content can be imported into synopsis text or document notes or stripped altogether so that only the outline structure is imported not all OPML compatible softwar
281. k as well but it might be useful to you to have a concise list of Latin names in the outliner as a dedicated column And that brings us to presentation Of all the meta data types custom meta data are perhaps the least visible In fact there are only two ways you can view them in an outliner column or in the dedicated inspector pane This can prove quite useful for some types of information In the Inspector you will be presented with a linear list of text fields each headed by the name of the field This presentation makes it easy to write as much as you need into the fields or quickly see at a glance all of the details of the item you are viewing Hopefully you get the idea You can of course use them however you like just keep in mind that they will not auto complete like keywords or provide you with a list of stock answers like labels or status will Custom fields are fundamentally free form plain text fields much like the Synopsis Custom meta usage is generally limited to the inspector and outliner though it can also be exported along with the rest of the meta data when compiling exporting binder items and printing The text content of custom fields can be search as a unified group using Project Search subsection 20 1 2 See Also 10 1 META DATA TYPES 93 Kil Manage the label and status lists specific to this project Labels Status Custom Meta Data Project Properties Custom meta data can be added as columns
282. kboard background Lets you customise the standard corkboard background Se lect from Corkboard pattern Beige Graph Paper or Slate Graph Paper to use one of the provided background patterns Custom color to choose a back ground colour using the colour well to the right of the pop up button or Custom background to select your own image file to use to fill the background For better performance use smaller tiling textures rather than large images Status stamp opacity Allows you to set the opacity of status stamps on the index cards within the corkboard The stamp unlike a real one is drawn beneath the text so even at full opacity it will not obscure synopsis text This only impacts how boldly the stamp will be drawn Index card shadows Sets the intensity of the shadows around the cards and borders of the corkboard view Slide all the way to the left to disable shadows Label tint opacity Define how much blending Scrivener should use between label colour and the underlying icon or background colour Moving the slider right toward High will cause icons to be coloured more vividly moving the slider left toward Low will cause the effect to be more subtle B 4 Navigation The navigation settings provide settings to alter how Scrivener reacts to the various ac tions you can take to navigate around in your project There are numerous ways of doing so from clicking directly on items to using
283. king style This appendix will thoroughly docu ment every single option item as presented to you in the Options window itself and its tabs This way if you wish to seek clarification on a particular item you can find it using the manual s list of option tabs and then within that section sub sections will separate groups of preferences in accordance with their grouping in the application Because Scrivener is a multi project application options are split up in different areas so that you can supply new projects with some starter settings Once these projects have been created they will maintain their own individual settings from that point forward One step beyond that there are a sub set of options which apply at the document level and each document will diverge from the project and application options Not all options work in this cascading fashion The ones that do will be indicated as such in their notes Many of the settings that are wholly project specific make no appearance in the application option tabs at all A good example of this is whether or not labels are displayed on index cards By default they are but you can turn them off for a project and it will remember that setting There is however no way to change that behaviour globally All of the project specific options are located in menus and most of these are in either the Project menu or the View menu This section will not cover these specifically though some
284. l and Collapse All in the View Outline sub menu will disclose or reveal the entire outline at once Collapse All to Current Level Working in a similar fashion to Collapse All this com mand will collapse the entire outline but only up to the currently selected item s 66 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER level So for example if you if have an outline that has six levels of depth and select a folder on level 3 running this command will completely collapse all items except those at levels one two and three Moving items with drag and drop Items can be moved around in the binder with drag and drop Simply pick up the item by clicking and holding the mouse button down then drag the mouse pointer to where you wish to drop it The binder will display a blue target underneath the pointer showing where the drop will end up Moving items with the keyboard Ctrl Arrow keys can be used to move an item around spatially in the binder step by step Up and down will increase or decrease its placement in the outline while left and right will promote and demote the item For example selecting a folder that holds the contents of chapter eight and pressing Ctrl DownArrow will move it down one spot swapping its position with the chapter below It will now be chapter nine and the other chapter will be eight Keyboard navigation The arrow keys by themselves will move the selection around in the binder a Up and down arrows will mov
285. l be duplicated without Subdocuments Ctrl Shift D This is most useful when you only want to duplicate the container of an item by itself such as a chapter folder but not all of the scenes within it A 5 1 Set Selection as Title Set Selection as Title F2 Available when text has been selected in the main editor the title for the current document will be replaced with whatever text has been selected Move to Trash Shift Del As you no doubt guessed this moves selected items to the project s trash It will use active selections in the Outliner or Corkboard as well as in the binder sidebar 294 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Split Provides a couple of methods for splitting the current document into two dif ferent documents In both cases everything below the current cursor position will be moved into a new document below the current one Everything above the cur sor will remain unchanged This action cannot be undone except via the Merge command below z at Selection Ctrl K simply create a new document with all text below the current caret position Text selections will be ignored and instead the whole paragraph starting from the beginning of the line containing the selection will be split into the second document with Selection as Title Ctrl Shift K works the same as above but in this case the currently selected text will be used to title the new document that is cre ated rather than re
286. later to load them back in Use this to transfer your settings from one computer to another or to periodically back up your options Finally the Defaults button will do a factory reset returning all options to their default states This cannot be undone but you will be warned after clicking the button B General The General tab governs the application s basic behaviour its integration with other programs and import and export of material B 1 1 Startup Options Open recent projects on program launch Reopens recently opened projects whenever Scrivener is launched thus saving you the effort of opening what you were last working on Show start panel when there are no projects open Toggles the display of the start panel which lets you create new projects open existing projects on your drive or select from a list of recently worked on projects Note you can always completely quit the application by using the File Exit to avoid seeing this window Show full project path in the title bar When enabled the full path the precise loca tion of the project including its parent folders will be displayed along with the name in the title bar at the top of the project window Automatically check for updates If this is checked whenever Scrivener is launched it will check the website to see if there is a newer version available and if so will ask you if you want to update Note that if you do not have this checked you can still
287. lder for example is called my_novel tex then when you compile to that folder Scrivener will leave what is al ready there alone unless it is a file that Scrivener is scheduled to produce This way graphics will be updated but any logos or other elements from the title page that are not in the project itself will be retained Extension detection is done for tex md mmd fodt and html If the file extension you wish to use is not one of those you can instead rename the compile folder to my_novel_mmd and Scrivener will leave it alone the next time around Any folder ending in _mmd or mmd will be preserved 21 5 2 Plain MultiMarkdown While the built in compile options that go directly to a specific format are incredibly handy there are occasions when exporting a plain MMD document can be useful and even valuable The MultiMarkdown format makes for an excellent long term archival document It s compact easy to ready and easy to transform into a variety of output formats It s also very portable being plain text While dropping an archived Scrivener project that you are done with into a database system or even just in your file system somewhere is something you should always do a plain text copy of the final product is something that will be more easily archived in multiple places for many years to come Beyond archival a plain MMD document allows you to step into the compil
288. ldren will be shown as index cards Also sets your preferred view mode to Corkboard See also The Corkboard section 12 1 Outline Ctrl 3 Display the current editor as an outline Also sets your preferred view mode to Outliner See also The Outliner section 12 2 A 3 VIEW MENU 283 Go To gt Offers an alternate way to jump to a specific binder item without using the binder If the binder is hidden or a collection is selected for instance will let you navigate to other areas of the project without having to alter your work environ ment The contents of this menu will be populated by the binder or by the current Scrivenings session Also provided are some contextual navigation and focus func tions which will let you move around in the binder from the editor itself Previous Document Alt Shift UpArrow Jumps to the previous document in the binder according to strict outline order ignore hierarchy Next Document Alt Shift DownArrow As with Previous Document but se lects the next document in the strict outline order Enclosing Group Alt Shift LeftArrow Will display the currently edited item in context with its siblings using the current view mode In most cases this will select the immediate parent of the document selecting the document s index card or outliner row that you came from for your convenience or expand your current scrivenings session to include the siblings and parent of the current text ite
289. le clicking into the text field you wish to edit Once editing you can move between titles with the Tab and Shift Tab keys much like in an ordinary text editor or outliner Press Enter to exit editing mode You can expand or collapse the outline by clicking on the small disclosure arrow to the left of the title When viewing an outliner with only text documents you may not see any arrows All items can be expanded completely with View Outline Expand All Conversely all items can be completely closed with View Outline Collapse All Addi tionally you can hold down the Alt key and click on any arrow to completely expand or collapse that portion of the tree Most columns that allow you to edit their data will provide controls for doing so 12 2 THE OUTLINER 111 Checkboxes an example Page Break Before will present a checkbox that you can click to add a page break before that document when exporting You can impact many checkboxes at once by holding down the Alt key and clicking on a checkbox Labels and Status and Target Type will provide drop down menus that you can use to adjust the meta data for a row For labels and status If you wish to impact more than one row at once select these rows first and then use right click to access the contextual menu instead of clicking directly in the outliner Columns with editable text such as the Title custom meta data or Target column will not provide a control but
290. le letter here that will be used in the script elements menu as a shortcut key 188 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING Paragraph Tab The paragraph tab provides paragraph formatting for the selected element Alignment Sets the current paragraph alignment left centred right or justified Spacing Sets the inter line spacing single 1 5 or double Use the Other Spacing op tion to also set pre line spacing to buffer it away from the prior element The read out for this is Line spacing Before spacing After spacing So 12 24 0 0 0 means 12pt line spacing or single if the main font is 12pt with 24pt before line spacing or two lines with a 12pt font Spacing before can also be set independently below Ruler Conversions When working with units in Scrivener keep in mind that its ruler starts at margin zero instead of paper zero Since Scrivener is by and large not aware of paper settings and page layout it counts its ruler settings from the beginning of the text on the left end of the page not the beginning of the paper itself This is in contrast to many word processors which start measuring at the paper left edge and show the print margin buffer in the display of the page Consequently to convert most standard measurements to useful values here you will need to factor in the standard amount of print margin For example if the Scene Heading is specified to begin at 1 5 you will need to subtract 1 from that and
291. lets you cut your work up into small pieces An average book might have anywhere between several dozen and a few hundred sec tions arranged into many containers Along with the binder there are two primary tools for making sense of all of these pieces The Outliner section 12 2 and The Corkboard section 12 1 covered later in this portion of the book For now we will concentrate on how to use them as navigational tools and as your skills increase you ll find other uses for them beyond mere navigation Beyond the three primary navigation tools there are a number of other features which can be used as needed to enhance the main three and these will be covered in this section as well 9 1 1 Navigation Specifics Both corkboard and outliner views have an Auto Load feature which when enabled will load any selected item s in the other split but only if the editor has already been split CF 2 Auto load Button Figure 9 1 The Auto Load button will appear blue when activated 76 9 2 GO TO MENU 77 The Auto Load button Figure 9 1 is located in the footer bar and will appear blue when switched on This action will use the current default view mode for that split Additionally for corkboard and outliner views you may Double click on any icon to the left of the title itself to load that document in the editor using the current view mode 9 2 GoTo Menu In most cases it will be easiest to use the binder or the group views i
292. ll create the appearance of endnotes by embedding look alike text represen tations for both the marker and the footnote itself Since most of these formats also do not have a concept of a page it will be impossible for them to generate true footnotes Consequently they will nearly always be inserted at the very end of the document be coming in effect endnotes When using these formats the available options will reflect 23 12 FOOTNOTES COMMENTS 253 what is capable Remove footnotes The exported manuscript will have all footnotes inline or linked stripped from it When this option is enabled the rest of the footnote section will be disabled Override font If you wish to use a separate font to print footnotes this can be set here Note that many word processors have their own special stylesheets for handling footnote appearance so this option may not always be necessary This format will be used consistently for all footnotes even if they are featured in sections which have substantially different base formatting than the rest Ordinarily footnotes pick up the paragraph settings of the paragraphs they fall after Group footnotes This feature allows you to gather footnotes together into a deter mined place for formats that do not otherwise support true footnotes It will toggle the default behaviour whereby all footnotes are attached to the very end of the manuscript and will instead insert them at the nearest subsequent p
293. ll in the footnote bubble B 2 APPEARANCE Category Contd Index Cards Scratch Pad Table B 2 Appearance Colour Settings Cont d Interface Element Footnotes Background Ghost Footnotes Text Ghost Footnotes Background Search Text Selection Search Text Selection Border Find Text Selection Find Alternate Text Selection Find Text Selection Text Background Index Card Divider Index Card Lines Index Card Status Stamp Index Card Border Color Index Card Background Color Editor Background Editor Text Description Background shade which will be used to fill in the footnote marker Same as with Ghost Annotated Text above Alternating shading to be used when a footnote is ghosted Highlight colour used to illuminate which portions of the text matched a search The bubble border used in above high light set to the same to use a non bordered look Highlight colour used to illumi nate matching text when using Edit gt Find Find When set to a different colour the high light will pulsate between these two The text colour will be changed to this temporarily in the find match Useful when using a dark highlight Only available for full screen sets the colour for the area to the sides of the vir tual paper The heavy border that separates the in dex card title from its synopsis The line rule colour used in the synop sis area set to the background colour to eliminate them Base
294. llowing you to select from a list of potential replacements or edit the original among other func tions Writing Tools Access to handy Internet searches based on the currently selected text phrase as well as the The Name Generator section 20 3 Define Ctrl G Ctrl F3 Quickly look up definitions and associated words and meanings with Scrivener s built in WordNet U S English dictionary Select the word you wish to look up and use this command to open the WordNet window Read more about it in Looking up Definitions with WordNet sec tion 20 4 Internet Searches A variety of Web searches can be easily performed here us ing the currently selected text An active connection to the Internet is re quired These commands will open a web browser window using your de fault browser Name Generator A unique Scrivener tool which will generate names based on a wide variety of criteria Read more in The Name Generator section 20 3 Scratch Pad Cirl Shift Zero Displays or closes the floating Scratch Pad Panel sec tion 11 3 useful for collecting information while using other applications Customize Toolbars Edit the various toolbars in Scrivener For details on using this see Customising Toolbars Appendix C Options F12 Accesses the main application options window For a complete list of all available options see Options subsection B 2 1 Save and Rebuild Search Indexes This is sometimes useful in
295. lly On return Sets which element formatting the text will use when you hit the Return key Using Screenplay as an example for the Scene Heading element Action is selected for On return This means that if you hit the return key after typing a Scene Heading the text will automatically be formatted and ready to type an Action element Tab behavior Sets what happens when you hit the tab key z Allow tabs If this is checked the tab key works as it would normally that is it inserts tabs With this checked none of the other options for tab behaviour are available z Tabbing on an empty line Choose an element from the Go to pop up but ton to set which element will be formatted when you hit tab on an empty line This allows you to cycle through elements using the tab key For in stance in the Screenplay format if you are at the beginning of the line using the Scene Heading format you can then hit the tab key to reformat the line as an Action element provided you haven t typed anything yet Tabbing after typing Sets what happens when you hit the tab key after typing something in the current element Select Go to and an element from the pop up button to have tab automatically take you to the next desired element inserting a new line automatically Use this to define convenient alternate common elements Select Insert and type characters in the text field to have the tab key insert a charact
296. lly Ctrl Shift These commands allow you to choose how to view the main editor in the main window For more information on using splits see Splitting the Editor section 14 4 A 3 VIEW MENU 285 Swap Editors Only available when Split Horizontally or Split Vertically is se lected see above This commands swaps the position of the two split panes For example so that the view on the top will become the view on the bottom and vice versa Show Hide Header amp Footer View Alt UpArrow Alt DownArrow Toggles the visibility of the header and footer bar Both are elements of the editor and can be toggled independently for each split See The Editor chapter 14 for more information on what these do Editor gt Options and commands for controlling the main editor Lock in Place Ctrl Shift L Locks the editor or split so that no binder clicks will affect it When an editor is locked its header bar will turn a shade of red Forward Backward in Document History Ctrl and Ctrl Like a Web browser the editor keeps track of everything you ve visited Using these commands you can navigate back and forth in the history Note you can also use the Forward and Backward buttons in the header bar Each split keeps its own history When selecting a number of documents in the binder prior to entering com position mode the history queue will be pre stocked with these selected items so long as the main editor is not set up in Sc
297. luded in the totals Thus all words written to any subdocuments of 200 CHAPTER 20 WRITING TOOLS it will count toward that aggregate goal even if they themselves do not have goals Targets for folders can be easily set by using the Target column To get the word or character count for a selection of text select some text in a document and right click on the selected text The word and character count will appear in the bottom of the menu in grey text To view the word character counts and targets for several documents at once use the outliner view and make visible the appropriate columns by clicking on the down arrow button in the outliner column bar or by selecting View Outliner Columns You can use the Total Words column to collect aggregate counts for items which have children To view a combined word and character count of an arbitrary selection of docu ments use the outliner or corkboard to select several documents and then switch to Scrivenings view to get the total word count in the footer bar Note this method only counts items in the session so if the selection you made does not include a container s children you ll need to make sure to select them as well in the binder Usage Tip The word frequency tool in Text Statistics only counts text within a cur rent view which can include a Scrivenings session Thus to perform this analysis on the entire Draft or large portions of it create a Scrivenings sessi
298. ly an extremely minimal template Everything that you see in a template can be handled just as you would handle any other items in the binder They can be duplicated deleted modified turned into document templates or what have you Scrivener templates do not provide you with forms wizards or parts of the interface that you must fill out before proceeding A sample chapter with an empty scene in it is just what it looks like a folder with a file in it To change it edit it as you would any other piece of outline If you want another one to make a second chapter duplicate it Scrap it if you don t like the style at all and want to design your own structure When you use a new template for the first time check the project meta data settings Project Meta Data Settings and make sure that everything is arranged the way you prefer Some templates will change the name of the Draft and Research folders to some thing more appropriate The novel template for example changes the Draft name to Manuscript Note that when the Draft has been renamed all interface elements that refer to it will have their labels updated Some templates will have document templates inside them already pre configured This will provide you with starter documents for creating new elements within the tem plate You can modify the items in this folder to customise them or add your own 7 7 2 Creating Your Own Templates Creating custom template
299. m Editor Selection Alt Shift RightArrow jumps directly to the text component of any selected item This works as an isolation feature in Scrivenings or can also be used to quickly open selected item s from Corkboard or Outliner as text even if they are containers In other words if the selection is a container these commands will load that item in a view Alt Shift RightArrow will always load the selected item as a text file When more than one item is selected they will be loaded as a composite Scrivening in Multiple Selection mode Collections gt Provides commands for setting visibility and options of the Collections feature For documentation on how to use Collections see Using Collections sec tion 8 4 Collections Ctrl Shift 9 Reveals or hides the collection tab interface which will appear above the binder Note the sidebar will need to be visible for this menu option have any immediate affect but the option will be changed in the background for you so the next time you enable the binder sidebar Col lections will be visible Convert to Standard Collection When a Search Result Collection is the active tab this command will freeze the results and turn it into a regular collec tion that is no longer dynamically updated This is a one way process that 284 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS cannot be undone To freeze a search result list without converting the origi nal collection simply select the
300. mall blue T badge added to their icons Some of the built in project templates will come with a template folder already set up for you To use your own templates folder first clear the default setting described in the next section Optionally you could just remove the contents of the default and fill it with your own templates If you find yourself doing this often you might wish to create your own project tem plate subsection 7 7 2 so that everything is set up the way you prefer when you start 8 5 2 Clearing Document Template Folder To clear the document template folder use the Projects Clear Templates Folder menu item This action will not delete anything in your project It will merely remove the 8 5 DOCUMENT TEMPLATES 73 4 EE Research 4 Templates Minor Character Sheet gt Major Character Dossier a ra Location Geography Principle Buildings p Untitled Figure 8 5 Example Document Template Structure special status from the designated templates folder Template folders can be placed or designated anywhere in the binder even in the Draft though do note that if you do that they will likely show up in the final manuscript and toggling them to be hidden would lead to generated items being hidden by default as well 8 5 3 Creating Document Templates Creating new templates is as easy as creating a normal file or folder item in the binder There is nothing special about these items save for their p
301. me change z Search Binder Selection Only pre select items in the binder and then perform the search against those items only This selection is explicit not implicit Selecting a folder will not include all of its children in the search query as well This option is not used in Saved Search Collections Exclude Trash Documents ordinarily items located in the trash will be discovered by search results using faded icons in the search results list If you d rather not see them at all use this option to disable Trash folder searching This option is not used in Saved Search Collections Search Included Documents include documents that have been marked as Include in Compile in their meta data This option can be combined with the below vw Search Excluded Documents include documents that have not been marked as Include in Compile in their meta data This option can be combined with the above Case Sensitive by default the search engine ignores letter case If you need to search for proper nouns and are getting a lot of false positives this option can help Save Search As Collection Creates a special Saved Search Result Collections subsection 8 4 4 which will keep itself dynamically updated whenever you view them 20 1 3 Project Replace The menu command Edit Find Project Replace provides the ability to replace text throughout the entire project Set the text to find the text with whic
302. me of the MMD extensions for you It will instead cover the integration features provided by Scrivener and assumes a basic working knowledge of the system hetp johnmacfarlane net pandoc http www literatureandlatte com support php 210 CHAPTER 21 USING MULTIMARKDOWN 21 3 Getting Started with MMD There is very little you need to do to prepare for using MultiMarkdown Scrivener comes pre loaded with the latest version of it at the time of its release and also includes sev eral optional packages which will be employed as needed This means that even if you intend to use a more advanced workflow like BTEX or XSLT post processing you won t need to install anything extra You are of course free to and Scrivener will cross check your system for you If it detects installed components it will gracefully switch to using them behind the scenes You could right now start testing it out and compiling finished documents 21 4 MMD and Scrivener Because MultiMarkdown requires a certain degree of textual precision many of the visual tools that rich text users commonly use can have a negative impact on how well you can see your document For example in MMD a tab in front of a line turns it into a code block thus indenting the first line of each paragraph could lead to confusing results Likewise using paragraph spacing could make for confusing results in an environment where every block needs a clear space around it Pseudo spacin
303. me people like to use Snapshots to set milestones as well as just capture periodic changes Scrivener accommodates both styles of working as you can take Untitled Snapshots with a single keystroke You can also name your snapshots either when you take them or later on Named snapshots are easy to pick out of the crowd of Untitled ones and it also makes it easier to clean up old routine Untitled ones once they ve outlived their usefulness Theory aside snapshots provide a way of backing up and saving different versions of individual documents Taking a snapshot of a document takes a copy of the text of that document as it exists at that exact moment in time and stores it so that you can return to it or restore it at a later date With routine usage you need never need worry about making major edits to a document because you can take a snapshot of it before you begin editing and then restore the older version later if you change your mind about the edits you have made Snapshots only affect the text of documents not notes synopses or meta data and are therefore only available for documents that contain text files and folders You can tell if a text document has any associated snapshots by its icon Documents that have had snapshots taken of them have the top right of the paper icon folded down in a dog ear You can also tell by looking at the bottom of the Inspector pane on the right If there is an asterisk in the
304. me will be inserted into the document Using this menu you can also create a link to a document that doesn t exist yet The New Link command Ctrl G Ctrl D will ask you for the title of the new document and where to place it or which existing document to link to in the second tab After providing this information a link to this document will be placed in the current editor Read more about Linking Documents Together section 9 4 A 2 EDIT MENU 281 Unlink If the cursor is placed in the text of a link this command will destroy it To delete both the text and the link together select the linked text and delete it as you would normal text Find As with many applications you will find familiar tools for finding things both in individual document This list briefly explains the various functions For full doc umentation on how to use Scrivener s extensive searching features see Searching and Replacing section 20 1 Find Cirl F The standard find and replace panel This panel only works within a single editing window Most often this means one document but in the case of a combined text view it might mean many documents Find Next Previous F3 Shift F3 Jumps to the next or previous matching text based on the criteria supplied in the Find panel relative from your current cursor position Note these can be used even if the find panel is closed Use Selection for Find Ctrl G Ctrl F Sets the selected text as
305. media into the Draft the drop will be prohibited until you move the mouse out of that folder 11 1 1 Supported File Formats Scrivener supports the following text types for importing RTF rich text format the universal rich text standard This is often the best format to use for importing from word processors DOC amp DOCX Microsoft Word format the main formats used by Microsoft Word and the writing industry ODT Open Document Text format used by OpenOffice and related projects such as LibreOffice a TXT plain text plain text files use encodings ways of mapping the text in the file to characters on your screen If a plain text document gets imported as gibberish you may need to try using another encoding If all else fails use copy and paste from a program that opens it fine PDF portable document format standard format for preserving and publishing documents in a read only format e HTML hypertext markup language the language of the Web Imported HTML files can be converted to either PDF for long term archival in MHT format or as converted text as an editable file in the Binder Although the current version of Scrivener cannot natively display MHT files they can be loaded in an external viewer such as Internet Explorer Scrivener will be updated to support native display of MHT 100 CHAPTER 11 GATHERING MATERIAL FDX Final Draft format using the standard document format for F
306. menu where you can select Document Notes or Project Notes Document notes are always attached to the current document in the sense that you cannot view them unless you have loaded their respective document in the Inspector Project notes are similar to document notes except they are visible to the entire project no matter what document you have selected In addition you can also create 176 CHAPTER 18 INSPECTOR multiple project notepads using the Project Notes window section 12 3 or by selecting the Manage Project Notes menu command at the bottom of the Notes header bar selection menu When more than one notepad has been created for a project you will see them appear in this menu as well There will always be at least one project notepad 18 5 References The References table allows you to hold links to related material within the project itself elsewhere on your hard drive or on the Internet General or vague linking between items can be a useful thing to do Linking specifi cally from a piece of text using the hyperlink format certainly has its place but some times an item only generally applies to a large group of words Fortunately Scrivener has a tool for this called References Consider if a sub section in your book has several supporting articles that you ve imported into the Research folder You reference these frequently when writing in this section of the book but it s a pain to always
307. mmand will take you back to the original URL using your default web browser thus leaving Scrivener A 5 DOCUMENTS MENU 293 Snapshots gt Provides commands to manage an item s snapshots make new ones and commit large scale snapshot actions on selected items or even the entire project For more information on how to use snapshots see Using Snapshots section 15 6 Note that in some cases these shortcuts will not be available Generally this hap pens when the selection includes items which are not text items or the text of the item s are empty Take Snapshot Cirl 5 Available when viewing any text or folder document this command will take a snapshot of the current text and store it for later use When more than one item is selected all selected items will be snapshot at once Take Snapshot With Title Ctrl Shift 5 As above but will prompt you for a de scriptive title prior to taking the snapshot which will be displayed next to it for future reference in the snapshot table When more than one item is selected the supplied title will be applied to each snapshot taken for all selected items Show Snapshots Will reveal the Snapshots pane in the Inspector revealing it if necessary Duplicate There are two different methods you can use to duplicate the selected item s with Subdocuments Ctrl D This is the default method in most applications The entire item including all of its children if it has any wil
308. n the editor You can restrict this by checking off Import supported file types only in the Import Export options tab section B 8 Unsupported file types will use the default system icon When unsupported file types are viewed in the editor the document icon will be dis played To view the content Click the icon to load the file in the default external editor for that file type Click the Open in External Editor button in the editor footer bar Use the Documents Open Open in External Editor menu command Ctrl F5 14 4 SPLITTING THE EDITOR 129 As with supported files unsupported files are fully imported copied into the project package itself 14 4 Splitting the Editor Scrivener s editor uses a technique known as editor splitting You may have encountered split screen editing in other applications but the level of integration and power between the two splits in Scrivener is likely to be unfamiliar to new users Rather than arbitrarily splitting the interface any number of times and ways the editor uses a two way split system so that you can easily control the flow of information in the opposing split while you work Splitting Documents Looking for tips on how to permanently splitting a document into two pieces Scrivener supports that ability as well so if that is what you are looking for you should head on over to Splitting The Document section 15 3 3 for further details Splitting the edit
309. n working area for all manner of tasks It automatically loads whenever you click an item in the Binder Not only is it where you will be doing most of your writing but it also has the ability to display groups of selected items in various useful fashions which we 22 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE will be getting in to shortly and is a capable multimedia viewer too The editor will take on different appearances and functions depending on what sort of document you are displaying and which group view mode you are in The editor can also be split either vertically or horizontally giving you two independent working areas at once At the top of each editor is a header bar or view This contains navigation buttons the arrows which allow you to navigate backwards and forwards through the document his tory Next to the navigation button pair is the title of the document along with its icon Clicking on the icon will display a pop up menu that collects together some common menu commands The entire header bar has three colour status modes Plain grey is the default and is what you will see unless you have split the editor Blue appears when you have split editors and indicates the active editor A reddish appears when the editor has been locked Ctrl Shift L which inhibits it from receiving binder clicks On the right side are two vertical arrows which allow you to navigate through the binder in a flat list fashion You can also use the keybo
310. n you can consider it to be a feature As with most purely rich text features in Scrivener they can be used liberally to annotate and comment upon your work without fear of them every showing up in the final product Chapter 18 Inspector The Inspector is panel on the right hand side of the project window which displays all meta data snapshots and notes associated with the document shown in the editor that most recently had the keyboard focus or in the case of a corkboard or outliner the last card or row selected which implies the container itself when all cards rows are dese lected Since the special root folders in the binder Draft Research and Trash have no meta data associated with them the Inspector just shows the project notes or references when these items are selected The Inspector is broken down into sections or panes These panes can be toggled by clicking the buttons along the very bottom of the Inspector The first four display the common meta data features of the item while the snapshot and linked notes section has dedicated panes that take up the entire Inspector With the exception of the aforementioned root folders any item in Scrivener has access to all meta data and notation capability You can use Notes to write about a painting you are studying in the editor attach gallery URLs and research papers to it with References or organise it with keywords Snapshots and linked notes however will only be av
311. n define the actual colours used in the section below B 2 APPEARANCE 309 B 2 2 Colors Custom interface colours are chosen using a selection tree sorted by category and then type To alter the default colour for the desired interface element open the tree for its major category and then the item itself from the indented list Click on the colour well in the right column to assign a new colour or click Use Default Color to reset the option to the application default As with the rest of the options window when you click the Apply button the program will adjust to show your settings so it is often beneficial to set up the program so that it exhibits the area you wish to customise then adjust the colours while previewing how it will appear Note Some categories have identical settings from other categories such as both the Editor and Full Screen sections Where duplication exists refer to the original mention The Full Screen background colour options also allows a texture to be applied to it When you see the button Choose Texture you can set this particular element of the interface to use a tiling graphic for its background instead of a colour Many tiling graphics can be found on the Internet for free It is best to choose textures that are relatively small as larger textures can slow down the interface or cause the computer to run out of RAM To clear a texture you no longer want to use just click the Use Default Color butt
312. n prove very useful in some cases It could for example let you use casual titles in the binder and standard generic numbered titles in the final output These are set specifically for each formatting rule established in the structure table This means a folder on level 1 could use Part lt R gt while a folder on level 2 could use Chapter lt n gt and folders of level three and higher would use the hierarchical numbering provided by the lt hn gt tag Meanwhile text items could use something else entirely or nothing at all Once added formatting for the prefix and suffix can be handled independently from the title If you wish to maintain a uniform look between the three components use the mouse to select all of the visible title elements before styling If the entire heading will be output on a single line then only character formatting may differ between the 23 8 FORMATTING 245 three If however components are located on a new line you can add carriage returns to the prefix and suffix box to accomplish this then each can have differing paragraph and ruler settings too Using Distinct Formatting for Numbers A common typesetting technique for chap ter titles is to use a larger numeral If you place the counter tag in the same field as the rest of the boilerplate text you will be unable to size the number differently Instead place the boilerplate text such as Chapter into the prefix and the numeral tag in the suffix N
313. n that sense they work closely with it and display information in the same top down fashion You can drag items from a corkboard into the binder to move those cards or vice versa All file or folder item in the binder can both contain text and children This is a depar ture from how most applications work where the only way to organise items into other items is to use a folder Scrivener doesn t restrict you to that and indeed even allows you to convert a text file to a folder and back again Consequently even though it selects the most appropriate view mode depending upon what you click on you can always over ride the default For folders you can turn off the current view mode and read or add text to it For files you can select a view mode manually and then add items to them as if they were folders When performing the latter you will most likely be presented with an empty corkboard or outliner at first This is fine because you can still go ahead and add items to that view and in doing so you will add children automatically to that file This is a great way of expanding scenes and fleshing out rough ideas so take a moment to play around with the view mode buttons in the toolbar or their corresponding shortcut keys to see how you can get the most out of Scrivener s unique file and folder structure The default view mode will prefer whatever mode you have selected last If you choose outliner then this is the mode that all containers w
314. n the main editor to select and navigate to various components in your project There will be times when this is not true If you prefer to work with the binder hidden are working in full screen mode or just would rather not drill down to a particular spot solely to select an item the Go To menu is an easy substitute for other methods and in some cases can even be faster than traditional navigation The Go To menu always takes action on the activated split if relevant even when it has been locked There are three locations where this menu appears The main application menu View Go To It additionally provides four short cuts for navigating within an editing session Previous Document Alt Shift UpArrow Selects the previous item in the binder no matter what the relative depth Next Document Alt Shift DownArrow Selects the next item in the binder no matter what the relative depth Enclosing Group Alt Shift LeftArrow Selects the parent container which the currently selected item is within in effect traversing up the hierarchy much as if you had clicked on the parent container using your mouse in the binder The current view mode preference will be used if possible If you are editing a section of the Draft using Scrivenings mode then using this command will expand the Scrivenings session to include the parent and its siblings just as if you had clicked on the parent if working on a corkboard the next corkboard
315. nd man aging templates see Templates section 7 7 To create a new project based on an existing template click on that template to make it active or select the Blank template to start with a fresh project that can be constructed to your needs A description of the template if one has been provided will appear in the 48 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT grey text box below the selection area Enter the name of your project in the Save As field This is what you will use to identify your project in the future and it will also be used to name the folder which will contain your entire project saved onto your disk It can be changed later on the disk if you please so if your work in progress doesn t have a name yet don t worry The next step is selecting where you would like to save the project file It is a good idea to choose a place on your disk that you will remember You might want to create a special folder in the Documents folder just for your Scrivener projects for instance You can use the New Folder button to do so after clicking on the Browse button The Create button will activate once you have supplied a name and valid save location Click this button to proceed with the settings you have chosen 7 3 Saving and Making Copies While you work your projects will be automatically saved on a frequent basis By default this means that after two seconds of inactivity the project will always be saved You can mon
316. ndow will pop up asking how much formatting you wish to apply to the selected document s Most of these options work in a negative fashion By example if you select Preserve alignment and the document is left aligned 15 4 FORMATTING TOOLS 149 even if your preferences are for full justification it will not be applied because you have elected to preserve the original alignment The only exception is the Convert font only option which acts as a handy way of preserving all paragraph level formatting without individually checking off their options Please note that because this command impacts broad changes in potentially many dozens or more of documents at once there is no undo The procedure only impacts formatting so it is safe to use but if you are unsure of whether or not the result will favourable either Snapshot section 15 6 the documents first or perform the conversion one by one and proof the results Once you are confident you have the right settings engaged you can proceed at a more rapid pace Some simple tips for preserving common formatting based ranges Preserving Block Quotes Block quotes are usually indicated entirely by some form of increased left and sometimes right as well indent Preserving tabs and indents will protect most block quotes from being reduced to normal text by this tool Preserving List Spacing Some styles call for lists to be single spaced even if the text around them has a gre
317. ne separated by commas 10 1 5 General Meta Data In addition to the primary types of meta data there are a few smaller items located in the General meta data section of the Inspector Modified The date and time the document was last changed and saved Created The date and time the document was first created You ll need to click on the Modified label beside the double arrows to switch to see this data Include in Compile A checkbox determining whether the document should be in cluded in the draft when exported or printed via Compile from the File menu If checked the document is exported or printed if not it is excluded from the export print this can be temporarily overridden in Compile This way you can have documents in the Draft folder that act as notes that are never included in the final draft Note that this setting really only has any meaning for documents that are inside the Draft folder though it can be set anywhere allowing you to modify text documents outside of the Draft in cases where they might at some point end up being compiled or used as templates for files that will be compiled The checkbox never has any meaning for media entries as these items can never be compiled Page Break Before If this checkbox is ticked a page break will be inserted before the document when compiled Useful for instance if the document marks the begin ning of a chapter As with Include in Compile this only has any meaning
318. ner is very comfortable with the notion of splitting things up and with this feature you can feel free to work in small portions without losing sight of the big picture 6 5 More About Corkboards For our next experiment select the View Corkboard menu item to return to the cork board view What you are seeing here is an important concept in how view modes inte grate together The editor was in Scrivenings mode giving you access to each file s text content but is essentially focussed on the After Math folder When you switched to using Corkboard mode nothing changed about what you have selected but rather how you are viewing it What you are looking at is the corkboard for the After Math folder which currently only contains one card Scene A Try clicking the Draft again in the binder Now you are viewing the index cards that belong to the Draft Scene A has disappeared because it is a child item of After Math not the Draft Meanwhile the If that didn t happen you might have an empty line or two still in the folder text area 6 5 MORE ABOUT CORKBOARDS 39 After Math index card looks like a stack of cards Folders will always look this way even if they don t have cards within them Corkboard mode will only show you one layer of depth in your outline at once but you can tell when index cards are folders or files that contain subdocuments by the stacked appearance of their index card
319. nes will only appear along with the specific formats they have been tailored for MultiMarkdown and ePub Mobi Despite the differences the various panes are referred to by the same name in the option pane list Since with the exception of MultiMarkdown meta data is not meant to appear in the content of the manuscript itself none of the plain text formats or any formats that do not support auxiliary properties will show the Meta Data pane 23 14 1 E books Most of the fields in the e book meta data pane are free form text fields They will be in serted into the appropriate book description fields which will be available to e readers to display in whatever manner they provide and used to automatically sort the book within electronic catalogues The Title and Author fields are required and will be supplied with default values taken from the Project Meta Data Settings panel if the text fields are left tempty in this pane 258 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Title Authors Contributors Subject Description Publisher Rights Date YYYY YYYY MM YYYY MM DD Language English Use custom unique identifier Figure 23 11 Compile Meta Data ePub The three fields which you will want to be more careful with are Language Code the custom unique identifier and if you have multiple contributors the Authors and Contributors fields If you do not wish to provide a custom identifier Scriven
320. ng to do it Fortunately it is possible to set up Scrivener to handle most of the latter part for you 7 8 1 Configuring Automated Backups By default Scrivener will automatically back up every project that you work on when ever you close it These backups will be stored in your user folder C Users Your Account AppData Local Scrivener Scrivener Backups This location can be changed in preferences and could even be set to save into a folder that is synchronised over the Internet such as with Dropbox Also by default projects will be zip archived to save space and protect the internal files from external utilities or transmission errors and Scrivener will rotate the files delete old backups to keep the maximum for each project under 5 backups In most cases the more automatic functions you activate here the slower things will get Finding a balance between frequent backups and usable settings will be up to you It is important to note that the backup system as it ships by default is set up with a common method of working in mind whereby you close your project on a regular basis say at the end of every day If you find your own work habits deviate from that you would do well to go over the Backup preference tab and change the settings to better suit your style of working Those who leave their projects open for weeks or even months at a time will most certainly want to change the backup settings to be triggered by manual saves and r
321. nguages read more about setting your preferred language section 5 5 Continued Performance Improvements Further efforts have been made to increase the performance of Scrivener on all recom mended hardware You should see swifter reaction to the formation of large Scrivenings sessions and overall improved project load and save times New in 1 2 Performance Improvements A great deal of effort has been put into making Scrivener faster all round Performance has been completely reviewed and optimised in this release We ll let you be the judge as to whether we have achieved that We will be able to optimise editor performance considerably further once we implement core layout changes later this year MultiMarkdown 3 MultiMarkdown integration support has been added using MMD version 3 6 You can now compile directly to Flat ODT OPML HTML plain MMD and BIEX The latter option has a new compile option pane which makes switching document classes as easy as a single drop down menu MathType and MathML Integration Those who need to work with equations will be pleased to find that Scrivener 1 2 now offers integration with MathType the premier equation editing and typesetting software by Design Science Adding equations is now as simple as using Edit Insert gt MathType Equation Once added to your draft you can easily revise the equation as necessary http www dessci com en products mathtype 12 CHAPTER 3 WHAT S NEW
322. nnotations and Footnotes vai 172 17 3 17 4 17 5 Inline Notation Linked Notation General Usage Tips for No tation Text Colour and Highlights Text Markings and Multi Markdown lt 0 hak a nn eS 105 18 Inspector 105 115 118 121 121 124 125 129 131 131 132 134 141 150 152 155 155 158 159 159 160 161 162 164 166 170 170 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 18 9 18 10 Synopsis Card a an General Meta Data View Document Support Panes Document and Project Notes References 055 Keywords Pane Custom Meta Data Pane Snapshots Pane Linked Notes Pane Locking the Inspector 19 Scriptwriting 19 1 Formatting a Script in Scrivener se saei aa 19 2 Printing or Exporting a Script 19 3 Working with Final Draft 19 4 Creating Your Own Script POMAS e bd e a 19 5 Using Script Formatting for Other Purposes 20 Writing Tools 20 1 Searching and Replacing 20 2 Goals and Statistics Track ing Tools yale dew we vow BH 20 3 The Name Generator 20 4 Looking Up Definitions with WordNet 20 5 Bibliography Management 20 6 Using Equations with MathType 500 55 20 7 Using Equations with MathML in is ede cack ew 21 Using MultiMarkdown 21 1 What isMarkdown 21 2 What is MultiMarkdown 21 3 Getting Started with MMD 21 4 MMD and Scrivener 25 Compilng s siess arses 21
323. now take a look at all the available possibilities in turn 130 CHAPTER 14 THE EDITOR 14 4 1 Horizontal and Vertical Splits The editor interface can be split in one of two orientations In vertical mode the divider will be drawn down the middle of the screen and is most suitable to viewing two text documents side by side as it maximises vertical space Horizontal mode creates a split with content on the top and bottom In either case both sides of the split have the same degree of power in loading various views media types and text editing You can easily switch between orientations by choosing the opposite split type in the View Layout gt sub menu or by clicking the opposing button in the Header Bar section 14 1 When the editor has been split a header bar and footer bar will be created for each split This means that each side has its own history queue view modes zoom settings outliner columns and so on Everything that you can do to a single editor window can be done to a split window and those changes will be remembered for that side of the split An example of this would be view modes With a single editor interface if you choose to view containers using the Corkboard model every time you click on a container or select more than one item a Corkboard will be presented to you However when splits are engaged each side has its own view settings This means the left side in a vertical orientation can be set to Outliner and t
324. ns will do a better job of editing PDFs movies and images Consequently a convenience button will be provided on the far right side of the footer bar for most media views You may also right click on any media file in the binder and opt to Open in External Editor which will open the file using your system default for that type of file making it simple to load the document in an external editor of your choice Changes made to the file will be saved within the Scrivener project when you return 14 3 1 Viewing Images The image view is displayed whenever an image document is selected allowing you to zoom in and out and rotate it If the image is larger than the viewable area click and hold the mouse on the image and move the mouse to drag scroll the image around To zoom in and out and rotate double click anywhere within the image or the grey area around it This will bring up the image tools pop up The slider at the top of the pop up allows you to scale the image The buttons to the left and right of the slider will zoom in and out by increments If you are already viewing that file in the editor you may need to refresh its view in order to see the changes 126 CHAPTER 14 THE EDITOR Jump to beginning Zoom settings Open in external reader Previous page 4 a h 120 5 296 Fit Height PDF Document ri mel L L NEXE page Jump to exact page Show Hide Table of Contents if applicable Jump co end Figure 14 1 Editor Foo
325. nt Provides a menu of all documents in the binder Se lecting a document from this menu will cause the selected text in the editor to be appended to the document selected from the menu Read Gathering Material chapter 11 for more tips on moving text around and organising information in the Binder Set Selected Text as Title F2 Sets the title of the current document to the text selected in the editor Add Selection to Auto Complete List Adds the selected text to the project s auto complete list which can be maintained with the Project Auto Complete List menu command Read more about this feature in Auto Completion section 15 7 Scrivener Link Allows you to create a link to another document in the project within the text Read more about linking items together in Linking Documents Together section 9 4 Text Color Provides the text colour menu from which you can select from the built in colours or those custom colours you have saved into your colour palette Highlight Color Provides the highlight menu allowing you to select a highlight colour for the selected text or to clear it Read more about this and the above feature in Text Colour and Highlights section 17 4 Spelling Quick access to spell check tools Apply Formatting Preset Apply one of your saved formatting presets subsec tion 15 4 3 to the selected text 136 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING Font Provides basic character attributes such as bold and it
326. nt image on the disk A Note on Links and Multiple Computers Those familiar with the use of linked resources will already know that using links means that the position of those external resources must remain stable in order for the host program Scrivener in this case to maintain a connection with them If the files are moved or renamed the link breaks and you will need to manually update them This means that in most cases links will only work on one machine since the full path name of a file tends to vary given that it includes the name of the computer s hard drive It is possible to carefully work around that particularly with the use of external hard drives that are all mapped to the same drive assignment on the computer or keeping all satellite computers identical in regards to user names and hard drive names This problem becomes impossible to work around when working cross platform as the path addressing scheme used to name a file differs between Mac and Windows computers This does not mean that using linked images prohibits cross platform us age or vice versa but what it does mean is that only one machine can be your home computer in terms of final document assembly A project can lose track of the linked images while you are working on other machines but since these links are stored as text paths to the files when you return to the home computer they will all link up again 15 6 Using Snapshots In essence the theor
327. ntegration with your favourite bibliography or citation manager such as EndNote for academic work To set it up visit the General options tab subsec tion B 1 3 Click on Choose to choose your citation manager Once the citation manager has been set up you can hit Ctrl G Ctrl O or For mat gt Bibliography Citations while working in the editor to bring your chosen software to the front launching it automatically if necessary The steps you take next will depend upon your citation manager so you will need to consult their documen tation on how to use their software with third party word processors Typically you would copy and paste a citation placeholder into Scrivener in the location where the ref erence mark should appear After compiling to RTF you would then use your manager to scan these placeholders into final print form Not every program or service provides RTF scanning however You should research the software you intend to use and make certain it designed to work with programs other than Microsoft Word 20 6 Using Equations with MathType If part of your writing involves the addition or construction of equations in your draft then you can use Scrivener s Design Science MathType integration to insert equation objects into the draft much like you would an ordinary figure To create a new equation position your cursor where you wish to have it appear and use Edit Insert gt MathType Equation If you hav
328. ntrolling the ruler along with commands for highlighting and set ting the current text colour Additional Scrivener specific tools for formatting the text can be found here as well including various forms of notation A 6 FORMAT MENU 297 Font gt Displays commands for adjusting spans of text formatting useful tools for con trolling the character level appearance of your text Fonts family variant and size need to be set with the The Format Bar subsection 15 4 2 a ea E Show Fonts F4 access the system wide standard font palette which will change the font you type in from that point forward or alter the existing font of a selected range of text Bold Italic Underline Strikethrough all of these operate in the same fashion by either modifying the future behaviour of typing if there is no selection or toggling the selected text between the various styles Note that not all fonts support these styles If it appears that one of these is not working check your font for proper variant support Small Caps this command will work with any font and will fake small caps fonts by adjusting the relative sizes of the letters This method is most com patible with e book publishing but produces lower quality results for print than dedicated small caps fonts or font family variants will Outlined Ctrl changes the style of the font to outlined instead of filled Bigger Ctrl gt increases the size of the font
329. nts Replacements are a way for you to set up your own substitutions which work in a man ner very similar to Search and Replace though without changing the underlying docu ments in Scrivener A table with four columns has been provided 23 11 REPLACEMENTS 249 Define words and phrases that should be replaced in the text during compile Project Replacements Preset Replacements Project Replacements are saved as part of the project and won t change when you switch between compile formats Replace With Case Sensitive Whole Word e AdT Arc de Triomphe v hero Amy Holmes Icite Needs Citation Sam Samantha E Figure 23 8 Replacements compile options pane z Replace the text which you wish to instruct the compiler to look for z With whatever has been supplied in the Replace column will be replaced with what you type into this column z Case Sensitive when checked the letter case in the Replace column must precisely match otherwise it will be ignored by the compiler Whole Word restricts the match to only those incidences where it has a clear space around the phrase Sam will not match Sammy when this option is active Some example usages would be to replace an abbreviated version with a full proper name to ease typing it in frequently easier usage of placeholder tags or inserting common editing notes Two tabs are presented to you Project Replacements and Preset Replac
330. ny questions it s one of the best places to go on the net Part IV Final Phases 220 21 7 FURTHER INFORMATION 221 Nothing stinks like a pile of unpublished writing Sylvia Plath Distilling your work into a final product is an essential task for any writing application Scrivener approaches this problem from multiple fronts giving you plenty of options for producing a manuscript web pages printouts e books and quite a bit more Most of these methods are functions of the compiler a powerful export feature which will take the contents of your draft folder and produce a single document from the many pieces it is comprised of Due to the level of control that can be exercised at this stage learning how to export can be itself a part of the learning process but one that will in time benefit your ability to write freely in whatever manner you choose Most word processors are designed for business use and approach document creation with the philosophy of showing you a good approximation of the final product as you work This integrated way of working means that you are at once presented with the tools for writing with the same level of priority as the tools for formatting and layout This not only creates a more confusing and distracting interface but can lead to writing in a constricted environment where you must work in a format which you are required to deliver Scrivener s approach as with many things allows flexib
331. o delete a template that is no longer being used to create new items However you might wish to move the template item to another location in the Binder outside of the template folder in case you ever need it again 8 6 Custom Icons New in 1 7 Custom icons can be used to embellish the appearance of your binder items All items can have a custom icon even the three root folders Draft Research and Trash Scrivener comes with many icons right out of the box There are a few ways you can change the icon for an item Click on the item in the Binder Corkboard or Outliner and use the Docu ments Change Icon sub menu z Access the item s contextual menu and use the Custom Icon sub menu Use the quick icon selection menu by holding down the Alt key when right clicking z Icons can be set to many items at once by selecting them all in the binder and right clicking on them to choose Change Icon or by using the Documents menu You can also set the icon of the document you are currently editing in the text editor using the main Documents menu When using Scrivenings mode this will only impact the document that your cursor is within To reset an icon to its binder default remove a custom icon from an item select Documents Change Icon Reset Icon to Default at the top of the menu Setting an icon over and over If you find yourself using a particular icon frequently you might wish to make a document t
332. o fill in the synopsis otherwise the first few lines will be used When using image synopsis mode subsection 12 1 2 this button will be replaced with an X which when clicked will erase your graphic selection The Synopsis section can be collapsed to make space for the other elements of the inspector See also So What are Index Cards Anyway subsection 12 1 1 18 2 General Meta Data View This collapsible section appears in the middle portion of the Notes References and Key words panes of the Inspector It displays the basic document meta data and provides controls for editing it Read Meta Data Types section 10 1 for further detail 18 3 Document Support Panes The six views of the inspector present further access to notes reference links keywords custom meta data text snapshots and linked comments and footnotes respectively The first four share space with the synopsis and general meta data panels the last two take up the entire inspector interface The six panes can be accessed at any time by clicking on the icons in the bottom of the inspector 18 4 Document and Project Notes Document notes provide a rich text writing area that is outside of the main text area You can use notes to store information about the current document for reference whilst writing without cluttering up the binder with note files or the main text with comments and annotations Clicking the header title of the notes area will bring up a pop up
333. o other text selections as you work Read more about it in Formatting Presets Styles subsection 15 4 3 Upgrade Note A new button for presets has been added to the Format Bar In exist ing installations of Scrivener your existing toolbar settings will be respected so this button will not be present You can add it yourself with the Tools Customize Tool bars menu command Document Templates Before if you made a character sheet reference page and so on you had to make sure to remember to duplicate the original and then move the copy to the right spot Now you can set up a document template folder which will automatically place its contained docu ments in an easy to use menu from which they can be inserted into your draft wherever you want them Document templates will be clearly marked with a special icon in the binder For more information read Document Templates section 8 5 8 Custom Meta Data When labels status and keywords are not enough you can now create your own meta data fields which can be added to the Outliner as columns or used in the Inspector sidebar for individual items Read more about Custom Meta Data subsection 10 1 6 Custom Binder Icons Create or import your own custom icons and assign them to documents and folders in your projects A large selection of icons have been provided for you to use To get started read about Custom Icons section 8 6 Binder Favourites Set documents or folders a
334. o the left or right of the column in which you right clicked Delete Row Column Will delete the entire row or column in which the cell you right clicked upon is located Sort Rows Ascending Descending Sorts all rows in the table based on the alphanu meric value of the text in the row that the selection is currently in Merge Cells Requires more than one cell to be selected Selected cells will be merged together into a single table cell Split Cell Split the currently selected cell into two cells at the cursor position Delete Table Strips the table code out from the currently active table leaving all text behind as linearised 138 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING 15 3 3 Managing Documents with Split and Merge The ability to expand and contract the outline in a fashion which best suits how your work is important so there are two tools which make it easy to fashion your outline into as broad or detailed a map as you require Before discussing the specific tools which let you cut apart documents or sew them back together it would be useful to also discuss a few methods that you can use to mitigate the regular need for them When you wish to merge two or more documents together it is good to ask whether or not this action is necessary With most applications and thus the habits we have cultivated from using them the answer to whether or not one should merge is yes However Scrivener offers two powerful answers for the merging pro
335. o the same original item in the binder When setting up a new project you might like to create a few starting Collections to help organise material as it flows into the project or as you generate new outline ideas If you find yourself creating a sequence of common Collections at the start of every project you might want to design a custom template subsection 7 7 2 for yourself Here are some example uses for Collections ea Experiment with an alternate scene flow without disrupting the original layout Collect all scenes which still need to be edited Designate items which you wish to share with another author using one of the various syncing methods Search for any occurrence of words you tend to overuse Saving a search that looks for any word amongst the listed words clicking on this tab would highlight all of the problem words listing only those sections of the binder that contain them Create a special compile group with an alternate selection and order than a typical compile of the draft z Store saved searches for future use or to monitor workflows z Set aside groups of documents in a day by day schedule removing them from each daily collection as you address them 8 4 1 The Collection Interface To reveal the Collection interface click the Collections icon in the toolbar or select View gt Collections Collections Each tab represents a single collection In the screenshot Figure 8 2 the
336. oC to look like speaking from a standpoint of content 2 No matter which view you are working from once all of the appropriate items are selected together use the Edit Copy Special Copy Documents as ToC menu command 3 Create if necessary an empty file in the Draft folder and paste the ToC list into this document You may now format the result as you wish 223 224 CHAPTER 22 CREATING A TABLE OF CONTENTS Pro Tip If you need to create a mini ToC in the preface for each part of a book as is common with technical guides you can follow these instructions to produce a smaller scale list of sections You will just want to select the relevant section instead of the entire Draft and paste the ToC copy into the preface area for each part The resulting list will be formatted with the name of the section on the left and a special tag on the right with an amount of indenting applied to each line in accordance with its relative outline depth The tag lt p gt will be replaced with a page number reference during compile The title will also be examined and updated to match the visible name of the section as it will be compiled For example if the Formatting pane will replace the binder title with the word Chapter followed by a sequential number then the Table of Contents link text will be changed to match it You also can create your own table of contents by hand There is nothing special about the Copy Documents as To
337. oard and Scrivenings text view Compiling the document into an RTF file If you need to learn more than the above we strongly suggest going through the full tutorial which can be found in the Help menu 6 1 Project Format Scrivener is a project based application which means that it stores your projects as sep arate files rather than working like a database which hides the location from you and loads everything automatically when you start up the program or a file based program like Word which creates an empty document whenever you launch it The intended use of a project is to store everything relating to a single major work be it your next novel or 31 32 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR screenplay a dissertation for your masters or a serial collection of articles for a magazine or blog It is recommended that for each new real world project you embark on a new project file should be created When you create a new project Scrivener asks where you want to save the file By default this location is your personal Documents folder but you can choose to organise your projects on the computer however you like It is a good idea to choose a place you will remember Even though Scrivener provides convenience functions for finding the projects you ve worked on most recently and will even reopen your last session for you if you choose these tools should not be relied upon as your sole reference point for where projects exist Okay
338. occur from attempting to edit the internal files by hand What is important to understand is that the top level folder and everything created beneath it is an integral part of your project This top level folder will use the name of the project you chose with scriv on the end of it If you intend to copy this project from one computer to another or synchronise it with a cloud service be sure to copy the 46 7 1 PROJECT SIZE LIMITATIONS 47 whole folder and not just parts within it the project file directly beneath this folder for example only contains the backbone of the project not the data 7 1 Project Size Limitations Since Scrivener was primarily written with the long form author in mind much effort has been put into making the project format as robust as possible It can handle book length manuscripts with ease store large quantities of research material and handle many thousands of individual components even on a single corkboard Scrivener has been tested against projects with millions of words in them way beyond what it would nor mally have to face So for ordinary usage you will never need to worry about limitations There is one caveat to keep in mind however The bigger your project is on the disk the longer it will take to produce backups When combined with the automated backup system this could mean waiting long periods of time for backups to complete in the most extreme cases While Scrivener is ver
339. oes With the above options configured correctly Scrivener will recognise that this link points to a title and that it should be updated to reflect the final version It will be compiled as the following result To read more about this topic see Chapter 7 How to Grow Better Toma toes The Table of Contents generator uses this trick to keep its list of documents up to date with the final manuscript version of titles Pro Tip If you link the special placeholder tag lt p gt to a particular document in the Draft the compiler will insert a special RTF code which lets compatible word processors cross reference the actual page number of that item This technique is also used in the Table of Contents generator but could also be used for formatting nicer cross references for your readers Linking to Images with MultiMarkdown There is one other case where a Scrivener Link will be used intelligently by the compiler and that is with the MulttMarkdown format When a link points to an image file that file will be included in the output folder when you compile and the name of the file will substitute the hyperlink text In this way you can use the MultiMarkdown syntax for images An example might look like Caption text for the figure lt span class annotation style color 4455E0 gt PSEU Which would compile as Caption text for the figure name_of_graphic jpg Since the image file name_of_graphic jpg is exported along
340. oject Since in most cases they do not export from your project it is safe to use them in the text of your work wherever you need them They can also be used within Document and Project Notes Their ability to elevate the visibility of information in your project can turn them into a valuable navigation tool much like having a personal wiki inside your project or optionally in providing navigability beyond the project itself such as cross referencing that will be useful to the reader The creation of links can even be a good brainstorming tool as you can build your outline with links while typing Links appear much like URL links do on the Web They will sport a blue appearance and be underscored The link colour can be customised in the Appearance option tab under Customizable Colors in the Editor section The underscore cannot be removed so even links set to be the same colour as the base text can be identifiable To use links simply click on them with the mouse pointer as you would in a web browser Scrivener Links but not ordinary hyperlinks to the Web will open a split editor if necessary and load the linked item in the split This will use the ordinary view mode preference and so is identical to clicking on that item in the binder If you link to a folder it will open in Corkboard view for example Right click on a Scrivener Link to access the Open Document Link In sub menu for additional ways to open a link 9
341. ompiled text lt hn gt Gets replaced during the Compile process with hierarchical numbering based on the level of the document in which the tag occurs relative to the Draft folder or compile group depending on the current compile settings So occurrences of the lt hn gt tag in the second document in the Draft folder may get replaced with the number 2 occurrences of the tag in the third subdocument of the eight document in the Draft folder may be replaced with 8 3 Restarting auto numbering streams lt rst gt Place lt rst gt immediately before any of the auto numbering tags to restart the numbering So for instance lt w gt lt w gt lt w gt lt rst gt lt w gt lt w gt would become one two three one two in the compiled text 327 Table D 3 Project Info Placeholder Tags Code Description Project Title lt projecttitle gt Gets replaced with the project name during the Compile process The project folder name will be used if nothing else is provided in the project meta data If the tag appears in uppercase the project name will be up percased too lt abbr_title gt Gets replaced with the abbreviated project name during the Compile pro cess Defaults to the project folder name If the tag appears in uppercase the abbreviated project name will be uppercased too Author Info lt fullname gt Gets replaced with the user s full name during the Compile process De faults to
342. on Both the Editor and Full Screen sections have a special function which can be accessed by clicking on the category instead of the individual interface item A button called Copy from Editor Full Screen will appear This button copies all matching items from one mode to the other For a full list of all options refer to the Appearance Colour Settings Table B 1 table B 2 3 Fonts Options for setting application fonts If you wish to adjust the editor fonts visit the Formatting tab subsection B 5 1 This interface acts in a similar fashion to the colour selection interface already described Instead of a colour well each element will have its own font selector instead A preview of the font will be displayed in a box and below that the Select Font button opens up a font picker Click the Use Default Font to reset the font for this element to the application default General Settings Menus amp Windows the interface font used to display the applica tion Document Notes amp Project Notes default font for the document and project notes in the inspector pane This is only a default it will not change the font of text already entered into the note fields so it is safe to use this if you have styled text in your notes 310 Category General Editor Full Screen APPENDIX B OPTIONS Table B 1 Appearance Colour Settings Interface Element Binder Background Outliner Background Outliner Alt
343. on 14 3 for details on how various read only media are displayed in the editor ea Header Bar section 14 1 for more information on the informative strip along the top of the editor z Footer Bar section 14 2 on how to use the strip along the bottom of the editor which will change according to what type of document you are viewing 5 1 5 The Inspector The Inspector is not always visible by default in new projects but will always be on the right side of the project window when it is visible Its purpose is to display all meta data associated with the document shown in the editor pane that most was recently viewed in either editor Note that the special top level folders in the binder Draft Research and Trash have no meta data associated with them and therefore the inspector just shows the project notes or references when these items are selected More on that later for now if the inspector appears suspiciously empty know you have an item selected that does not support meta data The inspector has six different sub panels which can all be accessed via buttons along the very bottom of the Inspector If an associated panel has had data entered into it an asterisk will appear in the upper right corner of the button The sub panes are listed in the order they appear 1 Synopsis General and Notes 2 Synopsis General and References 3 Synopsis General and Keywords 4 Synopsis General and Custom Meta data 5 Snapshots
344. on first and then use the Project Text Statistics tool 20 2 1 Project Targets The project targets panel allows you to set goals for your writing either for the Draft as a whole or for the number of words you want to write during the current session and to check on your progress To bring it up select Project Show Project Targets or press Ctrl to toggle its display The targets panel displays two progress bars one showing the progress of the draft and the other showing the progress of the current session being defined as the period between the project being opened and closed again Using this panel you can set a target word count for the draft that is the contents of the Draft folder and for the current session and keep track of how far you have to go before you reach your goals To change the targets just click in the appropriate text field and enter a new target word count or target character count you can set whether the target should be in words or characters by clicking on words so that a pop up menu appears providing a choice between words and characters 20 2 GOALS AND STATISTICS TRACKING TOOLS 201 This panel will float over your project if you leave it open and update itself in real time as you write and edit If you want to track a goal for an individual document rather than the entire project use the Text Goals subsection 14 2 3 tool in the footer bar 20 2 2 Project Statistics Proj
345. on is not available to any formats which produce a plain text document Remove Highlighting Text highlights will be stripped from the compiled document in all cases save for when highlights are used to indicate other features Notably when compiling to RTFD Scrivener will use highlighting to indicate linked notation ranges This setting will not impact this behaviour Remove text color Likewise as above this option will strip all custom colouring from the compiled document and force all text to black without exception Remove all hyperlinks Available to all word processor formats as well as PDF and Print this will strip out all hyperlinks from the produced document With some styles this may be preferable where the URL is printed literally in the text as a citation 23 10 3 RIF Compatibility Microsoft Word highlighting with exact background colors MS Word s highlighting system only offers a set number of colours rather than Scrivener s custom high lighter tool This option will preserve your highlight colour choices into Word though at the expense of having them converted to paragraph shading rather than text highlights You will need to use the appropriate shading tools to alter them if you use this option Ensure hyperlinks are colored and underlines Most word processors will do this for you but Microsoft Word will not resulting in links that cannot be seen Check this box to make hyperlinks visible in Word 23 11 Replaceme
346. onal steps to be completely typeset glossaries and bibliographies foremost it will not produce the desired result if any If the document has no extra requirements and typesets cleanly otherwise you will find it to be a most convenient way of distributing and archiving great looking printable documents When troubleshooting or performing initial typesetting it will often be ben eficial to enable the Show PDF Log option in the Compatibility option pane This will produce the full tex log file and so reveal any warnings that might otherwise be ignored Since this method combines a full compile with full MMD post processing and three pdflatex executions large documents may take a while to fully complete Where is it If you do not have a IATEX distribution with pdflatex installed on your computer in an executable path then this option will not appear in the compile format drop down 21 6 MMD Meta Data MultiMarkdown supports a free form meta data system with some meta data keys being used intelligently by the system You should read the MMD documentation about these fields Beyond that you are free to add your own without detrimental effect To set up 21 7 FURTHER INFORMATION 219 project level meta data which will be attached to every compile you produce use the Meta data pane in the compiler Additionally you can add a document to the draft titled Meta Data If this document is the very first document that Scrivene
347. ontained items and descendants to the very top of the compile contents list without altering the actual order of these items in the Binder This will happen no matter where the source folder is located though to avoid confusion you should never place the Front Matter folder inside the Draft folder itself 23 6 Separators Separators are used to automatically insert space breaks or custom symbols between the various elements in the list which will be compiled The important aspect to realise is that by the time the compiler gets to this point your outline is being considered as a flat list of files It doesn t matter if a text file is four layers deep if the next item in the list is a folder it will still use the Text and Folder Separator rule 236 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Separators will not clean up any manually typed in separation that may exist between items in the editor text itself For example if you have items with a lot of empty lines in between them the separators control will only establish if any additional separation should be added There are four primary types of possible combinations each with its own individual rule You can supply the same rule for all of them if you do not need any special differ ences between types The types are ea Text separator inserted between any two adjacent text documents z Folder separator inserted between any two folders z Folder and text separator inserted at th
348. ontent into that outline and then compile your work as a single draft document As you ve seen from the amount of flexibility we ve demonstrated you can rest easy on the topic of doing things the right way from the start Unlike many programs Scrivener makes it easy to change your mind later on Folders can become files items can be easily re arranged merged or split apart and so on so don t worry too much about adhering to any proper ways of working Scrivener has no standard except for your standard which will develop in time as you become more familiar with the software Importing Existing Work Chances are you ve already got some words down in another program somewhere Scrivener supports many different text formats and even a few data formats as well like outliner formats section 11 1 Importing material is often as simple as dragging and dropping the file into the project binder After doing so you may wish to split it up into more manageable pieces section 15 3 3 A good rule of thumb is that RTF is the best It is Scrivener s native file format so if you can export your existing work to the RTF format before dropping it into the Binder that will generally be the best solution If you have a spare hour or two it would be really beneficial to go through the full in teractive tutorial or watch the introductory videos available on the Scrivener homepage Together they cover Scrivener s features in much more det
349. onverting it into a binder outline This can be useful if you do your initial brainstorming in a dedicated outliner or mindmapping application Some of these applications support attached notes to each outliner header These can be imported into the main text area or the meta data field of your choice Refer to the aforementioned Import Export tab for documentation on how the options in this dialogue box work 11 1 4 Scrivener Project Allows you to import another Scrivener project into the binder of the current project The files of the other project will be imported into a folder entitled Imported Project original project name at the bottom of the binder with the full binder structure intact Keywords project references and any project notes are imported as text document s Project notes will be imported as files into a Project Notes folder placed at the top of the main import folder This command can also be used to import and therefore restore corrupted projects If you have a project that has somehow become corrupted so that it can no longer be opened in Scrivener use File Import Scrivener Project to have Scrivener do its best to retrieve all the data All the text synopses and notes will be retrieved along with snapshots The outline structure may not be recovered from badly corrupted projects but every attempt to import the raw data will be made 11 1 5 Import and Split Supported text file plain or rich text is
350. opied a range of formatted text but want to paste it using the style of the text into which you are placing it Select All Cirl A Selects all of the content of the current text lists like the binder and the keywords lists outliner view table view or corkboard Complete Alt Manually calls up the word completion service regardless of word auto completion settings Can optionally be set to provide suggestions automat ically as you type in the Auto Correction option tab section B 6 Complete Document Title Ctrl C Ctrl M If you start typing in a document title from the same Scrivener project you can use this to cause Scrivener to search your project for matching titles based on what you have typed thus far and suggest alternatives Add Selection to Auto Complete List Ctrl G Ctrl A Adds the currently selected word to the project s auto complete list If more than one word is selected nothing will be added to the auto complete list Insert The Insert sub menu provides a wide variety of elements that you can insert into text fields These will be placed at the current cursor position Note that some of these insert invisible characters which control the flow of your document you may not see anything happen unless you have View Show Invisibles enabled Image From File Ctrl G Ctrl J Allows you to select an image file from disk to insert into the current text document See Inline Images section 15 5 for fu
351. ople use it to keep track of the things they need yet to do others keep highly visible notes about what they ve written so far and some don t even fill them in at all just leaving them blank or using Scrivener s 12 1 THE CORKBOARD 107 automatic generation tools to form a synopsis from the first few lines of text Whatever you end up using them for it is important to realise that they are separate from the actual text of the document and in most cases what you type into them will not appear in the final book Use this to your advantage To edit either the title or the synopsis on a card double click in the text field you wish to edit Once editing you can use Tab and Shift Tab to navigate between cards and their two editable fields much like you would in a spreadsheet To terminate editing press the Enter key at any time 12 1 2 Index Cards as Images Instead of text you can choose to display a graphic for the synopsis instead This choice will be reflected in the inspector as well as on the corkboard To set an item s synopsis to image mode click the index card icon in the header area of the synopsis card in the inspector A blank placeholder will be shown until you drag and drop an image into this spot Something to consider is that even if a card has been set to image mode any text that was typed into it before will be preserved You may not be able to see it directly but it will be retained for tooltips and when compiling
352. or fodt files though OpenOffice proper can be updated to handle it as well in fact LibreOffice just has this update preconfigured Once the file has been loaded in LibreOffice it can be 218 CHAPTER 21 USING MULTIMARKDOWN saved out to many other word processor formats a task you will almost always need to do if working with others When exporting to fodt you should use the UTF 8 text encoding 21 5 6 OPML Outline Processor Markup Language The Outliner Processor Markup Language is a common standard format for transferring outline hierarchy between programs The base format itself only supplies a specification for transferring headers but many programs also conform to a non standard convention of using a notes field to transfer content as well MMD supports the latter ability making it possible to transfer simple outlines with named headings and text content between supporting software 21 5 7 PDF via LaTex The PDF output choice utilises the ATEX typesetting engine and simply offers a stream lined way of going from Scrivener to a printable PDF in a single step It is fundamentally identical to compiling as a tex document and then opening that document in a TeX edi tor and typesetting it with no alterations three times to get all cross references properly registered Consequently if the meta data calls for snippet mode instead of full doc ument mode are fatal errors in the typesetting process or if it requires additi
353. or is a purely visual tool If you are unfamiliar with splitting an editor in general you can think of it as a way of opening a second editor in which you can view the same item you are already working on with an independent scroll position or another item entirely When the same item is loaded into both splits which is what happens when you create a new split any edits made to either side will be immediately shown in the other split in a text editor your typing will be mirrored with a corkboard cards you add or delete will show up on the other side too Using two splits makes it easy to edit or refer to other parts of the document or your research amp notes without scrolling back and forth or frequently use the history buttons Loading another item entirely into the second split makes reference a snap While you could use the history functions to jump back and forth between a reference source and the portion of your manuscript that you are editing splits will present both items to you at once even allowing you to play media in the second split while recording notes or transcribing it as it plays In addition to standard file viewing and editing you can also use splits to do anything else that you would ordinarily do in a single editor You can mix Corkboard Outliner and Scrivening sessions together and even link the splits so that clicking on cards or outliner rows automatically loads the item in the second split for you We ll
354. ort not only have many new shortcuts been added we ve also increased the number of menu choices available in the custom 10 CHAPTER 3 WHAT S NEW keyboard tab section B 7 z Project templates and built in compile presets have been revised to take advantage of the new features Scrivener can now import OpenOffice ODT files and the import export options for PDF ODT DOC and DOCX have been revised with improved converters a Webpage import has been overhauled to use the open standard MHT format bet ter preserving the complete webpage in a single file MHT pages can be opened externally or converted on import to PDF for viewing in Scrivener Webpages can still be imported as plain text files ea Project meta data has been added allowing you to use easy placeholder tags Ap pendix D for information such as your name or the title of the work throughout the project and in the compile settings As usual there are too many updates to list them all here For a complete change log please visit the main website New in 1 9 Data Import amp Export New import amp export features have been added to allow for better integration with spreadsheets mindmapping and outliners using common standards for doing so For spreadsheets you can now export any Outliner view to a delineated you can choose between comma tab or semi colon separators This could be a full output of every possible column or just the columns you have vis
355. osition within the designated templates folder Anything that you add to the templates folder will be available for usage in the project It is possible to pre configure all aspects of an item The only thing that will not be carried over is Snapshots The latest version of the item s text will always be used and any Snapshots will be ignored 8 5 4 Using Document Templates Once a container is designated as a Template Folder and items have been added to it you can generate copies of these templates elsewhere in the project via the Project New From Template sub menu or by using the green button in the toolbar The items in this menu will be arranged precisely as they have been organised in the binder with groups becoming further sub menus As with the other commands that create new items they will be created in relation with the current binder selection If you select an entire group from the menu it and all of its child items will be 74 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER created in the selected position The first template item in the template folder is a special spot as it will be given a keyboard shortcut Ctrl T Ctrl N Using this shortcut you can easily create this special item on the fly so if applicable choose the top position for a template you will be using most frequently As with project templates once created document templates have no connection with the item that they were modelled after It is safe t
356. ou can manually copy and paste or type in the internal title and valid URL or file path of the resource you wish to link to This is most useful for creating links to the Internet as you can just paste in the URL you have available but local file URIs are also valid Any existing reference can be edited by double clicking on the text labels To finish editing press Return or click anywhere else in the table with your mouse You can use this to update broken links with the correct file path or URL or change their internal names For internal links to other Scrivener items in your project you cannot edit the target only the name To replace it with a new target you ll need to create a new refer ence and then remove the old one Clicking the header bar of the references area will bring up a pop up menu from which you can select Document References or Project References As with notes document references are attached to the current document whereas project notes are global and remain the same no matter which document you are viewing To delete a reference select it and click the button 18 6 Keywords Pane Keywords can be used to hold arbitrary information A few examples might be character names locations interviewees or workflow hints such as Needs Illustrations You could assign the name of a theme to a document as a keyword and then later you could perform a keyword search to find all documents that deal with that
357. ou want to add your own At this point the project no longer using the preset it has now forked into its own unique set of settings and therefore the Preset Replacements tab is disconnected from the original preset 2 You remove one of the built in replacements you never use and add a new preset replacement you d like to use in future projects 3 To make these changes available in the future or to other projects you are currently working on use the Save Preset button below the list of option panes subsec tion 23 4 1 Let s say you call this Research Article Now your project is once again synced with a format preset on the disk and that preset will be available to other projects At this point you could make a new project and select that preset acquiring all of the preset replacements available from it If you ever wished to update it however you would not only need to add the items to the Preset Replacements tab but update the preset on the disk as well Any project using that preset will benefit from the new presets but those that once used it and no longer are because you ve customised the settings in one way or another will need to be refreshed from the newly updated preset or updated manually by copying and pasting Replacements between the compile panes of two open projects Replacements are evaluated in the order they are defined This means you can use use earlier replacements in your subsequent repl
358. ould be presented to you in a single window with one scrollbar Moving text around within that spool means cutting and pasting it from one spot to the next In Scrivener you can take that long spool of text and chop it up These chopping points are entirely up to you what you find useful as a writing tool The compile feature offers a way to tape the whole thing back together into a single file which is what you ll need to work with the rest of the world Meanwhile the Scrivenings editing mode does the same thing but in a temporary fashion and as such is an authorial tool which makes working in smaller pieces easier since you can at any time view and edit a larger segment of your draft as though it were a single file These features will be discussed in depth in due course but for now it is good know that there are no penalties for slicing and dicing up your manuscript into an easy to visualise outline The Research Folder The Research folder is the default location for non text documents such as images PDF files and so on although it can hold text files too You can create as many subfolders as you wish to organise your research or you can rename it and create other folders in the root level to hold different types of research You aren t limited to using this one location to store material Anywhere outside of the Draft folder a valid place to organise old drafts notes and inspirational materials The Trash Folder Whenever you
359. our text at a familiar size Zoom size will not impact your print or compile settings only the visual display of fonts as you write B 6 Corrections The Auto Correction tab contains optional typing aids such as typographic enhance ments em dashes smart quotes etc word completion and control of the spelling en B 6 CORRECTIONS 317 gine B 6 1 Spelling Check spelling as you type Displays red underlining for words that are not found in the built in dictionary as you type This setting immediately impacts projects Correct spelling errors as you type Will correct common spelling errors and typos au tomatically For example teh will be corrected to the Dictionary Click the Select button to choose your preferred dictionary You can only load one dictionary at a time for spell checking If you cannot find your language in the supplied list click the Download button Additional dictionaries are available and can be downloaded and installed into Scrivener with a single click View Personal Word List As you add new words to the built in dictionary you can review your additions by clicking this button A window will appear with a list of all the words you have added Add new words with the button and remove mistakes with the button B 6 2 Auto Capitalization Fix capitalization of sentences Will fix letter case issues if a lowercase letter follows a period and a space Capitalize i Will automatically capitali
360. ournal you ll use this interface to select a starting template or a blank starter You can hide the Getting Started interface in the Options drop down menu in the bottom of this window The remainder of this section briefly summarises the main components of a typical project window Each area will be discussed in greater detail later on and if you are interested in a particular feature you ll find cross references to more exhaustive articles on these topics You may want to click on the Blank category in the left list and then use the Blank starter to create a temporary test project to play around with while reading this chapter Skip forward to the Quick Tour chapter 6 if you need instructions for doing so but come back after you make a project as it assumes a basic understanding of what we will cover in this chapter The main project interface comprises five main elements not all of which are visible when a new project is created 1 Toolbar Frequently used tools displayed in a standard fashion which can be cus tomised as you see fit 2 Binder A hierarchal list of all items in your project including the manuscript a general collection area for research materials notes and so forth a trash can for 18 5 1 INTERFACE OVERVIEW 19 File Edit View Project Documents Format Tools Help fe A Ea e osme mee Pe nemm Binder Courier New v Regular 22 Lox x
361. ours will be inverted excluding images and highlighted text Text displayed as images typical in scanned documents that have not be converted to pure text with OCR will likely not work with this function Viewing Web Pages The default import format for web page research such as when dropping a URL into the Binder from a web browser s URL icon is PDF Consequently this section addresses how one would work with archived web pages too 14 3 3 Viewing Multimedia Documents The multimedia view is used to display movie and sound files From the control bar beneath the viewing area in the footer bar you can play or pause the movie change the volume or step backwards and forwards through it On the lower right you ll see a rewind symbol with a pause button in the middle of it This is an optional mode which will show up as blue if engaged that will rewind your media by a set number of seconds whenever you pause This interval can be configured in the Navigation preferences tab section B 4 To further aid in transcribing you can use the Ctrl Return shortcut key to pause and resume a media stream even while you are typing in the other editor never having to leave the keyboard With the focus is in the media editor you may skip forward and backward by a number of seconds with Ctrl and Ctrl respectively 14 3 4 Viewing Unsupported Document Types By default Scrivener will let you import files into the Binder that it cannot display i
362. ovided for this pane for greater detail on available options On account of limitations in the text system it is not possible to temporarily override the font family in full screen mode The text colour can be overridden but changing the font would require an irreversible adjustment to your formatting Chapter 17 Annotations and Footnotes As a tool designed for the production of texts there are methods for facilitating not only the writing process but the editing process and the public notation process which is typically expressed via some form of page footnoting or endnoting at the conclusion of the work This chapter will cover all of the various methods that Scrivener provides We will cover Annotation the ability to place production notes within the document making it easy to communicate changes or needs to yourself collaborators your editor or to receive the communications from others Scrivener supports the RTF standards for commentary and will convert any word processor applied notes to annotations for your own use which can in turn be exported back out as comments when compiling Footnotes and or Endnotes being a drafting tool Scrivener makes no attempt to typeset either of these as you write however it is easy to insert notes precisely where you need them and when you compile they will presented according to typ ical standards In the case where specific formatting is required it may be advanta geous
363. ow to search for text in all documents use Project Search In addition to the buttons available in the panel there are some keyboard shortcuts you can learn which can reduce the reliance upon clicking within the panel to carry out 192 20 1 SEARCHING AND REPLACING 193 searches Return is nearly synonymous with clicking the Next button with one important difference the Find window will be automatically dismissed after you press Return The search term will be saved however allowing you to continue using the two following shortcuts without any interface in your way z F3 finds the next available match will wrap around to the top of the document if there are no more matches available below the current point This command works even if the Find panel is closed and it will operate off of the last active editor split even if that split is not focussed though searching will move your keyboard focus to the editor Shiff F3 finds the previous match as above but will wrap around to the bottom of the document As with forward searching this command uses the last active split and will focus the editor as necessary Additionally Ctrl G Ctrl F can be used to load the currently selected text into the Find field without opening the panel Using this method you can define a search term and then use F3 to find the next instance of that term without even opening the panel at all While the Find panel is open you can
364. ow far along into the process they have gone and what areas of the draft need more work Table 8 1 File and Folder Binder Icons Icon Explanation Text Document Icons An empty text document A synopsis has been added to the document but nothing has been typed into the main text This text file has text content Scriptwriting documents These variations of the above icons indicate that the text item contains subdocu ments child items indented beneath it in the outline Folder Document Icons A standard folder document B The small index card badge means this folder has a synopsis added to it LE A printed page badge indicates the folder has main text content gt Es Any of the above icon variations can be dog eared When an icon has a flap folded over in the top right corner that means the item has snapshots sec tion 15 6 saved for it 8 3 Binder Controls This section contains some tips for manipulating the outline in the binder Revealing and Hiding Elements Click on the arrow on Windows XP or configura tions using the classic Windows theme this will be a or icon instead to the left of any container to reveal or hide its contents in the binder Use the LeftArrow and RightArrow keys to open and close containers In conjunction with the Alt key with either of the above methods expand or col lapse an entire portion of the outline tree at once Reveal and Hide All Expand Al
365. ow you can control the font characteristics of the two components inde pendently Tab characters and carriage returns can be added to these fields as well and they have been set to show invisible characters in order to facilitate designing more complex or multi line title adornments In both cases no spaces will be inserted around the prefix or suffix You will need to establish all spacing if any to be used in setting them apart from the main binder title Prefix Anything typed into this box will be printed before the relevant binder item s title on that same line If you intend to use this to insert the first part of a multi line title insert at least one carriage return after the boilerplate text in this box Suffix The contents of this box will be printed after the binder item s title or if the binder item is not being printed directly after the prefix Consequently if you intend for this to display information on a line below the main title insert at least one carriage return prior to typing anything in MultiMarkdown and Titles The title prefix and suffix will ordinarily be placed within the hash marks that Scrivener generates to indicate title depth If you prefer you can disable the Place prefix suffix inside hashes options to allow text entry out side of the header line itself To allow compatibility with the other compile for mats you will need to manually type in carriage returns to separate lines Placing chara
366. ox Enter the exact name under which you registered Scrivener referred to as the Serial Number Name in the e mail you received with your registration details in the Serial Number Name box and your unique serial number in the Serial Number box and then click on the Register button You must make sure that both the user name and serial number are exactly as they appear in the registration e mail you received or registration will fail For this reason it is probably best to copy and paste both the user name and serial number directly from your e mail though make sure you don t accidentally select any extra padding space around the text Once Scrivener has been registered there is no longer a time limit on its use and you will no longer see the nag box at startup the application will launch immediately with out any messages 4 2 Application Updates At any time you can check for updates using the Help Check for Updates menu command This will require an Internet connection as it will need to check with our server in order to compare your version number with the latest available copy Software vs Your Work The advent of mobile operating systems for tablets and smart phones has unfortunately blurred the line between what a program is and what your data is On these devices deleting or re installing an application can destroy your work Standard operating systems don t work that way They are considerably more ro
367. pact notes you create from this point on out Existing notes formatting will remain untouched B 3 Corkboard Provides options and settings which will impact the way the corkboard functions and appears B 3 1 Options Allow dropping dragged items onto cards When enabled lets you drop index cards on top of other cards to store them as children beneath that card This action is similar to dragging items beneath other items in the binder Empty space double click will Adjust the behaviour of what should happen when double clicking in a blank area of the corkboard Do nothing ignores all double clicking on the corkboard background z Create a new card follows a common behaviour amongst diagramming appli cations where you can indicate the position of a new card by double clicking with the mouse Opens the parent corkboard will display the parent of the current corkboard If the corkboard you are viewing is already at the top level of the binder it B 4 NAVIGATION 313 has no parent and nothing will happen The keyboard shortcut for this is Ctrl 38 R and will remain in effect even when this option is not selected B 3 2 Appearance Corners Choose between cards with rounded corners or cards with square edges Label indicator Choose between an colour marking on the corner of the card or a graphical pin to indicate label colour Both will be tinted according to the colour of the label in use for that index card Cor
368. panded Compile Interface The full compile interface accessed by clicking the expansion button with the down arrow to the right of the preset selection menu labelled Format As is where fine grained tweaks can be made to the compile process The full compile window is arranged into two main sections On the left is a list of options pertaining to the various export formats you can choose from Clicking on an option title in this list will reveal an associated configuration screen on the right side 23 4 1 Managing Custom Presets Compile settings are saved into the project whenever you compile There is no need to repeatedly save the preset in most cases So when should you save compile settings You may wish to save them as a preset for use in other projects or simply to temporarily use a special purpose compile preset like Enumerated Outline without losing all of the work you have put into your settings Saving presets will add them to the main Format As drop down menu at the top of the compile sheet meaning from that point on you can apply them to any other project you create 232 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Below the list of option panes on the left are two buttons which let you save your current settings to a preset Save Preset Presents a dialogue box in which you can title the preset This is how it will appear in the preset menu so choose a meaningful name that you will remem ber in the future Load Preset
369. part you should consider a template no different from an ordinary project Try not to worry about getting everything perfect the first time through On average it will take at least half a dozen new projects before things start to settle down It is easy to update existing templates with revised material this will be covered in greater detail in the following pages Once you have set everything up use the File Save As Template menu item to start the template creation process In the Template Information box provide the following details Title The visible title of the template what will appear beneath the thumbnail in the template browser Category Which section to add the template to in the browser Description A brief description of what the template provides You may not find this necessary for yourself but if you intend to share the template with others it is a good idea to explain what the template is meant to provide Technically there is a 50 MB size limit to what can be saved as a template but given that a template is intended as a starter project you are unlikely to ever encounter this restriction 54 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT The Icon box on the right gives you options for setting the appearance of the tem plate thumbnail You can choose from a number of available presets or if you wish to make your thumbnail stand out from the built in templates you can click the Save Icon as File bu
370. plays the current title of the edited document s and provides control over editor splits The header bar has three colour states 1 Grey when no split is active this is the default state If splits are turned on the inactive editor will be grey 2 Blue when splits are active this denotes the active split Any actions taken which will impact the current editor will be made to the blue document The title itself will also be underlined for the active split 3 Red when an editor has been locked it will turn red to remind you that clicks in the Binder will not load any files into the editor 14 1 1 History On the left most side of the header bar are history navigation arrows which should be familiar in appearance and usage from any web browser Use these to navigate backward and forward through the navigation history 14 1 2 Item Icon Menu Next to the navigation buttons is the document icon which shows what type of doc ument is being displayed which can sometimes be abstract if more than one item is selected for display in the view Clicking on this icon brings up a menu containing some useful shortcuts to oft used commands Reveal in Binder Ctrl Shift 8 Will show the location of the currently edited file in the binder opening any containers as necessary to do so This is most useful when the method you used to arrive at the current document did not involve clicking in the 121 122 CHAPTER 14 THE EDITOR binder su
371. pressing the Delete key on your keyboard To change the order of the keywords drag and drop them in this table This can be useful if you are viewing keywords on the corkboard as colours Since only the first few the precise number of which you can modify will be shown it is good to move the most important keywords you intend to track to the top of the list See Also 1 Using Keywords subsection 10 1 4 2 Project Keywords section 10 2 18 7 Custom Meta Data Pane Custom meta data is used in two primary locations the Inspector panel which corre sponds with the fourth button from the left which looks like a suitcase tag and the Outliner which can display individual meta data fields in a column Read more about the overall philosophy and usage of Custom Meta Data subsection 10 1 6 In most new projects there will be no fields set up and this pane will merely display a message to that effect including a button which will take you to the set up window documented in the prior cross reference This can also be reached at any time via the gear menu under Edit Custom Meta Data Settings or via the Project Meta Data Settings menu command The pane represents each field as a titled plain text block that you can freely type within Each field will be stacked one atop the other in the order that they appear in the project settings table You can use Tab and Shift Tab to move between fields The currently active field w
372. pty Trash menu command This will permanently delete all items inside the Trash folder and cannot be undone The Collection tab interface can be toggled on and off with the associated toolbar button or the View Collections Collections menu item You can organise material into tabs you create or save common searches as dynamic collection In most cases if this manual refers to having a binder selection it is often accurate to assume that applies to collections and search results as well Collections and search results can also be dismissed by clicking the X button in the footer bar for the Binder Due to the similarity of these views the entire sidebar is often referred to in this manual as the binder sidebar This is meant to indicate that you needn t take the referenced action only in the Binder tab itself but in any view that presents itself in this sidebar such as the Search Results lists See Also z Setting Up the Binder chapter 8 a Navigating and Organising chapter 9 5 1 3 Format Bar The Format Bar stretches across the top of the main application view right below the toolbar and provides easy access to the most common text formatting tools It can be selectively hidden when not needed with the Format Hide Format Bar menu command For more information read The Format Bar subsection 15 4 2 5 1 4 Editor The main editor occupies the large space to the right of the Binder and will be your mai
373. puters requires little thought at all It therefore follows that placing your Scrivener project into a Dropbox folder so that it is immediately available to every computer you own would seem a perfectly natural pro gression What you should be cautious of when entertaining this idea is that a Scrivener project is comprised of many smaller files and that they all need to be working together as a cohesive whole Ordinarily this is not a problem Nothing goes into your project and messes with it except for Scrivener When you place a project on Dropbox however you are giving Dropbox permission to scrutinise and curate the individual pieces of your project that ordinarily only Scrivener messes with This goes for most synchronisation technologies in general but since we ve tested Dropbox the most this section will be framed with that service in mind By and large this is safe to do Dropbox is designed to carefully make sure each com puter has a thorough and exact replicate of what all your other computers have However a problem can arise when one computer edits your project in a way which conflicts with the copies on the other computers This can be easy to accidentally do All it takes is working on a copy of a project that is not yet fully synced This might happen because your computer has been offline for a while or because Dropbox never got a chance to fully update all of the files in the project 115 116 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEG
374. questing a new document name after pressing the shortcut The split will occur at the beginning of the selection thus leaving the selected text in the new document Merge Cirl M The opposite of splitting merge will take two or more documents and combine them all together into a single document using the top most document in the selection as the template for any of the merged document s meta data that cannot be otherwise combined such as labels and status This action cannot be undone except via the split command In those fields where combination makes sense such as notes and keywords all of the documents will be used to create a combined meta data result Group Cirl G Ctrl U Takes two or more selected items and creates a new folder placing the selection within that folder You will be given the option to name that folder after invoking the command Ungroup Cirl Shift U The opposite of grouping ungroup will move the contents of the selected container up one level so that they become siblings of that container This action will not destroy the original container allowing you to move the ungrouped items back in if it was made in error Move To gt Provides keyboard shortcuts for moving the item around in the outline in two dimensions as well as completely displacing it to another spot in the binder The first portion of this menu will be populated with all of the items in the binder The currently selected item s
375. r You should see its text appear in the editor as you always do But let s do the same thing we did earlier with the Folder click on the corkboard icon It will be empty but you are now looking at the corkboard for that file With the focus in the Corkboard press Ctrl N to make a new document An index card should appear just as if you were adding items to a folder In the binder you ll notice that the icon for this file has changed to the aforementioned stack of paper Perhaps you can better see why it is a good idea to think of the binder as an outliner instead of a glorified Explorer What is all of this flexibility good for You don t have to be thinking in terms of constrictive structural elements as you flesh out the skeleton for your book You can just add items as you go building out new corkboards and changing things to folders or back to files once a structure begins to emerge Scrivener lets you work the way you find most comfortable There is no need to build out a strict outline if you ve always worked text first but if you like to work in outlines or use the snowflake model of expansion you can accomplish these with ease An outline can literally emerge out of your book the book can be built onto an outline or even a mix of the two It s all up to you and how you work best In Scrivener the concept of a Folder is fluid It s an important concept to grasp be cause organising your book will inevitably mean a hier
376. r User Manual you should also find two copies which have been specially formatted to be printed on either US Letter or A4 standard printer paper on the Support section of the Literature amp Latte website The Scrivener project used to author the manual can be downloaded from our website as a demonstration of writing in Scrivener It has been written using the MultiMarkdown formatting syntax and so demonstrates that system as well Annotating the PDF If you wish to make notes and annotate the PDF using soft ware such as Reader or Skim it is recommended you download a separate copy or locate the PDF in the Scrivener installation and drag a copy out for your own per sonal use When Scrivener updates it will very likely overwrite the existing PDF in the installation often with revisions to the text which will destroy any of your notes The manual itself has been split into four primary sections and an appendix The first section introduces Scrivener s terminology and interface and gives a quick tour for those who want to start writing as soon as possible It is highly recommended that you also go through the separately available Interactive Tutorial which can be accessed via the Help menu in Scrivener to get the most out of Scrivener and eliminate confusion over some of its unique features but the Quick Tour chapter 6 should have you writing using Scrivener s basic main features within half an hour Scrivener has a wide variety of f
377. r can be customised completely using the Tools Customize Tool barsmenu command Appendix C 146 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING 15 4 3 Formatting Presets Styles New in 1 7 For occasions when you need to apply a certain style of formatting repet ittvely throughout your work a tool that can store formatting settings and apply them later to other ranges of text will make writing in Scrivener more convenient Presets are not Stylesheets If you are familiar with using stylesheets from traditional word processors you might be looking for something similar in Formatting Presets While presets do make the propagation of formatting easier they do not assign the target text with any kind of named range like stylesheets do so that they can be universally updated centrally by the stylesheet Once applied the text merely ends up looking as the preset ordains it to with no further connection to that preset It is thus a good idea to make sure you have your formats locked down as close as possible if you intend to use this feature to generate output ready content A few Presets have been provided to you for convenience or as starting points for your own preferred look and feel Note that Presets are not in any way tied to the rest of the application or project formatting rules For instance if you change the application default to use paragraph spacing instead of first line indentation the Body preset will not change and will still apply an
378. r processes during compile listed first in the Contents pane it will be tacked on to whatever project compile meta data has been defined Owing to how MMD meta data works fields which duplicate will be ignored the second time So if you wish to use both compiler meta data and document meta data together you should keep in mind that if you have a Title in the compile settings any Title in the document will be ignored Since the only requirement for the meta data document is that it be the very first doc ument in the list of things to process during compile you can use various features of the Contents pane to manipulate which meta data is used during compile A few exam ples include using Collections as your compile groups where the meta data file could be added to the top of the Collection using the front matter feature to swap out meta data sets or using filters to selectively use the appropriate meta data file for the content being delivered 21 7 Further Information Fletcher T Penney the creator of MultiMarkdown is actively involved in supporting MultiMarkdown in Scrivener He has generously contributed time and effort in writing tutorials and answering users questions on the forums See his web site and the Scrivener forums for more information Thank you Fletcher We also have an active MultiMarkdown section on our own software forum where other authors have come together to share tips and tutorials If you have a
379. r this column Text colour will be displayed in the inspector for the title of the field not the text body and outliner columns for the text content of each row Changing Appearance Order Use the up and down arrow buttons along the bottom of the meta data field list to change the order of items The order displayed here will impact the following displays Their order within the Inspector sidebar panel ea Their appearance in the Outliner column view menu Most importantly the order they will be printed when compiling with meta data enabled as well as within the special meta data text files that can optionally be included when exporting files 10 1 7 Exporting Meta data All meta data can be exported in a variety of ways usually text based for maximum compatibility so you needn t fear having important organisational information getting locked in with the project format Meta data can be exported in the following fashions Compiling when compiling the Draft enabling meta data export is an optional feature of the Formatting pane The various types of meta data will be exported into the Draft in a variety of ways best suited to the type of data involved ea File export when exporting files from the Binder meta data can be placed into optional sidecar plain text files corresponding to the main document being ex ported This method is used to preserve the integrity of the original document and to enable meta data expo
380. rd OPML specifications There are a few caveats to watch for Since traditional files and folders do not support text material in a folder Scrivener will need to create a separate text file to hold whatever material had been typed into the folder in Scrivener if applicable Another caveat is that items will be sorted typically alphabetically rather than using the original order in the binder If retaining the original order is important producing a compiled version of the document alongside the full export would be a good idea 24 3 EXPORTING TO AN OUTLINER WITH OPML 263 Typical usage is to select binder sidebar corkboard and outliner views are all accept able places to make a selection a container that you wish to export all descendant items will be included and use the File Export gt OPML File menu command You may also indicate that the entire Binder should be exported Outliners use a root item concept When you select a container to be exported that container will be considered the root item Depending on what outlining software you use this item may not be initially vis ible as some default to hiding the root item It is however stored safely in the OPML file When exporting the entire Binder Scrivener will create a new root item to represent what was the Binder itself and place all of the top level items within it even the Trash and its trashed items There are two formats available for outline impo
381. rd wrapping and so on will be produced when using the layout In the outliner which columns are visible or hidden and column sorting Preserve all meta data appearance options This will determine whether or not label tinting used in the various areas of the interface and pin stamp and keyword chip visibility in the corkboard will be produced when using the layout Chapter 10 Setting Up Meta Data Documents of any type in Scrivener can have various meta data associated with them Meta data is a way of talking about something without changing it directly A simple example from the analogue world could be a Post It note on a paper clipped stack of paper The Post It note is a kind of meta data as is the paper clip In Scrivener meta data can be applied in similarly analogue fashion like stamps across the face of an index card or what colour of pin or marking it has in its corner Other types of meta data in Scrivener are more abstract and you can even make up your own if the built in types are not enough Some of this meta data can be viewed in the corkboard and outliner views but the main interface for viewing and editing all of the meta data for a given document is the Inspector chapter 18 This section will brief you on the various types of meta data available and how to create more types if necessary it will not go into all of the details of the Inspector pane please read that section to gain a full understanding of how me
382. rds to your personal dictionary as you go As with most tools of this nature if you type anything into the top field and click Change you can add a correction that is not shown in the suggestion list The Ignore button will temporarily ignore the misspelled word while Learn will add the word to Scrivener s permanent ignore list The Guess button can come in handy if none of the suggestions are correct You can change the word itself in the top field or select one of the suggestions and click this button in an attempt to narrow the list down to the correct word Spell Check Contextual Menu With active spell check while typing enabled when you misspell a word while writing it will be underscored with a wavy red line Whenever you see a word with this marking you can right click on it and the contextual menu will contain best guess suggestions for which word you were aiming for The contextual menu contains a few convenience commands Ignore Spelling Temporarily ignores the word for the current session in all documents within the project Learn Spelling Permanently adds the selected word to your personal dictionary If you wish to remove a word from your personal dictionary use the View Personal Word List button in the Corrections options tab subsection B 6 1 134 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING 15 3 Editing with Scrivener Beyond the basics of text editing which are similar to many applications Scrivener pro vides furth
383. re are often times when you need to view your book or parts of it in a much larger context and with a greater degree of information at your disposal The outliner view lets you see your book structure in a standard outline format with indenting used to indicate depth It also has the ability to display many built in aspects of your documents label colour word counts modification dates keywords your own custom meta data and much more Since the outliner provides feedback for so much meta data it is a great mode for easily making and viewing bulk changes to your documents Many people like to brainstorm in the outliner view as well as it shows more than one level of depth at once Whether 28 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE you prefer the analogue experience of the corkboard or the more literal but expanded information in the outliner is up to you As with the corkboard there are many features and uses for the outliner To read more about it see The Outliner section 12 2 5 2 4 Scrivenings This is a unique view mode in that it works not only with the viewed items themselves but specifically with their text and is consequently a tool for working with text and folder items rather than multimedia files All of the text content even empty docu ments will be stacked together as if on a long spool of paper letting you read through large sections of your book at once no matter where they are located As you make ad justments to the text in t
384. re else or that arise whilst you are looking at another application You can access it from the Tools Scratch Pad menu Ctrl Shift 0 The scratchpad is a floating panel which means that you can have it open over all windows in Scrivener and even while you work on other documents or even other ap plications It is possible to optionally turn the window transparent to better facilitate its floating nature Use the gear button menu to enable transparency if you find the window getting in your way The top pane contains a list of all the note documents you currently have stored in the scratch pad by default there will only be one untitled note New notes can be added by clicking the new file button in the lower left and notes you no longer need can be deleted with the delete button next to it or by selecting it in the list and pressing Shift Del When projects are open the Send file to Scrivener sub menu will provide you with a list of all opened projects There are two ways of bringing notes into the project 1 Append Text To The contents of the selected note will be appended after any exist ing text of the document you select in the project sub menu A list of your entire binder will be arranged so you can easily select any text item Note that media files cannot be used since they cannot have text appended to them 2 Copy Document To A new document will be created beneath the selected docu ment This sub menu operates
385. re saved as a part of its persistent settings When you change settings and compile they are saved back into the project and will stay that way until you change them There is nothing special you have to do beyond this to save your export settings In a moment we will discuss presets which are a way of saving sets of settings for future use so that they can be applied to projects Thus you only ever need use presets for the purpose of backing up or transferring settings between projects since settings are automatically saved otherwise You can cancel any changes you ve made by clicking the Cancel button at the bottom of the compile window This will exit the dialogue without compiling and in addition it will reset any changes you ve made to the compile interface since you loaded it The Save amp Close button will perform all of the above steps however it will not com pile an output document The settings will be saved into the project and the compile interface dismissed but you needn t wait for a lengthy compile process to finish Format Rich Text For mat Plain Text Word ment Open Docu ment Format Final Draft Docu Web Page eXtensible Web Page Print PDF PostScript ePub eBook Kindle eBook CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Table 23 1 Compile Formats Table Extension Description rtf txt doc odt fdx html xhtml N A pdf ps epub mobi General Purpose
386. re they may organised in other folders 7 5 Moving and Deleting Projects Despite being folders full of files you can otherwise treat the project as you would any other file or folder on your system Everything that Scrivener needs to work with the project is contained within the main folder and so moving it will have no detrimental effect on its safety and is a handy way to transfer all of your working data to another machine Always close a project prior to moving it While a project is open Scrivener main tains a very close connection with the files inside of it Since it cannot predict where you will move the project if it is moved while open the software will no longer save files in the correct location and can lead to lost work It is important to remember that the entire folder needs to stay together Your project is not just the scrivx file you use to load it but all of the other folders and files around the scrivx file To safely move a project always move the entire container folder ending in scriv As with all file based programs it is not possible to delete old and unwanted projects from within Scrivener To remove projects you no longer want use the standard file management tools as you would with other folders and files on your computer 7 6 Splitting Projects Up Occasionally one or more portions of your project might exceed the scope of your orig inal planning and become what should be their own projects A cl
387. re two ways you can do so 1 Convert the saved search to a standard type This will destroy the saved search so 8 4 USING COLLECTIONS 71 only use this method if you no longer need the search criteria To convert a saved search result to a standard collection select the tab in the sidebar and use the menu command View Collections Convert to Standard Collection 2 Copy the contents into a new collection This is quite easy to do Simply select all of the items Ctrl A in the search result list and click the button in the collection header bar to create a new Standard Collection from the current selection Saved Search Collections can be removed in the same fashion as Standard Collections by selecting the tab and clicking the key as shown here Figure 8 3 Limitations Searches performed using the Binder Selection Only option cannot be saved for future use because the binder selection is a temporary state which changes whenever you click in the binder If you find yourself unable to save a search make sure this option is disabled See Also Project Search subsection 20 1 2 8 4 5 Back to the Binder Often you might wish to know the overall disposition of a collection in the binder or where a specific select few items in the list are located in the overall structure of the project The View Reveal in Binder menu command Ctrl Shift 8 works from collections and search results Since this command can be
388. ream itself It mimics the natural annotation process that one applies when working with paper where notes are scribbled below the problem lines themselves into margins or anywhere else they will fit in It means your notes remain prominent and easy to find so long as they remain issues worthy of attention The same treatment can be given to footnotes as well Keeping the actual text of the footnote directly in line with the text it augments can increase productivity and help keep your meta book relevant and cohesive Further advantages are in entry speed Since notation is done directly in the text while you are typing or editing it is easy to flow from editor to writer without disrupting the process with floating windows margin bubbles or the many other mechanisms that applications use to attach notes Despite the advantages there are still cases and tastes which would prefer to keep no tation out of the main text area If you have interest in commenting on your work or adding footnotes to it without adding text to the main editing area please skip down to Linked Notation section 17 2 What They Are Inline notation is fundamentally a form of formatting just like any other formatting spans in your document such as bold or italic Yes Scrivener has tools for working with notations in unique ways but they will respond to many of the actions that are designed for working around formatting such as Paste and Match Style When cut
389. right side of the page or centred Header Footer font The font which will be used to print the header or footer A pre view will be displayed in a text field To change the font use the Choose button to the right 23 14 META DATA 257 Table 23 3 Useful Header and Footer Tokens Token Description Available to Header and Footer fields lt projecttitle gt Project Title as set in Project Meta Data Settings or falls back to the name of the project file itself if none has been speci fied lt abbr_title gt Optionally defined abbreviated project title also defined in the project Meta Data settings panel This also falls back to using the project title above or the filename of the scriv project if necessary lt surname gt The surname from the current user s Contacts entry or the project s meta data settings lt forename gt The forename as above lt fullname gt The full name as above Some useful global replacement tokens lt p gt Prints the current page number lt we gt All of the word and character count tags can be used in the header or footer 23 14 Meta Data Meta data is used to add properties to your manuscript which many applications will display in a document properties viewer and with some formats will be used to add searchable criteria to the Spotlight database in the document s properties There are two primary meta data interfaces available to different formats The two meta data pa
390. rivener The unzipped folder is a full project and can be The sequence number cannot be used to determine this as Scrivener rotates through numbers If you have not enabled the date stamp option you will need to use your operating system to determine the modification date of the file 58 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT opened in Scrivener in the usual way Examine it and if it will suffice close it then remove the broken version of the project and replace it with this extracted copy You can now clean up the temporary working area if you wish and continue working as normal If it contains the error as well then proceed to the next older backup continuing until you find a valid copy If you find you need to only restore pieces of a project you can open your current working version at the same time as the backup and drag those pieces from the restored backup project into the live working project from binder to binder This can be useful if you ve done a lot of work since the last backup and have only just noticed that one file had been accidentally messed up some time ago and there are no snapshots to recover from Once you ve finished the files you ve worked with on the Desktop can be removed at your convenience 7 9 Tips for Working Cross Platform The Scrivener project format is fully compatible with its Macintosh companion No conversion is necessary and both versions can work off of the same source file at differ ent
391. rivenings mode Other Editor gt Provides controls to manipulate whichever split is not currently active The Forward and Backward in History commands operate just like the above commands only in the opposing split without moving focus there Clear Document History Use this command to wipe out the document history for the active split Media gt Commands for controlling the playback of audio visual media in the editor These menus and shortcut keys make it possible to control the playback of media while working in the opposing split z Play Pause Ctrl Return z Fast Forward Shift Ctrl 286 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Rewind Shift Ctrl PDF Display gt This sub menu controls how PDFs are displayed in the editor Most of these options should be familiar as they are common to many PDF viewers Actual Size Zooms the PDF to 100 even if it is too large to display all at once Size To Fit Like Automatically Resize but only resizes the document once If you change the size of the editor view later it will stay at the same view Corkboard Options gt Visual options for the corkboard The settings in this menu are project specific For more information on using the corkboard see The Corkboard section 12 1 Note that further options can be accessed via the corkboard display options button which is located on the right hand side of the footer bar for each corkboard Cards
392. rmats Using HTML styled inline annotations in MMD3 will cause them to disappear from the output Use the enclosing marker fields to instead inject code of your choosing You could for instance use an open and close marker pair of lt marginpar and gt to convert your inline annotations to TEX margin notes Pro Tip In cases where an annotation falls entirely on its own paragraph Scrivener will use a styled div instead of a styled span elements to wrap the comment in This means you can use complex MultiMarkdown within annotations that are on their own Annotations embedded within a paragraph of otherwise normal text in any way will use spans in order to preserve the original document flow and thus cannot contain complex syntax They can however utilise inline formatting such as bold italic footnotes and so forth 23 13 Page Settings Various print and page settings can be set up with the Page Settings pane such as margins paper size headers and footers Only formats that support page settings will use this pane and amongst those not all support headers and footers Paper Size Here you can set the physical size of the page Common paper sizes are provided or you can supply your own custom sizes Margins Margins set how far from the edge of the paper stock the text container will extend to This measurement does not factor in the non printable area which is printer specific so when using very low values it is a good idea
393. rred to as hinting Hinting simplifies the shape of characters as necessary to improve legibility Most fonts will be handled correctly but if you find your pre ferred font is illegible this setting might improve its appearance Use the Insert key to control overtype With this option enabled the Insert key on your keyboard can be used to toggle overtype on and off Overtype will auto matically erase what you are typing over instead of inserting the text at the cursor position Typewriter scrolling and for full screen in new projects Enables this feature at the application level for either mode selected Typewriter scrolling keeps the text you 316 APPENDIX B OPTIONS are currently editing in the middle of the window There are two checkboxes one for enabling it by default in the main editor and the other for full screen Terminate footnotes and comments before punctuation Some typesetting styles call for footnote markers to be placed before the terminating punctuation for a sen tence rather than after it or for when individual words are referenced rather than the entire sentence Select this option if you require this format You can always manually define where the marker will be placed by selecting the range of text you wish to comment on prior to making the note This only alters the behaviour used when selection is made automatically in lieu of a selection Ruler Units Lets you choose the units centimetres in
394. rt and export 1 OPML 2 Mindmap a standard format used predominately by Freemind When you indicate that some extra form of textual data should be added to the out line beyond the title headings themselves they will be attached as notes Because of limitations in the design of this convention it is not possible to transfer rich text infor mation between outliners using the _notes method All material will be converted to plain text 24 3 1 Usage The following options are available from within the export panel Export entire binder Rather than use the current selection export the entire Binder outliner from top to bottom This will include everything even items you have currently in the Trash can Note attachment options Using the loose convention of placing plain text notes into a notes attribute for each outline heading you can often communicate extra information to other outlining software In all cases the associated data for that option will be assigned to the same binder item it came from So if an item named Fruit has a description written into its index card and you select Include Syn opses then in your outliner the Fruit heading will contain a note field with the description from the synopsis attached z Titles Only if attempting this gives you issues or error messages the first option Titles only conforms most closely to the published specifications for OPML and should b
395. rt in formats which would not otherwise allow text data to be inserted into it such as mp3 files z Drag and Drop When dragging documents from one Scrivener project to another all meta data will be preserved where applicable In some cases like labels and status these values will need to already exist in the target project 10 2 PROJECT KEYWORDS 95 10 2 Project Keywords The Project Keywords window holds all of the keywords in use by the project As you enter new keywords into the Inspector section 18 6 they will be added automatically to the central project list You can access this pane via Project Show Project Keywords Ctrl Shift OK or by double clicking any of the keywords in the Inspector pane You can create a new keyword by clicking on one of the buttons at the bottom of the panel The left most button creates a new keyword as a sibling of the selected keyword and the one next to it creates a new keyword as a child of the selection The third button deletes the selected keyword s Keywords are automatically sorted alphabetically You can drag any keyword onto any other keyword to make the dragged keyword a child of the one onto which it was dropped For the most part the hierarchical structure of keywords are really only an organisational convenience with no effect on how the keywords are represented in documents themselves To assign keywords in the panel to a document in the main window select and drag the desired key
396. rtcut select its row in the table and note that the Key Sequence field toward the bottom will be filled with the currently assigned shortcut Click into this field and then type in a key sequence to capture it The capturing mechanism will continue to capture subsequent keystrokes or chords as they are sometimes called This way you B 8 IMPORT AND EXPORT 319 can group like commands into a common cluster This requires you to tap in the first part of the shortcut and then release the keys and follow it up with subsequent rapid keystrokes to invoke the command If the shortcut you used conflicts with another one in the list it will be highlighted in red If it is black then you are good to go Clicking the Reset button will return the shortcut to the application default The Import and Export buttons at the bottom of the table let you manage shortcuts collectively The import button has a few templates available that you can choose from which will attempt as best as possible to match other applications Those who work with the Macintosh version of Scrivener for instance could select a template that more closely matches the hotkey arrangement on the Mac though of course since modifier keys differ it is not possible to a complete match Also available are templates for Mi crosoft Word and OpenOffice You can load templates from a file which is a useful way of restoring your settings from a backup or copying your favourite s
397. rther detail on working with graphics embedded in the text Image Linked to File MathType Equation Inserts a MathType image equation at the current cursor lo cation Requires the active focus to be in a text editor When inserting an equation on a line it will attempt to match the baseline of the current text Requires a separate installation of MathType See also Using Equations with MathType section 20 6 A 2 EDIT MENU 279 MathML Equation Inserts a MathML equation at the current cursor location which will be rendered and displayed as a graphic in the editor at the cursor position from whence the menu command was run See also Using Equations with MathML section 20 7 Line Break Ctrl G Ctrl Y Inserts a soft break instead of a full paragraph break An example use when you need to create a list within a single paragraph Page Break Ctrl G Ctrl Z Inserts a page break within the current text Page breaks are invisible and will only show up when printing or exporting to a fully featured word processor or if you have Show Invisibles enabled Typ ically it is best to let Scrivener handle page breaks by section using the Page Break Before option in the inspector or in the Separators compile option pane section 23 6 Non Breaking Space Ctrl G Ctrl W Inserts an space character which will pro hibit word wrap from dividing two or more words from each other For the purposes of word wrap it will consid
398. s favourites and they ll be pinned to various document selec tion menus of the interface such as Go To and Scrivener Links Read more about it in Using Favourites section 9 5 Improved PDF Viewer The built in PDF viewer has been completely replaced with an improved engine It is now possible to select and copy text out of the PDF including by whole page PDF annotations such as highlights free form drawing and direct text now display properly pop up text still requires an external viewer PDFs that contain a built in table of con tents can now be navigated using a navigation sidebar Read more about the updates in Viewing PDFs subsection 14 3 2 Table of Contents It is now possible to generate a simple table of contents for use with RTF PDF DOC and DOCX the last three work best with a copy of MS Office 2007 to 2013 installed Read more about how to add a table of contents to your work chapter 22 Multiple Project Notepads Project notes can still be accessed in the Inspector but now you can also load them in a separate window with Project Project Notes letting you view both your document notes and project notes at the same time section 12 3 You can add multiple notepads to the project notes window and these will be accessible from the inspector too via the same drop down you use to switch between Document and Project Notes section 18 4 Additional Changes Expanded keyboard shortcut supp
399. s Sometimes you may need a link to adjust the hyperlink text what your readers will see to match the given title for the section it refers to For example you might need the Table of Contents list to print the chapter numbers which are also be compiled into the titles This method requires a few conditions to function properly 1 Link text which is solely the title of the document they link to 2 A title prefix or suffix applied to the document level that contains the links This is a more advanced feature of Compile which is discussed in its own chapter but in essence it allows you to create a link to document titles in the text which will be altered to match their final appearance in the compiled version Since titles can be added to or even entirely replaced by the compiler this set of features will ensure that referenced titles will remain valid after export This can be used even in formats that do not support linking since it primarily is concerned with keeping the text of your document up to date with the final presentation of its structure The original text reads 84 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING To read more about this topic see How to Grow Better Tomatoes The phrase How to Grow Better Tomatoes is linked to a binder document of the same name in the Binder However the author has arranged for this title to be prefixed so that in the final output it will appear as Chapter 7 How to Grow Better Tomat
400. s PDF files Windows media or web pages as other folders can though it is of course perfectly possible to embed figures into the text itself much as you would in a word processor at the editor level All of the writing you want as part of your finished work should be placed inside the Draft folder in the order you want it which of course is easy to change by dragging and dropping When you are ready to export or print your manuscript use File Compile This will combine all of the individual doc uments inside the Draft folder into one long document formatted as you specify Each file you place inside the Draft may represent a chapter a scene a paragraph or whatever you want Some templates may rename this folder to something else but its function remains the same 5 1 INTERFACE OVERVIEW 21 Research The Research folder can hold any type of file supported by Scrivener text image media archived web pages or PDF files It provides a default place for non text files to be imported and stored although you can create other top level folders for this purpose if you so wish Some templates may rename this folder to something else but its function remains the same Trash When you delete an item from the binder it is not really deleted but just moved to the Trash folder You can drag items in the Trash folder back into the main binder but you cannot create new items inside the Trash To empty the Trash use the Project Em
401. s will be blank this is because they display the synopsis for a document not its internal text Double click in the empty ruled text area on the Wineries card and type in a short synopsis for this section of the book When finished click outside of the card or press Esc to confirm At this point if you look in the binder you ll see a third icon type that looks like a small index card next to Wineries This new one indicates that you ve typed in a synopsis but haven t yet typed in any text for the section Once you enter text into the editor for the Wineries section the icon will be replaced with the one you see for After Math Some people like to work in a top down fashion building a conceptual outline and then filling in what they intend for each section in the synopsis These three levels of icons give you an overall idea of your level of progress with this task We ll try that now Load the Wineries card by double clicking on the icon next to the title If you can t find the right spot just click on it in the binder Type in a short sentence and observe that as predicted the icon has now changed to match the After 6 4 SCRIVENINGS MODE 37 Math section You might be wondering how much text each section should hold The answer is largely up to you With a word processor it is often convenient to work in longer doc uments because lots of small windows can create unmanageable clutter but Scriv
402. s as a Scrivenings session rather than a Corkboard Each section will be divided with a horizontal rule letting you know where one ends and the next begins Try clicking in the blank area between the two sections you ve already added text to When working in Scrivenings you might wish to open the In spector by clicking the blue i icon in the toolbar on the far right or pressing Ctrl Shift I A preview of the index card will appear at the top This will change when you switch sections in the Scrivenings session so you can more easily see where you are Try click ing around a bit or moving the cursor between sections and then return to the blank Masked Avenger section Add some text by typing normally then select Masked Avenger in the binder all by itself Note that your edits have been made directly to the document It couldn t be easier Now we will do something else that is impossible in many programs Right click on After Math and select Convert to Folder The icon will change to a blue folder with a small page in the corner That page means the folder has text stored in it in the same 38 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR way a text file might and indicates that the text you added to this document earlier is still there This differs from stating that a folder has text items as children beneath it The page badge will only be applied if the folder item itself has text content In Scrivener folders and text files are pre
403. s at the same level of indenta tion are referred to as siblings Another crucial feature of the outlining principle is that you can hide the child portions of the outline by folding or collapsing their respective parents keeping your screen focussed on what you are currently working on You might immediately draw a connection between this and the outlines we had to compose prior to writing essays in school Unlike those pen and paper outlines a digital outline has the benefit of being able to contain the content of the work within the outline You can imagine it as being as though each line on the paper had a stack of pages beneath it where the portion of that essay is represented by the topic line it relates to Thus moving topic lines around in a digital outline moves the content beneath the outline for you It is like having your very own table of contents that instead of reflecting upon your choices allows you to use it like a tool and make those choices with a single and easy drag and drop If all of this still does not make sense I recommend going over the Quick Tour chap ter 6 provided in this manual It approaches the concept of outlining and how the text you write can be organised into a topical tree You might think this is all more complex ity than you need but in my experience once the lightbulb switches on to this idea it 8 1 HOW THE BINDER IS ORGANISED 63 becomes second nature in the same way we now think of
404. s be the one immediately above even if that item is currently hidden and on an entirely different hierarchical level Clicking the down arrow will always move you to the document immediately below These two buttons can also be activated with the keyboard shortcuts Alt Shift Left and Alt Shift Right respectively 14 1 5 Split View Button Finally the last set of buttons on the right hand side controls editor splits You can split the current editor close a split or change the split orientation all from here If no splits are open you will see two buttons with a small line drawn through the icon in the horizontal or vertical orientation to let you know which way the editor will be split if you click on the corresponding button 124 CHAPTER 14 THE EDITOR Once a split is already open one of the icons will appear blank Clicking on it in this state will close the opposing split This means you should click on the blank icon in the header bar for the document view you wish to retain once the split has closed Either side can be dismissed by clicking on the opposing header bar button Additionally if you click on the other button the split orientations will switch without otherwise disturbing your layout Both splits will remain open only the orientation will change See also Splitting the Editor section 14 4 14 2 Footer Bar Below each editor pane is the footer bar As with the header bar its visibility can be toggled with View
405. s is as easy as creating a new project and if you often set up projects with the same starter items like character sheets keywords or custom labels personalised templates will save you a lot of time Here is a list by no means complete of things that are commonly changed or added to custom templates Custom labels amp status add the types of labels preferred colours and status stamps that you find useful for your projects 7 7 TEMPLATES 53 Project references try making a list of writing resources critique groups and re search portals that you often use ea Character sheets or research note starters use Document Templates section 8 5 to supply yourself with your favourite starter documents Compile settings since compile settings are stored in the project settings you can configure these so that your future projects will be ready for one click export or close to it Starter Collections standard collections as well as saved search collections can be placed in a template as well though initially they will probably be empty ea Starter story structure set up your favourite story building techniques and outlines in the Draft The important concept to keep in mind is that whatever you can save within a project you can save as part of atemplate There are a few differences mostly pertaining to how a template is loaded and the description and thumbnail that can be saved with it but for the most
406. s table of contents feature chapter 22 or your own Scrivener Links It may not always be desirable to have bookmarks at every level of your outline especially if you use Scrivener s outline feature to break down your book into small blocks Simply uncheck this to remove the document type and level from the bookmarking feature If you do this you will be unable to link to this level and type of document in the ToC or when using the linked lt p gt feature for cross referencing by page number Page Padding Located on the right hand side of the formatting editor header bar this controls how much padding will be added to the top of the page in lines when it happens to fall on a page break Use this to offset your titles from the top of the printable margins if you prefer that look This option will not be previewed in the Formatting pane you will need to compile in order to see the results When using the plain text output format blank lines will be inserted wherever a page break would appear Thus this setting can be used to visually space apart sections even though in most text editors page breaks are not possible This op tion is not available to the MultiMarkdown formats as this engine does not heed extraneous spacing Section Layout The Section Layout button provides options for adjusting the content boilerplate text around headings heading formatting and letter case adjustments These adjustments will only appear when
407. s the container s text itself that will be loaded in Full Screen which might often be blank There are two exceptions to this rule 1 View as Scrivenings If you are viewing a group of documents in Scrivenings mode then Full Screen mode will use that same mode This is the easiest way to load an entire container s text into Full Screen mode as it requires no further selection 2 Pre load documents into history If multiple items are selected and Scrivenings mode is not enabled then each item will be loaded into the Full Screen mode s history queue Working in this fashion you can use 8 and 8 to flip between the docu ments without returning to the main project window Launch Full Screen mode either by hitting F11 or select View Enter Full Screen When you first enter Full Screen mode you will see your document in the middle of the screen set to a warm grey paper colour and masking the rest of the screen a black 158 16 1 USING BACKGROUND IMAGE AND TEXTURES 159 background Nearly every aspect of this experience can be changed some right within Full Screen mode You will also briefly see the Control Strip detailed below To retrieve it after it has disappeared slide the mouse pointer down to the bottom of the screen and let it sit for a moment So long as the mouse remains within the control strip it will stay visible Once moved back up the control strip will disappear out of view 16 1 Using Background Image
408. s with links you no longer require Tf this is unfamiliar I suggest reading Folders are Files are Folders subsection 8 1 3 9 4 LINKING DOCUMENTS TOGETHER 83 9 4 3 Changing a Link Target The link target what Scrivener will display when you click on the link can be modified in one of the following ways Select the text of the link and use the Edit Scrivener Link gt sub menu to select a new target You can also right click anywhere in the link text and use the contex tual menu to make this selection z Select the text of the link in the editor and then hold down the Alt key and drag the item you wish to link to on top of the selection 9 4 4 When Scrivener Links can be Compiled Depending upon the file format used RTF and DOC with DOC set to RTF Based and with Microsoft Office converters enabled DOCX and PDF are also supported when compiling your work into a single file Scrivener Links can be used for linking or referencing that your readers can make use of Some examples range from tables of content cross references hyperlinks to the web and more For all other formats or when Office converters are not available Scrivener Links will be stripped from the output and thus are handy for inserting useful links for your own purposes Refer to the File Format Converters Import Export options pane for more information on setting up converters subsection B 8 3 Compiling with Automatically Adjusted Title
409. s you need them Consequently this section contains chapters which could be considered optional In particular screenwriting and bibliographies can be safely skipped unless your works re quire these functions The exception are the chapters discussing The Editor and Writing and Editing These will be of benefit to all as this will introduce the text editor where you will be doing most of your writing and if you haven t already done so at least skim the prior part on preparation Vital concepts have been introduced there and many of the following chapters will build off of those concepts The topics that will be covered in this part are The Editor chapter 14 Full documentation of the various editor views and how to use the primary editing and viewing interface Writing and Editing chapter 15 Full documentation of the various editor views formatting layout and tools to enhance the editing and revision processes z Full Screen chapter 16 Scrivener s full screen feature Wipe aside all distractions and just write Annotations and Footnotes chapter 17 Learn how to comment as you write using either Scrivener s exclusive inline annotation tool or linked comments Also covers footnotes endnotes marker highlighting and revision pens 120 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING Inspector chapter 18 All about the inspector which displays document meta data notation references and more
410. sage in your project Simply click on the keyword you wish to look for and click the Search button in the bottom of the panel You can also search for combinations using the Boolean AND logic of keywords by selecting more than one keyword and then clicking Search All documents containing all 96 CHAPTER 10 SETTING UP META DATA E Meta Data Settings ex Wi Manage the label and status lists specific to this project Labels Status Custom Meta Data Project Properties Project Title Scrivener User Manual lt projecttitle gt Abbreviated Title User Manual lt abbr_title gt Author s Full Name Ioa Petra ka lt Fullname gt Surname Petra ka lt surname gt Forename Ioa lt forename gt Gray text indicates the default values Type over them to change them You can use the tags next to each text Field in your text or in the Compile settings For instance in the header and Footer settings During the compile process the tags will automatically be replaced with the values in the text fields IF left blank the File name will be used for the project title Figure 10 2 Project PropeSetting Up Meta Datarties Tab selected keywords will be returned When searching for only one keyword the Exact Phrase method will be used See Also Project Search subsection 20 1 2 Keywords Pane section 18 6 10 3 Project Properties The fourth tab of the Project Meta Data S
411. se columns to make sure everything will act in the manner you expect it to On any of the checkbox columns you can Alt click any of the checkboxes to toggle checkmarks for all visible items in that column Include Linked to the Inspector option Include in Compile if unchecked the item will not be used in the final product unless the compiler has specifically be in structed to use this checkbox in an unorthodox fashion below This is generally used to create static exceptions for items which will rarely or never be a part of the compiled product For quickly filtering or selecting the scope of a compile to for example print out one or two chapters you should use the compile group selector ple p P y pule group or filters 234 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Title The visible name of the item in the Binder This might be altered in subsequent compile options or updated with a counter if it includes a token in the name Pg Break Before Linked to the Inspector option Page Break Before Inserts a page break control before the checked document A common usage for this is to set special pages like title pages and table of contents For items which create a repeating pattern where a page break would be needed you should use Separators section 23 6 instead of individually marking checkboxes for each item and indeed most default settings include an automatic page break wherever a folder follows a file often used to d
412. se blocks will retain their original formatting and not be touched by this tool 15 5 Inline Images While images themselves cannot be placed into the Draft as binder items you can in sert an image into the text either by dragging an image file in from Windows Explorer dragging an image document in from the Binder Outliner or Corkboard or by selecting Edit Insert Image From File The image will be placed at the current cursor posi tion Images placed into documents in this fashion will create a new copy of that image even if it was dragged in from the Binder This becomes important when working with placeholder images If you intend to later edit your images or replace them with up dated copies from a graphic designer you may wish to instead use Linked Inline Images subsection 15 5 2 To resize the inline image right click on it and select Edit Image This will bring up the image scaling panel Use the controls to shrink the image or increase its size and then click on OK Unchecking Lock aspect ratio allows you to adjust the width and height independently and therefore distort the image Clicking Cancel restores the image to its former size and returns you to the editor The Reset button will return the image settings to the state they were in when you opened the panel but will leave the panel 15 5 INLINE IMAGES 151 open Note that some images types cannot be resized double clicking on such images will do nothing
413. se it for the next new note that you create This is remembered across all projects and will be persistent until you specifically choose a new colour As with inline annotations the primary usage for comments will be to add commen tary to your text commentary that isn t intended to appear in the final cut However it 17 2 LINKED NOTATION 169 is possible to adjust this behaviour in the compiler and even opt to compile comments as footnotes Read Footnotes Comments section 23 12 for further details on available options 17 2 3 Linked Footnotes As with inline footnotes linked footnotes will by default appear with a grey background and will likewise appear grey in the inspector Footnote colours cannot be individually changed though you can adjust the global application default for footnote presentation in the Appearance option tab subsection B 2 2 Since footnotes will ultimately generate a marker in your text the positioning of the anchor point in the text is important as it will be used to place the reference mark in your final text once you compile The positioning point is at the end of the anchor highlight area not the beginning If you wish to place a note at the end of a sentence you would highlight up to the last word of that sentence where you choose to start highlighting is at your discretion This will be done for you automatically if you place the cursor anywhere in that word or at the end of the word and create a
414. se the letter i if typed by itself B 6 3 Word Auto Completion Suggest completions as you type Rather than waiting for you to use the Edit Complete menu command Alt words from the projects Auto Completion section 15 7 list will be presented to you in a list of narrowing specificity the more you type Once you ve narrowed it down to the right word or select one from the short list you can tap Enter to select it and proceed on with the next word In script mode only Disable the auto completion feature unless the editor has been set to script mode B 6 4 Substitutions Enables a wide array of commonly used symbols and typographic conventions by de tecting when their use is appropriate Not all text entry areas are capable of using substi tutions but they will always be available in the main text editors 318 APPENDIX B OPTIONS If you intend to use Scrivener as a de facto plain text editor to compose syntax like HTML LaTeX MultiMarkdown or DocBook you will probably want to disable all of these features as most syntax formats either handle this for you or require specific instructions for typography Most of the options are self explanatory Those requiring explanation follow 29 6 Use smart quotes Will convert inch and foot characters into typographic quotes also referred to as curly quotes as you type according to your system language settings Replace double hyphens with em dashes
415. sed A common tendency is to treat the binder like a flat list of those semi large files say the length of a chapter because even just that small incremental step can be so much better than working in a word processor But if you organise your project in this fashion you could be missing out on a part of the Scrivener experience As it uses the convention of folders and files you might instinctively approach the binder as a sort of super Explorer but in actuality it s far better to think of the binder in terms of being a bonafide outliner You might have been drawn to Scrivener for this very reason but because of the daunting number of things that must be learned all at once have found yourself falling back to using a simplified file is chapter approach If you have never used or even heard of the type of software referred to as an out liner some of this may not make immediate sense Outliners are a fairly old software invention nearly as old as the spreadsheet that never really caught on as dedicated soft ware However the concept of outlining has become widespread in many programs even including the way our operating systems show the contents of our disks Outlining is in part a visual metaphor that declares some things as being children to other things based upon their relative level of indent If something is indented beneath an item then it is considered a child of it and that item is a parent to it Item
416. side the source file it will naturally link up correctly and display in the ultimate output See also 1 Compiling the Draft chapter 23 9 5 USING FAVOURITES 85 2 Creating a Table of Contents chapter 22 3 MultiMarkdown and Images subsection 21 4 1 9 5 Using Favourites New in 1 7 Setting binder items as favourites will increase their visibility in a few key areas of the application One of these has already been covered the Go To menus Setting an item as a favourite will make it easy to navigate to that item in the future as it will always be present at the top level of that menu with the exception of when the menu is acting as a table of contents for a Scrivenings session 9 5 1 menu impact All of the menus which have favourites added to them 2 Edit Append Selection to Document Also available as a contextual menu when text is right clicked upon 2 Edit Scrivener Link Creates text links to documents like URLs in a web browser Also available as a contextual menu item View gt Go To Provides navigation features to any spot in the binder Also avail able from the header bar icon menu except when operating at a table of contents for a Scrivenings session Documents Move Tom Moves selected binder items to other locations in the binder Also available as a contextual menu item from the main sidebar 9 5 2 Adding and Removing Favourites Adding and removing items from
417. sing Snapshots section 15 6 You might have noticed that the title of your document printed above the editor as well as in the binder changed when this happened If you leave a document as Untitled the first line will be used as the title or the first few words if it is a long line like a paragraph This will only happen once and you can always change the automatic title to something more descriptive if you wish you can also turn this feature off Let s make a new document in the binder There are a number of ways to do this but first let s try the most direct method click the large green button in the toolbar just once The cursor will flip over to the binder and let you type in the name of the new docu ment Type something here like Masked Avenger and press Enter to confirm You ll notice that the content you just typed into the editor has disappeared This is because you are now viewing Masked Avenger you can verify this by reading the title in the editor header bar Let s fix the name of the first document while we are in the binder Press the UpArrow on your keyboard once Immediately you should see the words you just typed re appear in the editor That is because you are now viewing the first starter document To change the name just press F2 and type in After Math once again pressing Enter to confirm the name change You might notice something going on with the icons in the binder Figure
418. t Formatting Apply Preset gt sub menu to select the preset The types of formatting applied to the text you have selected will depend upon the type of preset For character attribute presets you must select the text you wish to apply the preset to just as you would when using bold or italics For paragraph style presets the cursor can be anywhere in the target paragraph and no explicit selection need be made Of course if you wish to change many paragraphs at once you can use standard selection to do so Whatever paragraphs the selection falls into will be impacted even if they are not fully selected Presets which contain both character and paragraph attributes will apply all stylings to the entire paragraph regardless of selection If you wish to only apply font styles to a portion of your paragraph then you will need to create a character attribute preset to do so For example if you saved the bold attribute into the paragraph and character preset the entire paragraph will be emboldened regardless of the selection you ve made Creating New Presets To create a new preset you will need to create exemplar text in your editor containing the styling you wish to preserve for future use Place the cursor in the text where that format appears It is often best to not select any text for this procedure as doing such will increase ambiguity where multiple styles and attributes are employed within the selection Invoke Format Format
419. t Table A table for assigning content to the various Binder item types available and the creation of level specific content and formatting rules 240 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT 2 Formatting Editor A format editing and live preview area which is linked with and displays the formatting rules for the selected row above In the supplied example Figure 23 4 the manuscript will print all folder titles includ ing any text within that folder item itself and only text for file groups and files It will also override the formatting to Courier 12pt and adds extra information to the folder titles one of which warns readers that they are holding a proof copy All of this might seem like magic right now even if it gives you a taste of what the compiler is capable of so let s take a look at the provided features By the time you are done with this section you should be able to see how all of this fits together and in no time you ll be designing your own documents 23 8 1 Structure and Content Table The structure table initially has three rows corresponding to the three basic binder item types that can be found in a draft folder folders file groups text files that have subdocu ments and text files For a moment ignore the Level 1 labels we ll get to that in a moment In the columns to the right of each type you will find a checkbox for each con tent element that can be optionally included by the compiler Think of these
420. t be available for use with other projects until you select Save for use with other projects from the Manage menu Once you are happy with the format it is thus recommended that you make it available for use with other projects as you might not remember which project file you saved it in It s worth reiterating that script settings are saved directly into the project itself auto matically when you click the OK button There is no need to repeatedly save a customised script Saving a script is for when you want to use that format for another project entirely or to a file for transport to other computers 19 4 1 Format Tabs On the right of the panel is the tab view This is used for setting the format for each element Select the element from the list on the left and then set the formatting for that element using the controls in the tab view on the right The setting controls are grouped under four different tabs which this section will describe 19 4 CREATING YOUR OWN SCRIPT FORMATS 187 Font Tab The Font tab provides options for setting the character appearance for the selected ele ment as follows Font Allows you to set the font for the current element selected in the list on the left Scrivener does not use the font to identify elements so you can change the font in options without messing up Scrivener s recognition of script elements This also holds true for font changes made in the editor Size Allows you
421. t be overwritten However you can create projects from them for editing and then save your modifications as a new template by giving it a new name 7 7 3 Managing Templates In the Template browser window the Options menu in the bottom left provides the fol lowing for managing templates Set Selected Template as Default Changes the default template selection to whichever template you currently have selected A yellow border will appear around the selected template Once this is set the next time you call up this window it will highlight that template for you Hide Getting Started Disables the special starter category at the top of the category list which contains useful links to the Interactive Tutorial and the User Manual These can also be access from the Help menu from within any open project so it is 7 8 BACKING UP YOUR WORK 55 safe to remove the Getting Started category once you ve familiarised yourself with the program You can also choose to reveal it again in this same option drop down Delete Selected Template When a custom template is selected you can use this menu item to remove it from your system Note that the built in templates cannot be removed 7 8 Backing Up Your Work Regularly backing up your work is an important part of the writing process in that it keeps your efforts safe and while there are many external strategies for keeping your work safe from catastrophes and mistakes the most important part is rememberi
422. t that Scrivener is doing quite a bit more than just converting the data from one format to another or moving data to an external location that other programs can access Scrivener s compiler can generate documents to a number of different formats do simple or complex trans formations on the binder structure reformat everything to a consistent look and much more The philosophy of letting you work the way you want to work is very much sup ported by the compiler There is no need to work in Courier Times New Roman or whatever your editor or publisher prefers You can choose an elegant font or one that is easy to read at 3am with sore eyes In the end Scrivener will generate a document to your required specifications Let s try it now Press Ctrl Shift E or select the menu command File Compile After all of the features described above you might think you got the wrong function at first By default Scrivener presents a very simple form with some industry standard presets and an export file format chooser From the Format As menu select Standard Manuscript Format a Change the Compile For option to Rich Text rtf That s it Click the Compile button choose a name and location for your RTF file and once the dialogue box dismisses open the file using the Explorer It should open with your system s default RTF editor As you can see all of the test lines you typed in are there with the header names prefi
423. t you have loaded Third format searching has many ways to search for particular types of formatting in your project Depending on the type of search being used you will be faced with two different types of response from the application Project searching gathers all documents that match the criteria together and displays them in the sidebar These search results can be used as the basis for collections either as a selection for a new standard collection or to save the search criteria as a saved search collection Holding search results in the sidebar also means you get to use all of the document management tools you are familiar with by now Document and format searching on the other hand do not collect results but rather step through the search results one by one in a familiar fashion Document searches will never escape the text editor That is they will not go off into other documents you do not have loaded looking for results Format searching as with document searching operates in a step by step manner but will by default step through every matching item in the entire project 20 1 1 Document Find and Replace As with many applications you are provided with a standard Find and Replace panel which can be called up in any text view with Ctrl F The find panel operates only in the current text editor which might include multiple documents when using Scrivenings mode To replace text in all documents use Project Replace see bel
424. ta the text values not meta data field name will be searched Operator Set the method by which search terms will be handled as you type them in Exact Phrase the default method What is typed into the field will be queried precisely as it is typed in the book will only match documents that have the phrase the book as written not documents that just have the word book It will also return documents that contain the books For exclusive matching use Whole Word below z All Words every word entered into the search field must appear in the selected data type Documents which only match some of the words will not be returned Words can be entered in any order Analogous to logical AND Any Word queried documents must contain at least one of the words typed into the search field Analogous to logical OR Whole Word unlike any of the above search methods the term supplied will only match whole words A search for Jo will only return documents with that word not documents that also contain Joseph 196 CHAPTER 20 WRITING TOOLS Options Provides a few extra options as well as searching scope limiters Scope limiters instruct the search engine to only scan parts of your binder rather than the entire thing z Search Draft Only will only look in the Draft folder of the binder Note that if the name of Draft has been changed in the project the title of this option will reflect that na
425. ta data is assigned to documents 10 1 Meta Data Types The basic meta data types include the title and a text or image synopsis The title is the most important component of any item in the binder as it will be used to identify the document in the many views menus and export methods When exporting as files filenames will be set according to the title field when compiling titles can be used to generate headers for that section index cards use the title titles may also be used intelli gently by the compiler when linked to the document by that same name and the outliner is composed of a list of titles The synopsis is a plain text field primarily intended to be a short summation of the contents of the document though how you choose to use it is entirely up to you The synopsis is displayed in a variety of ways 1 Corkboard used to display the content area of the card 2 Outliner will be placed beside the Title column by default 88 10 1 META DATA TYPES 89 3 Binder revealed in the tooltip when hovering the mouse over the corresponding title Instead of the text synopsis you can elect to use an image to represent a document on the corkboard This image will be used on the corkboard and in the inspector but whatever text exists in the standard synopsis field will be used in the outliner and binder as described above and in the various export and print options that include a synopsis field The image is not a replacement
426. tandard early To view imported MHT files load the page archive in an external viewer See also Viewing Unsup ported Document Types subsection 14 3 4 z Plain text no formatting of any kind will be retained and the layout will be linearised into paragraphs This is the best format to use when you just want to strip the intended content out of the page navigation and ad clutter Encoding for plain text When saving or importing plain text files the encoding most frequently the concern is whether it is Unicode or not can be an important differ ence between garbage or a clean file If you unsure of what encoding your text files use experiment with this option until you get the right result Text files you ve written in Notepad will most likely be saved in the Windows system en coding UTF 8 is generally the best selection for non 2byte languages that you ve acquired off of the Internet or from modern Unicode enabled text editors It is also B 8 IMPORT AND EXPORT 321 backwards compatible with older text files in most cases and is the new industry standard moving forward Invalid character handling If a character cannot be recognised by the importer it will be handled according to the choice made here 2 Replace invalid characters with the diamond query icon will be used to show where these invalid characters were in the original document If you see a lot of these you might want to try using another encoding Remov
427. templates might configure a number of formatting rows beyond the basic default three A new blank project however will always just have three rows one for each type You might want to create a new blank project in order to follow along with this explanation 23 8 FORMATTING 241 Type Title Meta Data Synopsis Notes Text D Level 7 T E Level 2 m V E E E Level1 n F al F v 4 m Level 1 a E Levell P EAs fal F 4 EJ Level 1 r 4 Level 2 A SAES Example Binder E Level 2 E Level 1 Figure 23 5 Example multi level formatting rule Things get more interesting when these rules are applied to levels of hierarchy This ability is best demonstrated with an example Try selecting the Folder row in the table and then click the Add formatting level button indicated with an arrow Figure 23 5 The label for the row that was previously selected will now be titled Level 1 and the new indented folder row will be called Level 2 As you might guess this means you now have two rules for handling folders The first rule will apply to level one folders only the second rule will apply to level two folders and anything deeper in the hierarchy than that To start all configuration options from the original row will be carried over into the new row to help you get started in customising it This holds true for formatting as well as the options we ve already discussed What do
428. ter 8 Using the built in sections of the binder manag ing collections organising your work and setting up document templates Navigating and Organising chapter 9 Optimise how you navigate within a project z Setting Up Meta Data chapter 10 The various forms of meta data available for tracking progress and types Gathering Material chapter 11 How to collect material from other resources and applications Project Planning chapter 12 How to rapidly capture your ideas and give them shape shapes that will eventually become your manuscript Cloud Integration and Sharing chapter 13 How to take your work with you collaborate with others and manage cross platform usage between Mac OS X and the Windows operating systems Chapter 7 Project Management Scrivener is a project based application and stores your projects on your computer in the locations you designate when you create them In this way it is much like any program that loads and saves files to your disk rather than a database style program where all of your information is managed behind the scenes These project files are saved into your Documents folder by default though you can choose to organise these projects however you like even after you ve created them Some find it convenient to rely upon the File Recent Projects menu item to organise their projects or simply just let Scrivener maintain which projects are open whenever they start S
429. ter Bar displaying PDF controls There are three additional tools available the two circular arrow buttons will rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counter clockwise and the third button will reset the zoom of the image to fit your editor width When this button has been clicked Scrivener will attempt to keep the image at the editor s width even if it changes until you use the slider or its buttons 14 3 2 Viewing PDFs New in 1 7 The PDF view is displayed when a PDF document is selected You can control the display of the PDF document via the controls provided at the bottom of the editor in the footer bar and with the contextual menu a The total page count along with a page selector lets you skip from page to page with the arrow buttons or jump directly to a page by typing it in You can also use the keyboard to navigate within the PDF in an inuitive fashion with PgUp LeftArrow PgDwn RightArrow Home End and the UpArrow and DownArrow keys to incrementally scroll by line The zoom setting for the PDF is next to the page control When fit to width is in use a zoom level will be selected for you keeping the PDF from requiring horizontal scrolling to see the entire page Fit to height will keep one page height in view within the editor The next button will toggle the visibility of the PDF s built in table of contents Not every PDF comes with contents and this button will be disabled if none is found z
430. termined on the corkboard if the index card appears as a stack of cards and in the outliner if it has an arrow beside its name you can choose to open it as a corkboard either in the current editor or the other split This command is essentially a macro for selecting the container and all of its children at once producing a flat corkboard in Multiple Selection mode While this view can not be used to make edits to the structure you d want to use the Outliner for that it is a handy way of viewing all cards downward from a certain point On Editor Corkboard Replaces the current editor view with the selected item s contents This is similar to pressing Shift O to open selected cards on the corkboard only it also will add all of their descendants to the corkboard as well On Other Editor Corkboard As with above but uses the split editor to open the item instead of replacing the current view creating a split if necessary in External Editor Ctrl F5 This command is available on any type of item that is not a text or folder document It will open the file using the default editor for that type of file An example would be opening a PDF in Adobe Reader Opening items this way allows them to be edited in their native applications and the results of those edits if Scrivener can display the file type will be visible upon saving that file Original URL in Browser When used from an archived web page that you have imported this co
431. tes how easy it is to move material in and out of the drafting area as well as the fact that you can use a view mode to help organise your material in the Binder In larger projects the Binder might become quite large so remember this trick as it can make moving items from one remote section of the Binder to another very easy As you learn more about the program you ll find other ways to specify content as being meta to the draft manuscript itself even while leaving it in the Draft Hopefully by now you can see the relationship between index cards the binder and the text within the items in the binder a bit better Feel free to play around with things a bit more before proceeding to the next step Working with Existing Material Likely you already have content from an existing work in progress you would like to bring into Scrivener for your first project While 40 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR the methods described here could certainly help you with that you might find the Documents Split gt sub menu to be even more useful in converting a long document into an agile outline For more information on this technique explore Splitting The Document section 15 3 3 6 6 Compiling the Draft We ve only scratched the surface of what can be done but before ending this tour we ll look at one more thing compiling Compile is Scrivener s terminology for what most applications refer to as Exporting This name was chosen to reflect the fac
432. tes itself rather you define ranges of text that you want to be exported as footnotes Thus when the text in Scrivener is exported to RTF format and opened in a compliant word processor it will take on the familiar appearance of a numeral reference linked to a line at the bottom of the page with a matching numeral Footnotes will also be exported in a variety of fashions for other formats as well such as eBooks MultiMarkdown syntax and therefore as proper footnotes in LaTeX as look alike footnotes in HTML and plain text amongst others For all options available read Footnotes Comments section 23 12 17 1 3 Finding Inline Notation Scrivener provides tools for stepping through your entire project searching for annota tions and footnotes Read more about this feature in Find by Format and Text Function subsection 20 1 4 17 2 Linked Notation Creating and reviewing linked notation is made very simple with Scrivener s innovative sidebar approach Unlike methods which use the margin areas beside the text to display 17 2 LINKED NOTATION 167 the note or typesetting driven methods which attempt to display a footnote exactly as it will appear in print linked notes give you the power of placing meta text outside of the base text while presenting this information in a stack which while ordered as they appear in the document does not otherwise reflect the spatial distance between notes This means a footnote on page 12 will appear
433. text files with 1 000 words each the folder s row will display 5 000 in the Total Word Count column Word Count za Character Count Total Word Count Total Character Count Further options from general meta data the checkboxes displayed in these columns are directly linked to their respective options in the Inspector general meta data section z Include in Compile a Page Break Before Compile As Is Targets and progress tracking as with statistics these show target tracking information for each item in the outliner The Progress column shows a 0 100 progress percentage bar in like fashion with the progress metre in the Footer Bar section 14 2 Target Target Type Progress Any custom meta data fields you have created will be listed at the bottom of the menu as well 12 3 PROJECT NOTES 113 12 3 Project Notes As your project begins to take shape you will no doubt have many ideas that you wish to capture but nowhere concrete to put them yet Documents all have a separate note pane which can be accessed in the Inspector section 18 4 but if you don t even have a stable outline built yet there are no documents to put notes within There are a number of ways you could approach this problem such as keeping notes as documents in the Research folder or somewhere else outside of the Draft or even in the Draft with their respective Include in Compile flags disabled You might also find
434. th the file on the disk Reveal in Windows Explorer Opens a new window in your computer s file manager with the linked image highlighted in the window Open in External Editor The file will be opened directly off of the disk using the sys tem s default image editor This will edit the original file since it is merely linked into Scrivener 15 3 EDITING WITH SCRIVENER 137 Scrivener Link Selections Open Document Link In gt This command only appears when right clicking on a sin gle Scrivener Link where only that link is selected and no extra text around it This is most easily accomplished by right clicking on the link itself the selection will ex pand to include the full link range automatically The contextual sub menu gives you a few extra options for where the link should be opened letting you override your application default as set in the Navigation WIN optionsMAC preference tab subsection B 4 4 Tables Contextual Menu When right clicking within a table in the editor additional options will be provided in the Tables sub menu Insert Table Inserts a new table into the currently selected table cell creating a nested table Table Properties Accesses the table palette which provides formatting cell dimen sion and nesting Add Row Above Below Will insert a new table row of empty cells above or below the row in which you right clicked Add Column Before After Inserts a new table column of empty cells t
435. that corkboard is displaying a single folder not a multiple selection Items will be alphanumerically either in Ascending or Descending order Note that this a permanent change that cannot be undone Additionally you can choose to shuffle all of the children randomly Convert gt Provides tools for converting the document s type writing mode or format defaults Convert to Folder File Converts the selected item s to folders or files Note that these two types are very similar in Scrivener so this tool makes it easy to change your mind later about whether or not something should be a folder ora file This can also be done by right clicking on an item in the binder z Formatting to Default Text Style If the font and ruler styles of the document do not conform to the application or project defaults you can use this command to use those to reset its appearance Read more about Resetting Formatting subsection 15 4 4 296 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Favorites gt Provides commands to manage your favourite documents and folders Fa vorites will be displayed in various places around the interface particularly in item selection menus such as View Go To at the top of the list Read more about Using Favourites section 9 5 Add to Favorites Adds the selected item s to the favorite list Can be used from either the text editor the document you are currently editing will be the tar get in S
436. that if necessary Or if you just want the data try exporting the outliner to a spreadsheet compatible file section 24 4 25 4 Print Preview The standard printing features discussed so far can all be previewed prior to actually printing by using the File Print Preview menu command or by pressing Ctrl G Ctrl R on your keyboard If you are looking for a way to preview the compiled draft you should use the PDF compile format and view the PDF in a reader You can then either print from the PDF reader if the result is desirable or return to the compile interface to tweak your settings and try again The provided screenshot depicts a sample of what printing from a corkboard might look like as simulated 3x5 index cards Figure 25 1 Along the top of the window are 25 5 PRINTING THE DRAFT 269 various control buttons Some of these will impact the print output itself while others merely impact the display window for your convenience 1 Zoom display controls these do not impact the output they only adjust the display settings within the window itself The first two buttons will attempt to resize the pages to fit the window either by width as shown in the screenshot or by both width and height whichever edge is longer You can also manually adjust the zoom percentage in the text box to the right of these buttons or click the magnifying glass buttons to decrease and increase the zoom level respectively 2 Paper orientation
437. the Project Notes tool to be useful as it is accessible from every where in the program Project notes like document notes are a rich text field That means you can format within them however you please even drag pictures into them Project notes can have different styling than document notes making it easy to tell which you are currently viewing or editing These can be set up in the Appearance options tab section B 2 Their primary advantage is that they can be viewed from the Inspector no matter what you are viewing and even make an appearance when what you are viewing what would ordinarily have no Inspector data like the Draft or Research folders Project Notes and Exporting Project notes are not set up to be easily exported There is no way to compile them at all without copying and pasting their contents into a Binder document Document notes can be included in various compile options but project notes cannot nor can they be exported via any menu commands So use project notes only for things which are strictly internal to the project If you intend to export or compile notes at some point it might be easier to take the original suggestion of using documents in the binder For a simple example open the inspector if necessary click the blue 1 button in the toolbar or press Ctrl Shift and click on the Draft folder The inspector will be replaced by a single pane titled Project Notes if that didn t happen you mi
438. the current find term copying it into the Find text field even if the find panel is closed Jump to Selection Cirl Shift Space Will scroll the editor view so that your cur sor position is centred on the page Useful if you have used the scrollbar to briefly check other areas of the text Project Replace Shows the Project Replace dialogue which allows you to re place text throughout the whole project This operation cannot be undone use with care Project Search Ctrl G Ctrl S Provides a shortcut for the toolbar Project Find tool If the toolbar has been hidden a separate window will be opened up for your convenience Both of these tools are quite powerful and have a wide range of options Please read Searching and Replacing section 20 1 for more information on how to use them Find by Formatting Ctrl F3 Opens the Find by Formatting panel This tool is quite powerful and has a wide range of options please see Find by Format subsection 20 1 4 for full documentation 282 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Find Next Previous Formatting Ctrl Shift F3 Ctrl Alt F3 As with Find Next and Find Previous will let you jump from match to match within a single document even without the Find by Formatting panel open Character Map Loads the standard character map utility which allows full access to the Unicode character set Use this to insert characters that are not found on your keyboard
439. the documents as they appear in the binder 3 Notes any inspector note fields that are attached to documents 4 Synopses the text content of each index card 5 Project notes any project notes will be impacted as well 20 1 4 Find by Format and Text Function The Formatting Finder palette Edit Find Find by Formatting Ctrl F3 gathers together a number of powerful project wide search tools for otherwise difficult to locate things such as italicised text cross links annotations amp footnotes and so on The basic panel has a drop down menu at the top which is the primary formatting mode selector Below that there are two common tools to all modes Containing text Limits the search to only return results in which the specified text falls within the formatted range Search in There are two choices available All Documents will search all text docu ments in the binder even outside of the Draft Selected Documents will con strict the search to only those items you have currently selected in the sidebar or a view If you leave all of the criteria types empty it is possible to use this panel to find all instances of the particular formatting type 198 CHAPTER 20 WRITING TOOLS The rest of the panel will change depending upon the current formatting mode As with the standard text Find panel it can be left floating over the project window as you click the Next and Previous buttons allowing you to edit immediately aft
440. the list of favourites is easy to do Simply select the item in the binder and right click on it to view its contextual menu At the bottom of the menu there will be two options Add to Favorites Adds the selected document s to the favourite list Remove from Favorites Removes the selected document s from the favourite list z To clear all assignments use the Documents Favorites Clear Favorites menu command 86 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING 9 5 3 Managing Favourites Favourites can be managed centrally using the Documents Favorites Manage Fa vorites menu command You can drag items from the Binder into this floating win dow or use the button along the bottom to remove selected items that have fallen in disfavour Items can be dragged around to change their order in this window This will also im pact the order in which they appear in the various menus where favourites are included 9 6 Layouts Panel The Layouts panel allows you to save different layout set ups and load them again easily For instance in the early stages you might focus on a large corkboard without any other interface to get in the way as structure starts to emerge you may have the binder open with the corkboard in the top editor and text in the bottom editor whilst composing you may have only the text open with the binder inspector and toolbar hidden By using the Layouts panel to save different layouts you can switch betwe
441. the login name for your computer account If the tag appears in uppercase the user s name will be uppercased too lt forename gt Gets replaced with the user s forename or firstname name during the Compile process If the tag appears in uppercase the forename will be uppercased too lt surname gt Gets replaced with the user s surname or last name during the Compile process If the tag appears in uppercase the surname will be uppercased too Appendix E Tips and Tricks and Trouble E 1 Getting Support As a registered user of Scrivener you are eligible to receive technical support for any enquiries you may have from problems to general questions You are also invited to participate in our discussion forums where a vibrant community of other Scrivener users can often offer advice and help For all avenues of support please visit our main support web page for details on where to proceed and which e mail address to use E 2 Troubleshooting E 2 1 FAQ For an up to date Frequently Asked Questions list visit our knowledge base E 2 2 Project Search doesn t find text it otherwise should Scrivener keeps a search index of everything you import or create in your project This makes searching speedy and efficient but it also means that in some rare cases the search index can become desynchronised from the actual material in your project This usu ally happens when the project file has been manipulated from outs
442. the manual command to create a new backup file at a location of your choosing Frequent use of this feature will help safeguard your work in progress and it is recom mended that you start forming a habit of making backups whenever a decent amount of work has been committed to the project 7 8 BACKING UP YOUR WORK 57 7 8 4 Restoring from Backups In the unfortunate event that a backup is needed to fix a problem with your current working project restoring couldn t be easier As noted previously backups are by default just Zip archived projects a compression format that is natively supported by all modern operating systems They are compression aside no different from the project you work with on a daily basis though they will be successively older revisions and therein lies their power The only other thing that makes them special is that they are tucked away in a safe out of the way place to help avoid being inadvertently modified If you are unsure of where your backups are located you can always open the folder they are stored in by opening the Backup tab in Tools Options and clicking the button at the bottom Open backup folder to reveal them What are Zip files and how do I use them Zip files are a container file format You can think of container files as being a bit like boxes You can stuff other things into a box tape it up and store it in the attic It takes up less space and protects the things inside the bo
443. theme especially useful as you are unlikely ever to use the name of a theme directly in the text itself You can associate keywords with documents to help you find them when performing a project search Use the plus and minus buttons in the header bar above the keywords table to add and remove keywords or you can drag words and phrases from text to the keywords table to create a new keyword You can also use the Project Keywords win dow which stores a repository of all keywords used in the project to assign keywords by dragging them from the project keywords into the keywords table in the inspector this is an easy way to add several keywords at once There are several ways to add new keywords to your document 1 Drag the keyword s from the Keywords panel to keywords table in the inspector Useful for adding multiple keywords to an item at once 2 Drag the keyword s from the Keywords panel to the name of an item in the binder corkboard or outliner view If multiple items are selected then they will all have the keyword selection assigned to them 178 CHAPTER 18 INSPECTOR 3 Click the button in the keywords table header bar to type in a new keyword 4 Using the gear menu in the keywords table header bar to access the Add Keyword menu which will contain a sorted list of all keywords in the project Keywords panel Keywords can be unassigned from a document by selecting them in the keywords table and clicking the button or
444. these levels correspond with They are matched with the indent level of items in your binder An example binder structure has been inset in the example with the items named to indicate how they correlate to levels in the Formatting pane Items directly beneath the Draft are considered to be Level 1 a child item beneath one of those is Level 2 and so on The way Scrivener s formatting engine works is by applying a format to the maximum depth in your draft outline Inserting rules will thus only apply to those levels which it states in the label In the provided example I ve added a checkbox to insert Meta Data creation and modification dates labels any custom meta data and so forth to any folders at level two or deeper Folders directly descendant from the Draft will only print their titles in the compiled document but all folders at level two or greater will also print their meta data 242 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT To remove a level based row you can select it and click the button to the right of the Add formatting level button There are other buttons and options in this table but before we take a look at them let s examine the formatting editor 23 8 2 Formatting Editor The formatting editor view is linked with the structure table above it When you select a row in that table you are also looking at the format for that row as well Thus each type of binder item can have its own formatting rules
445. times no project should ever be opened more than once The primary difference in appearance between the two platforms is that Windows does not have a package or bundle format like the Mac does Thus the Scrivener project will appear in its ordinary state which is a folder This is invisible to a Mac user but in fact there is no difference between the two To open a project on the Mac you need only double click the MyProject scriv project bundle or open it from within Scrivener On Windows this will be a folder so you will need to descend into the MyProject scriv folder and select or double click on the MyProject scrivx file that you will find at the top level within that folder To transfer projects between computers always make sure to copy the entire MyPro ject scriv folder from Windows not just the scrivx file by itself the entire folder is your project gt On a Ma it is important to note that only Scrivener version 2 x and greater is cross platform compat ible If you intend to use the Windows version as well to edit your projects you should consider upgrading to the latest version Chapter 8 Setting Up the Binder This chapter will go over the various aspects of the binder and how to best use Scrivener s features to structure navigate around in edit and write your draft Scrivener does some things which are unusual and generally restricted to high powered expensive applica
446. ting New Preset From Selection You will be presented with a sheet that will let you name the new style choose whether it will impact character attributes paragraph styles or both and optionally if font settings should be stored as well If you do not want the preset to change the underlying font family or size then make sure these checkboxes are disabled Once a name has been added to the sheet you will be able to save the preset for future use It will appear in the Format Bar menu as well as in the application menus Modifying a Preset To modify an existing preset 148 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING 1 Apply the preset to some sample text and then modify the styling of this text in the editor using the standard formatting tools 2 With the cursor still located within the sample text use the For mat gt Formatting gt Redefine Preset from Selection sub menu to select the preset you wish to modify You will be presented with the same sheet you used to create the preset only the information you saved into it will be pre populated into the sheet In most cases you will not need to change anything here and can just submit the form to apply the formatting changes you ve made If you do wish to change the parameters of how much the style operates you can make these changes to the sheet or even change the name of it If you wish to create a derivative instead of replacing an existing preset use the preset to style your t
447. ting and pasting text into and out of notations try to think of them as analogous to bold text To paste some external text into a note you ll need to use Paste and Match Style for the text to acquire the notation formatting The same is true 17 1 INLINE NOTATION 165 going in other direction Additionally ranges can be toggled on and off for a section of text just as you could with an italic range How you interface with inline annotations and footnotes is identical at the writing phase Since inline notation works just like ordinary formatting creating a note or foot note from existing text is as easy as selecting the range of text you wish to adjust and clicking on the appropriate menu command or toolbar icon To create an annotation you can use Format Inline Annotation or press Ctrl Shift A on your keyboard As with other formatting tools this works in a toggle fashion If you select some text that is al ready set to be an annotation and use this command it will be returned to regular text For footnotes everything is the same just use Format gt Inline Footnote or Ctrl Shift F To create a new footnote or annotation from text that does not yet exist you can use these same commands to start typing in the desired notation mode wherever your cursor is placed in the editor Moving notes around is a simple matter of cutting and pasting the text itself Since notations are formatting they will move along with the text no matter wher
448. ting of the FDX file Now that this is set up you are ready to import the contents of the FDX file To save the format for future use in other projects use the same Manage drop down menu to select Save for use with other projects The imported script format will now appear in the main Format gt Scriptwriting gt sub menu for all projects 19 4 CREATING YOUR OWN SCRIPT FORMATS 185 19 3 2 Importing FDX Files You can import FDX files into Scrivener using the standard file import methods drag and drop into the project binder or with File Import gt Files If you wish the FDX file to be part of the script that will eventually be exported be sure to import it into the Draft folder or drag it there after importing 19 3 3 Exporting Individual Documents to FDX To export individual scripting documents to Final Draft just select the documents you want to export in the binder and then go to File Export Files Select Final Draft FDX as the export format The exported file should open in Final Draft with all features intact More commonly you will want to combine all of the scripting documents in the Draft folder of your project into one FDX file 1 Go to File Compile 2 Select Final Draft FDX as the file format 3 You may need to tweak the various settings of the Compile Draft sheet to get the script formatted correctly just as you would with any Scrivener project 4 Click on
449. ting without affecting the original thus making it easy to export a manuscript in a format suitable for an editor and then export it just as easily in a format more suited to publishing on the internet There should be a synopsis linked with each document that can be viewed with other synopses to get an overview of the project as a whole z Linked to the above it should be easy to view the project as an outline and use drag and drop to restructure the project Moving between the outline and the text itself should be fluid z It should be possible to view individual documents either as discrete chunks of text or combined with other arbitrary documents Thus for instance a chapter could be viewed as a whole or each scene could be viewed individually z The user should be able to view more than one document at the same time for instance the end of one chapter alongside the beginning of the next a character 4 CHAPTER 1 PHILOSOPHY sketch alongside a scene in which that character appears or a research document alongside the writing it is being used to support The software should be capable of storing and displaying common research docu ments because writers do not just use text they also refer to images web pages recorded interviews and other media The overriding philosophy behind Scrivener was in part inspired by a passage written by the author Hilary Mantel in a collection of essays by writers on the
450. tion Controls The next portion of the contextual menu mimics the page naviga tion buttons in the footer bar as described in the prior section They are provided here as well for accessibility Find The standard Scrivener text find tool will not work within PDF documents In stead you must use this contextual menu to search for text within PDFs This is a temporary solution The ability to search within PDFs using the standard shortcut will be added in the future Zoom Display Controls The next portion of the contextual menu contains controls for adjusting the display of PDF You can also zoom in and out with the keyboard using Ctrl and Ctrl Hyphen respectively Single Page Displays only one page of content in the viewer at a time This option can increase performance on older computers It also provides finer control when using the scrollbar particularly in very long PDFs Single Page Continuous Displays the entire PDF file as a long strip of pages one after the other This provides the smoothest reading experience as you do not have to manually flip between pages and can just use the scroll bar or mouse wheel instead If you experience slow performance switch to Single Page view instead 128 CHAPTER 14 THE EDITOR Rotation PDF pages can be rotated left or right The display of pages will always be stacked vertically so rotate only changes the pages orientation within their respec tive boundaries Invert Colors All col
451. tions of the import feature If you do not wish to view this warning every time you import files be sure to check Do not show this warning again When importing text documents they are internally converted to the RTF format so that Scrivener can work with them easily again note that this has no effect on the 98 11 1 FILE IMPORT 99 original file on your disk only on the copy that is made inside the Scrivener project during the import process This can cause some loss of data for some file types or documents with complex embedded data like Excel spreadsheets When using the import menu items material will be imported according to where the current binder selection is set If you have a line selected in the binder the material will be inserted between the selected line and the one below it If more than one item is selected the last item in top down fashion will be used as the insertion point This means that some forms of import will be disabled depending on where your selection is If your selection is in the Draft you will be unable to import media of any kind if your selection is in the Trash all importing will be disabled The only exception to this is importing another Scrivener project These ignore binder selection and create top level items and or folders at the bottom of your binder When using drag and drop the dropped material will be placed wherever the insertion indicator in the binder shows If you try to drag
452. tly in the binder select all of the imported items and use the Documents Merge menu command to concatenate them into a single document in the Binder 3 If a Scapple document is dragged into the Binder excluding the Draft it will im ported as a file rather than as notes You can now open it as you would any other unsupported media format via the Documents Open in External Editor menu command or clicking the application icon in the footer bar of the editor This will be the most useful choice if the contents of your planning session are not meant to form a literal foundation for the work you will be doing in Scrivener but rather as a reference to build from 11 2 Linking to Files on Your Computer It is possible to link to files rather than import them directly into the project In order to reduce confusion in the binder linked items cannot be directly placed into the binder They must be inserted into the references table for another item A common tactic is to use the typical filing card system whereby you create an index card describing the material and then link to it and any other relevant files in its references To read more about references see References section 18 5 http www literatureandlatte com scapple php 11 3 SCRATCH PAD PANEL 103 11 3 Scratch Pad Panel The scratch pad is a universal Scrivener tool that is not tied to any particular project You can use it to jot down notes that don t fit anywhe
453. to another computer use the Save to file option as well as this one 19 5 USING SCRIPT FORMATTING FOR OTHER PURPOSES 191 19 5 Using Script Formatting for Other Purposes While the Scriptwriting mode has been preconfigured and designed for scriptwriting it deserves to be mentioned that it is at its heart nothing more than an automated styling engine This means it can be used for a variety of purposes having nothing to do with scriptwriting For instance you could use it to aid in the transcription of an interview By setting up formatting elements for each participant in the conversation you could easily attribute each portion of text to the appropriate speaker and if the interview is a back and forth between two individuals you could even set it up to alternate back and forth between speakers whenever you press return If you need to create a structural document and cascading between structural types would be of benefit then consider using the Scriptwriting engine to create you own format from scratch Chapter 20 Writing Lools 20 1 Searching and Replacing There are three primary tools for searching for items in a project Project searching has numerous options for searching for particular types of information like say searching just in synopses and will always scan the entire project for matches Document search ing is more familiar in that it provides a Search and Replace window that will act on the current tex
454. to remain clickable after compiling with PDF you will need to have Microsoft Word 2007 2013 installed and set your PDF export options to use Microsoft Word converters in the Import Export options tab subsection B 8 3 See Also Compiling the Draft chapter 23 Linking Documents Together section 9 4 Chapter 23 Compiling the Dratt The main purpose of Scrivener is to provide a place that will help you write a long piece of text whether novel thesis or factual book which may be structured as individual pieces in the binder but which can easily be output as one large file for working with the rest of the world Thus you write gather and organise the material for your manuscript in the Draft folder and when you are ready to export or print the manuscript as a whole you use File Compile Ctrl Shift E which takes the contents of the Draft folder formats it as you specify and outputs or prints it as a single document Using the various settings available you can export or print your texts however you like even regardless of how the files are formatted in Scrivener itself Compile settings are an intrinsic part of your project they re just as much a part of it as any folder or file in your binder They will be saved with the project and travel with it if you move it to another machine or share it with a collaborator The available compile presets which will be discussed shortly are global to your mach
455. to reset the value to off or use the Documents Convert Formatting to Default Text Style menu command to clean up large amounts of text at once Ruler Conversions When working with units in Scrivener keep in mind that its ruler starts at margin zero instead of paper zero Since Scrivener is by and large not aware of paper settings and page layout it counts its ruler settings from the beginning of the text on the left end of the page not the beginning of the paper itself This is in contrast to many word processors which start measuring at the paper left edge and show the print margin buffer in the display of the page Consequently to convert most standard measurements to useful values here you will need to factor in the standard amount of print margin by adding in the margin to the value you see in the ruler For example if you are using 1 margins and you need a right indent of 1 the right indent should be set at 5 5 for US Letter not the standard 6 5 Optimally your formatting can be deferred and set in the compiler where formatting and paper dimensions can be operated upon in concert Using tab stops while writing is as simple as pressing the tab key to advance to the next available stop Tabs allow you to enter tabular information into a single line without using tables To remove a tab from the line simply delete it as you would any other character Tabs can be viewed as symbols with Format Options Show
456. to set the font size in points Style Provides a number of options for determining the appearance of the current ele ment mostly self explanatory 2 All caps If this is checked the element will be capitalised If End of line is selected the element will be capitalised all the way to the end of the element for the purposes of this definition a paragraph is a line If First tab is se lected the element will be capitalised only up to the first tab character This accommodates formats such as the UK stage play format which has character names and dialogue on the same line with character names in capital letters followed by a tab and dialogue in normal sentence case If Character s is selected you can enter the keyboard characters into the text field that will terminate capitalisation For instance if you entered a colon in the text field the element would only be capitalised up to the first colon z Underline allows you to set the underline style for the current element Colour and Adornment Set the text colour used for this element in the text editor or automatically add parentheses around the text you enter 2 Parenthetical encloses the current element in brackets when you select that type Color The text falling within the range of this elements definition will be recoloured as specified here To change the colour click on the chip and select a colour using the palette Menu shortcut Enter the sing
457. to the outliner and will appear in the Custom Meta Data pane of the inspector Meta Data Title Wrap Text Colored Text Title Publication Date Author Abstract m Use the color picker to set the text color i Figure 10 1 Project Custom Meta Data Setup Tab Custom Meta Data Pane section 18 7 for information on using meta data in the Inspector Managing Columns subsection 12 2 1 for details on how to add columns to your Outliner view Managing Custom Meta Data Custom field management is done in the Custom Meta Data tab within the Project Meta Data Settings window For each column you wish to add press the button Figure 10 1 and supply a field title which will be displayed as a header for each text block in the respective Inspector pane or a column header in the outliner Each field has two options Wrap Text Useful for fields where you want to display all of the entered text even if that text causes the row to expand in height in the outliner Unwrapped columns will 94 CHAPTER 10 SETTING UP META DATA only ever show the first line of text unless you edit the field This holds true for the inspector pane as well unless you choose to wrap all fields regardless of their settings Colored Text When checked the colour selection tool at the bottom will be enabled allowing you to customise the text colour fo
458. ts It is now simply an parallel format on equal footing with the rest It is however still used as a base format if you invoke the XSLT post processing switch in the Compatibility option pane The default output will be basic HTML If you wish to supply CSS to the document you can do so with the CSS meta data key specifying a file or URL or type one in manually into the HTML Header key which can also be used to add Javascript and other functionality to the document 21 5 5 ODF Flat ODT If you need your work to enter a standard word processor workflow this will be your go to method MultiMarkdown s ODF support is comprehensive supporting most data types and will utilise stylesheets meaning the document can be easily adjusted aesthet ically and use the table of contents feature of a word processor It represents the only output method in Scrivener that offers this support making MMD an enticing option for those who do not mind learning how to use it if they need stylesheet driven word processor documents The OpenDocument Format is an open specification office format and specifically the ODT format within this specification is for word processing OpenOffice and the many forks off of it is one of the few word processors that fully addresses the format Multi Markdown uses the flat XML variant of ODT which has the extension of fodt At the time of this writing LibreOffice an OpenOffice fork offers the best support f
459. ts and with projects over 100 000 words you ll need to manually update the printed page count to avoid lengthy waits whenever the tool is used To get word character paragraph and line counts for the current document and a breakdown of word frequency the number of times you use different words select the Project Text Statistics menu command this will only be available if a text document has the keyboard focus When using Scrivenings mode the full word count will be tabulated not just the section you are currently editing z To set a target word or character count and track your progress for the entire draft or the current writing session select Project Project Targets z To set a target word or character count and track your progress for a single doc ument click on the target button in the bottom right of the footer view this is not available in scriptwriting mode though where word and character counts are rarely useful anyway See information on the footer bar for more information Tracking a group of documents together as a cohesive unit like say a sequence of sections and sub sections within a chapter folder tracking the latter folder as what you want to have a goal on you can use the Outliner to view the Total Progress and Total Goal columns to aggregate statistics for group of documents Setting a target on the chapter folder will even if it has no text itself work as an aggregate since it will be inc
460. ts including the transfer of infor mation into and out of them either manually with import amp export or automatically with backups If a function will work with the content of an editor window either pas sively or to manipulate it directly then chances are it will be located in the Edit menu Examples would be copying text inserting an equation checking spelling or searching for all bold phrases in the text For adjusting how the project window looks and feels as well as nav igating or changing what you are viewing within the content of the project The features here are not strictly aesthetic and many work di rectly with project content itself such as the View Go To sub menu Other features are simply concerned with the control of window fea tures such as View Media Rewind or the appearance of things as in View Corkboard Options Cards Across gt Settings and features specific to the project are gathered in this menu This is also where content can be created and is distinct from the File menu in that the File menu is concerned with creating new content in the project based off of existing data on your disk such as importing a picture The Project menu is for creating brand new content This menu concerns the management of existing documents as well as direct navigation based off of a selection of documents It is distinct from View menu navigation which is concerned with more abstract naviga tion
461. tton More details on the functions available in the inspector can be found in Snapshots Pane section 18 8 15 7 AUTO COMPLETION 155 15 7 Auto Completion There are three forms of auto completion in Scrivener Character substitution Adjustments made to the characters as you type them in such as setting quotes to typographer s curly or smart quotes as they are alterna tively called or adjusting stand alone 1 s at the start of a sentence to capital form Word and phrase completion As you type you can have Scrivener suggest words for you either automatically or with a shortcut the default custom phrases can be added to each project such as proper nouns or frequently used scientific terms Separate from the project phrase list you can also auto complete based on existing title names from the binder Scriptwriting abbreviations Common scriptwriting abbreviations such as O C Ext and so on can be suggested as you type These are generally defined in the script formatting definition Format Scriptwriting gt Script Settings 15 7 1 Character Substitutions With character substitutions you can set which characters will be replaced as you type Scrivener uses a combination of built in enhancements plus a customisable substitution engine These can all be set in the Auto Correction options tab section B 6 Each option is documented more fully there These adjustments always happen automaticall
462. tton which will generate an icon file for you based on the currently selected thumbnail After you have edited this image in your favourite image editor and saved it as a graphic file you can use the drop down menu to select Custom and choose the saved file from your computer After clicking OK the template will be saved into the system and you can delete the original project or continue working in it without affecting the template Updating Templates To update a template which has already been saved follow the above instructions to create a new project using the template you wish to alter make any changes you wish and then choose File Save As Template All of the information from the original template will be filled in for you so you do not have to worry about replicating this information every single time If you do not need to make any changes here just click the OK button and then Yes to confirm that you wish to update the existing template Note that after you have created a project from a template the two have no further connection Thus existing projects that you created from a template will not be modified to reflect changes made to the template Likewise if you have created a project purely to update a template there is no need to keep the project around after that point as allowing the project to auto save will not automatically update the template you must choose Save As Template again Built in templates canno
463. tty much the same thing it s yet another demonstration of how you can work fluidly now and worry about details later Let s move the folder text into a new child document with the After Math item selected in the Binder press Ctrl N which is another way to create new documents When a folder is selected in the Binder new documents will automatically be assigned to it as children you may need to expand the folder in the Binder by clicking the little triangle to the left of its name to see the newly created document Call this new document Scene A and then click on After Math again to select the folder and view it as a Scrivenings session Scrivener always remembers the last view mode you used Since we switched to viewing items as Scrivenings the project will go on working that way until we switch it to something else such as the default Corkboard The first line of text you typed will be visible above the divider line we want to move it below the divider line moving it into Scene A You can select paragraphs in Scrivener by triple clicking anywhere within them Try that now and then cut and paste the text below the divider Notice that the page icon badge in the Binder has been removed from the folder and the Scene A icon now has a page of typed text in it Once again anything you do in a Scrivenings session is instantly made to the underlying sections it represents No doubt you can see that Scrive
464. tus icon as all other functions with Drop box can be accessed Pausing syncing means that all changes made to the Dropbox folder will not be immediately synced to the server Thus there is no need to mess with changing the auto save frequency and it keeps your entire working session in one version within the Dropbox system Of course you will need to remember to resume syncing prior to shutting down the system If you follow these three simple rules you will dramatically decrease the chance of any strange conflicts arising due to working in a live syncing folder with Scrivener As with all synchronisation technology it is inherently less safe than working local and saving remote It is possible to work safely for years in this fashion but extra vigilance will be required of you and everyone participating in the shared project While this section has primarily focussed on Dropbox as a means for keeping your project files synchronised between computers There are many technologies for doing so these days If you have another solution you are using and prefer test its viability with copies of your project or test projects prior to committing important work to it A note on using such sharing services for collaboration while it is possible for multiple parties to work off of a single scriv file hosted on a shared network folder extra caution will need to be exercised in order to keep the project data safe At the very least this se
465. u sections Table A 1 In this way you can try to track down a feature as you might in a topical thesaurus A l File Menu The File menu contains everything that handles creating files on your computer includ ing creating new projects saving backing up importing and exporting It also deals with printing and project specific settings New Project Ctrl G Ctrl N New Project creates a new Scrivener project This will bring up the New Project and template selection window see Quick Tour chap ter 6 which will walk you through creating a new project which will be saved as a scriv folder on disk and in the directory that you specify such as Documents or Desktop Open Cirl O Open allows you to open a pre existing scrivx file on your hard disk Note that Scrivener cannot open read only files directly such as those that have been backed up to a CD ROM and will give you the opportunity to save the project to an area where you have permission to save files Recent Projects Here you can select and open projects that have recently been opened in Scrivener you can also specify in the General options tab section B 1 whether Scrivener will reopen all projects that were open in a previous session when it is launched 272 A l FILE MENU Menu Title Table A 1 Menu Organisation Purpose of Menu File Edit View Project Documents Format Tools Window Help Concerning the management of projec
466. u with our Science Fiction themed interface In addition we expect these languages to be ready soon French Spanish ze Russian Polish If you have translation experience and would like to see your language available in Scrivener please contact lee literatureandlatte com Chapter 6 Quick Tour Before going over this section it is suggested that you skim through the prior chapter introducing the interface if you haven t done so already This chapter will get you up and running with a simple sample project and will in troduce a few of the most basic concepts you ll need in order to start working in thirty minutes or less Scrivener is a complex program with a lot of potential depth but we hope this section will demonstrate that despite this it is also very straightforward and intuitive so its complexity can be gradually learned as required There is often a tempta tion to dive in and learn as much as possible about a new tool but if you are here for the same reason as most people who ve picked up this software it is because you are serious about writing and so the most important thing this manual can do is get you doing that as quickly as possible in a fashion which is not too dissimilar from what you may already be used to We will go over the following tasks Creating a new project from a blank template a Navigating the binder and adding new documents to the Draft folder Working with the corkb
467. u you can see a list of all the different script formats that are available Scrivener comes with the following formats built in Screenplay 181 182 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING BBC Radio Scene Style BBC Taped Drama Comic Book Antony Johnston Comic Book Alternative z Stage Play UK Stage Play US You can of course mix up different text modes in the same document or draft so that parts of a document may be written as a script and other parts written as general text This makes it very easy to write treatments in Scrivener or to intersperse general notes with script The screenplay format that comes with Scrivener by default is based on a Hollywood standard but with half an inch added to the left indent of each element so that when you print with a standard set up of one inch margins the left margin will actually start at one and a half inches which is the standard to allow for three hole binding In other words the end result will be accurate even if the numbering by the editor s ruler is slightly off The scriptwriting mode in Scrivener works much like other scriptwriting programs primarily Final Draft On the right end of the footer bar is a drop down menu contain ing the various elements for the selected format Clicking on an element will reformat the current paragraph to the format of the selected element So for instance if you clicked on Character the current paragraph might all be
468. uickLook on a Mac this provides information to the Finder s Quick Look pre view function It gives you a quick overview of the project s contents in an indented outline format Windows does not use this folder and unless you ve opened the project on a Mac you won t see it z Settings project level settings and appearance settings files will be saved into this folder as well as computer specific information used to lock the project while you are editing it Snapshots this optional folder will be used to store snapshots and may not exist until snapshots have been created within the project F 1 The Files Folder This folder contains the following items z binder autosave a redundant backup of your primary scrivx file at the top level If the primary file becomes corrupted or goes missing this can be used in an attempt to recover the project A new copy is created every time Scrivener auto saves z binder backup a third level of backup protection this file is only created after you successfully open a project ensuring that it is a valid copy of the primary scrivx file Docs this folder stores all of your binder data from draft sections to imported material If it is listed in the binder it will be in this folder named according to its internal ID number You can cross reference these ID numbers by reading the scrivx file if necessary z ProjectNotes a folder which stores any project notes you hav
469. unded to the nearest 100 words lt cc500 gt Rounded to the nearest 500 words lt ccl000 gt Rounded to the nearest 1000 words Page Numbers lt p gt When used in the header or footer gets replaced with the current page number There are various placeholder tags you can use to print project and author information during compile Table D 3 In most cases it would be easier to just type this information into the compile settings directly but if you are thinking of sharing your compile settings or creating a project template then placeholders are a great way to set up how a document should compile without using personal information in the settings To customise the information these tags use use the Project Meta Data Settings dialog and click on the Project Properties tab Sensible defaults will be used if these fields are left empty 325 326 APPENDIX D PLACEHOLDER TAGS Table D 2 Auto Number Placeholder Tags Code Description lt n gt Gets replaced with Arabic numerals during the Compile process The number is incremented each time a lt n gt tag is encountered in the text so lt n gt lt n gt lt n gt would become 1 2 3 in the compiled text lt sn gt The same as lt n gt but intended to be used for sub numbering The count restarts each time an lt n gt tag is encountered Thus lt n gt lt sn gt lt sn gt lt n gt lt sn gt lt sn gt would become
470. unted all the way down to the bottom of the outline Paperback Page Count Options Set the counting algorithm used to estimate paper back page counting This figure will be divided from the total word count to pro duce an estimate Read the prior section for details on how this works 20 2 3 Text Statistics The Text Statistics panel can be accessed with Project Text Statistics or Ctrl It is only available when the active editor is displaying text and it will produce statistics for all of the text being displayed even if that editor is currently displaying many documents in a Scrivenings session The types of information it provides are more pertinent to the topology of the text document as opposed to the end product where page counts and paperback estimations come into play In addition to the simple counter statistics you can flip down the Word Frequency chart to display a table of discovered words how often they have been used numerically and graphically how often in comparison with other words in the table These columns can be sorted by clicking on their header fields 20 3 The Name Generator Scrivener comes with an exhaustive name generator which includes many thousands of common names in several languages To access the name generator invoke the Tools Writing Tools gt Name Generator menu command You can adjust how many names will be generated and then click the Generate Names button The available options are
471. ur and highlighters Read more about this feature in Find by Format and Text sec tion 20 1 4 17 5 Text Markings and MultiMarkdown Since MultiMarkdown has scant tools for working with text formatting many of the above marking techniques have no direct analogue with the exception of footnotes In the case of annotations it is possible to use embedded HTML coding to simulate com ments and they will be marked in such a way that it is easy to get both the colour infor mation and the fact that they are comments from an XSLT stylesheet Other markings such as text colour highlighting and revision levels will be completely dropped from the compile 17 5 1 Using Comments with MultiMarkdown Inline annotations can be independently stripped from the document during compile or left in Since there is no direct analogue for comments Scrivener employs the usage of MMD s ability to handle raw HTML coding in the document When using MMD it is possible to pass HTML through the parsing engine so that it lands directly in an HTML document as a final product This behaviour can be disabled in the compile settings and comments will be passed through to the document in the same manner that they are using the plain text export enclosed in markers 17 5 2 Using Footnotes with MultiMarkdown When compiling a draft using MultiMarkdown the compiler can be instructed to pro duce proper footnote syntax for all of your inline footnotes in the proje
472. urce gathering 3 Scrivener s notation features both inline and linked can be used to generate MMD footnotes and optionally its annotations and comments can be inserted into the document as well Inline annotations on their own line not embedded in another paragraph in any way will be exported as DIVs all other annotations and all comments will be exported as SPANSs to preserve the original paragraph flow around the comment 4 Bold and italics cannot be compiled but if you prefer to write using them they can later be converted to MMD asterisks with the Format Convert Bold and Italics to MultiMarkdown Syntax menu command Since rich text formatting can be less precise you should verify that the syntax produced by this command is valid Some of Scrivener s tools which are intended for a rich text workflow have alternate purposes with MultiMarkdown Document Titles in the Compiler Document titles will be converted to MMD syntax While this is rather a function of the compiler which may be set to not include titles rather than the editor it is important to know that your outline structure can still be seamlessly impressed upon the final work as output structure When titles are set use run in formatting so that they appear in the same line as the first paragraph of the text hashmark generation will be disabled 212 CHAPTER 21 USING MULTIMARKDOWN Compile As Is This checkbox in the inspector will protect an entire docum
473. ure 12 1 it is possible to tint the colour of a card based on its label This can be used in addition to or instead of the colour chip in the upper right corner To tint cards by label type use View Use Label Color In Index Cards or the F7 key At its most minimal you ll only see the icon title and synopsis the three core elements that cannot be removed all other items must be enabled in the View Corkboard gt sub menu All of the options you select for corkboard appearance and label tinting will be saved into the project If you prefer a certain look by default consider creating your own custom starter template The icon as you might have guessed correlates directly with the icon that is visible in the binder In most cases this will be one of the variations of a folder or text icon depending on its content status but in some cases it might be a custom icon if you have supplied it with one or if you are viewing a corkboard outside of the Draft it might be some kind of media file icon The title is simply what you would expect it is an editable name of the item as it appears in the binder or in the header bar when you are editing it or view its corkboard The title is also often used by the compiler if it has been set up to consider it but we ll come back to that in a later section The synopsis is meant to be a brief encapsulation of what the document s purpose is but you can use it for whatever you like Some pe
474. urposes and will re quire horizontal scrolling in order to see the entire corkboard contents You can choose any number between 1 and 10 cards across Keyword chips Set the maximum number of keyword colours to be taped to the right side of the index card When a document has more than that amount assigned to it all keywords below the specified point will be ignored You may wish to adjust the Ratio to increase the height of the index card if you want to view large numbers of keyword chips at once Size to fit editor This option is not available when Cards Across is set to Auto When the Cards Across option is set to a number this option will resize the cards to fit the current editor width With this option off the card size option will be used and cards will be forced to wrap at the specified number regardless of the window size Use small font The small font settings can be configured in the Appearance options tab subsection B 2 3 Note that since you have full control over this and the standard index card fonts small fonts might not actually be any smaller than the regular font size 110 CHAPTER 12 PROJECT PLANNING Further Options There are a number of other appearance related preferences that you can set which can dramatically alter the look and feel of the corkboard Most of these options are included in the Corkboard preference tab section B 3 but a few colour related options are also in the Appearance tab
475. ursor is blinking in the text editor and with zero words so far it s time to get to work 6 3 Outlining Your Draft Why do that when we can procrastinate for another minute though Take a look at the binder Let s discuss how best to use Scrivener s Draft folder Unlike a word proces 34 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR File Edit View Project Documents Format Tools Help Me oaR cies s Binder Courie 4 Draft i oO Untitled C5 Research B Trash untitled mB FE 135 S Words 0 Chars 0 Figure 6 2 A typical new blank project sor Scrivener s design philosophy revolves around creating and organising your writing project in arbitrary pieces according to what is most comfortable for you For example you could make a new file for each chapter or take that even further and make a new file for each scene within those chapters It is totally up to you and unlike in most programs you won t be penalised for breaking things down as small as you desire The binder dis plays these pieces like an indented outline It is easy to change your mind later so don t get hung up on which is right that may very well change for each project or as you progress in your familiarity with the program Let s try it If you haven t touched anything yet the cursor should still be blinking in the main text editor if it isn t just click in the middle of this white text area with your mouse Typ
476. used instead when any script formats are chosen and the meta data in cluding the synopsis label status and so on will be exported into separate plain text TXT files The structure of folders created on disk will reflect their structure in the binder so in this way you can export all of your files from Scrivener for use in another application if you so wish or as an archival backup 24 3 Exporting to an Oufliner with OPML Many outliners support a common format known as OPML In a sense it is like RTF in that it is a way for many different programs to communicate with one another and in this case specifically to communicate outlines It can describe headings which are what you see in the Binder as names of items and the relationship between those headings in terms of order and depth There is an additional convention on top of this format which allows for some outlining programs to attach notes to outliner headings Unfortunately this method of attaching notes is not a standard and so support for it may vary in terms of quality and features The good news is that many applications these days do support a notes field Scrivener supports the _notes method for attaching additional data to outliner head ers both on import and export This is optional so if you are having difficulties loading the OPML file in the target software try using Titles only as your export option This mode will adhere to the standa
477. used on many items at once it makes for a handy way to see what isn t in large collections It is possible to select some or all of the items in a collection and instruct Scrivener to gather them all together into one spot based on the order of their appearance in the col lection Select the items you wish to gather together and either use the main application menu or the contextual menu to move them to a selected item or container This action will return you to the Binder with the selection retained Another method is to select all of the items that you wish to collect together and use the Documents Group command to assemble them into a new folder in the Binder You will need to switch back to the Binder to see the grouping Experienced users of outliner style programs will recognise this ability as mark and gather The marking phase is done by assigning documents to a collection Moving them back out to the binder then gathers them quickly into one focussed spot This can be an extremely useful technique for some workflows 72 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER It can also be useful to experiment and implement an experimental text flow If a chapter or section just doesn t seem to flow right you can quickly create a new collection Option drag the container of items to the new tab and then re organise the flow using the collection s ability to view itself as a corkboard or outliner then reviewing the text with scrivenings mod
478. vatives 2008 png into the editor Scrivener will export that graphic into the compile folder subsection 21 5 1 and generate syntax where the position was located like so analysis_of_derivatives 2008 png Then placing a the data for the graphic at the bottom of the compiled document analysis_of_derivatives 2008 png analysis_of_derivatives 2008 png You can thus refer to this figure in another portion of the document with the standard MMD syntax see chart analysis_of_derivatives 2008 png 21 4 2 Footnotes You needn t worry about footnote syntax and identification at all when using Scrivener though if you wish to there is nothing stopping you from typing in the codes yourself You can simply use Scrivener s tools for marking text as footnotes Whether they will ultimately become footnotes or endnotes is not dependent upon anything Scrivener can do but upon the export format s limitations or options Under the hood Scrivener will automatically number your footnotes as they occur in the document and generate the proper MMD syntax for them The placement of the marker in the source text will follow the same rules as standard Scrivener usage Mentally replace the entire inline footnote with the marker to see where it will be placed or the trailing right edge of a linked range 21 4 3 Annotations and Comments For most uses inline annotations will serve much the same purpose when using MMD as they would otherw
479. vides options which impact the display or behaviour or the text editor Show Hide Invisibles Ctrl Shift Toggles visibility of hidden control char acters such as paragraph breaks tabs spaces page breaks and so on A few control characters do not have associated special characters Ghost Notes Mode Ctrl Shift 7 Ghost mode fades out the intensity of inline annotations and footnotes in the text editor making it easier to read around them When a note is clicked into it will temporarily brighten to facilitate editing returning to ghosted mode when you are done Disable this option to have all notes appear at full intensity at all times Typewriter Scrolling Ctrl G Ctrl T Toggle a feature which keeps the currently edited line of text in the middle of the screen vertically centred This setting is global but will impact composition or the regular editors independently depending upon the current mode Bibliography Citations Ctrl G Ctrl O If a citation manager has been set up in the General tab section B 1 of Scrivener s options this command will launch or acti vate the set manager facilitating the process of selecting a citation and paste it back into Scrivener using whatever system that application provides A Z TOOLS MENU 301 A Z Tools Menu Spelling Ctrl C Ctrl Q Shows the main spell checking panel subsection 15 2 3 which can be used to walk through the document looking for errors a
480. wledge that rich text formatting can be altered later on to produce different results Scrivener is not intended to be a full blown word processor but rather a word gener ating environment It is not a layout tool but a tool for cutting the text that will become your book Many authors who have stricter formatting requirements such as scriptwrit ers will start their projects in Scrivener and end in a word processor or desktop publish ing or some other specialised application Someone writing a novel or short story could very well do the whole thing in Scrivener including the final print for submission and export to Word format for sending an electronic copy You might be wondering if Scrivener offers a plain text editing environment as well There is no plain text option as Scrivener is a writer s tool rather than a strict text editor and many of the tools that are made available to you for writing rely upon rich text to function such as highlights and annotating Even if you do not require formatting you will probably find the formatting tools useful in the writing process especially if you are compiling to plain text where they will all be safely stripped out and invisible to the reader Emulating plain text If you find working in a plain text environment to be more productive you may wish to set the default editor font to one that does not support rich text features such as Courier and change the ruler settings so that there ar
481. word processor document at the conclusion of the writing process MMD is something to consider z As already stated MMD supports easy to write TEX document generation With out having to bother with the nitty gritty codes you can produce clean attractive documents using a typesetting system that has been in refinement for nearly thirty years How good are these results Well you re look at an example right now The Scrivener user manual is typeset using this system If you require BTEX documents http fletcherpenney net multimarkdown gt via the Flat XML format fodt which is currently best supported by the OpenOffice version Libre Office 21 2 WHAT IS MULTIMARKDOWN 209 but would rather not composel4TEX documents MMD might be a good choice for you For web publishing of all kinds MMD outputs clean and semantically valid HTML5 What does that mean It means your titles will be defined into outline logical header depths your quotes will be blockquotes your tables will be clean and most importantly the output will be easy to apply CSS stylesheets to This will produce a result you can often just drop into your blogging software without any stripping of codes or fiddling with styles Currently the best tool for turning a MultiMarkdown document into an ePub book is to use the Pandoc document conversion engine From Scrivener com pile a plain MMD document to use as the source for this conversion Now for the sp
482. words from the panel and drop them into the keywords table in the inspector of the main window or onto the document in the binder corkboard or outliner If there is a multiple selection in the binder corkboard or outliner and the keywords are dropped onto one of the selected documents the keywords will be applied to all selected documents You don t have to use the keyword panel to create keywords of course you can also enter keywords directly into the keywords table in the inspector section 18 6 to ap ply them to the current document Note that whenever you apply keywords via the inspector they will automatically be added to the list in the panel if they are not already contained there so that the panel should always have a complete list of the keywords you are using in your project no matter how you have created them Keywords can be managed from the panel By changing the name of a keyword in the project keywords window all of the associated keywords in the project can be updated in the background You will be given a choice of doing this or creating a new keyword from the variant which won t be assigned to anything by default When removing keywords from the panel they will also be removed from all of the documents they had been assigned to To change the colour that represents the keyword double click on the colour chip to the right of the keyword The project keywords window also provides an easy way to search for keyword u
483. x a Using the above example text the output would be This is a index test test of advanced replacements 252 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Footnotes Remove footnotes Bport to RTF as Override font Times New Roman 10 Select Comments and Annotations V Remove inspector comments V Remove inline annotations m T i Figure 23 9 Compile Footnotes Comments Pane RTF 23 12 Footnotes Comments The Footnotes and Comments pane controls how these two forms of notation will be handled in the compile process or whether they should even appear at all Since there are two ways to add notes to documents linked or inline notes it is with some formats possible to treat them differently As with other areas of the application and documen tation the usage of the term footnote is equally applicable to endnote if the options to use endnotes have been applied The first section concerns itself with how footnotes should be arranged in the manuscript and the second section deals with inline annotations and linked comments Since not all of the available export formats support all available options some variants of the pane will appear differently than shown Figure 23 9 This option pane is a core feature available to all export formats except for FDX where footnotes are never used 23 12 1 Footnote Options Some formats do not support real footnotes or endnotes When using these formats Scrivener wi
484. x to a degree It makes them easier to move around because it makes lots of little things seem like one thing However a box is not the thing s you put into it This might seem like common sense but a lot of people wonder why they cannot open their zipped project backups in Scrivener The reason is simple so long as it is in a zip file it is not a Scrivener project You would not try an eat a candy bar that had been placed inside of a cardboard box To eat the candy bar you need to remove it from the box and probably from its own wrappings first The same goes for digital files that you store inside of a digital box They must be removed from that box before they can be used Once there you ll find a number of files named respectively with the projects they relate to After the project name there will be a sequence number or a date stamp It is best practice to select the backups you wish to check and copy them to a temporary location first The backup folder rotates content so copying a set out will ensure these backups do not get deleted by Scrivener s cleaning routine while you experiment To do so simply click and drag the selected zip files while holding down the Ctrl key and drop them some place convenient like your Desktop Locate the most recent backup and unzip it by double clicking on the zip file and dragging the project name scriv folder that you see to the Desktop Zipped projects cannot be opened directly in Sc
485. xed with chapter numbering and hash marks in between the sections as well those came from the Compiler too as a part of the manuscript preset This can all be changed or turned off entirely Notably the text you typed into the Wineries card will not be here That s because we moved it outside of the Draft folder The compile feature works exclusively with the Draft folder Well all right not entirely exclusively but that s a topic for another time 6 6 COMPILING THE DRAFT 41 Let s try one more thing Close your RTF document switch back to Scrivener and open up the compile window again Leave everything the same but this time click the down arrow button which appears to the right of the Format As drop down menu The full compile interface will appear and with that you ll be able to see just how much power is available Feel free to explore the interface and do a few test compiles to see how things change For example if you don t like the hashmark separator between scenes click on the Separators panel and change the first option Text Separator to something else Many of the options are self explanatory but if you find yourself confused over something read the relevant sections in the chapter on Compiling the Draft chapter 23 There is much more to learn but if you are in the middle of a major project and want to get started right away you should now know enough to make a simple outline and start writing c
486. y When in scriptwriting mode the top item in the Scriptwrit ing sub menu will be checked and will display the name of the format you are using This preferred format can be toggled on individual documents with Ctrl 4 By default the standard Screenplay format is selected and Scrivener is in scriptwrit ing mode If Script Mode Screenplay did not have the tick next to it then we would know that the current editor was not in scriptwriting mode that is it would be in nor mal prose mode for general writing You can more easily tell whether or not you are in scriptwriting mode by looking at the footer bar which will display various scriptwriting tools and hints rather than the standard word and character statistics display Addition ally the binder icon for that item will be tinted yellow with three hole punches on the side Scriptwriting mode is a setting which is individual to each document Once a docu ment has been toggled to scriptwriting mode it will remain that way until you change it Thus it is possible to have a standard document in one split for your notes while using scriptwriting mode in the second split to draft your work However it is not possible to use more than one type of script formatting in the same project This is a project level setting and so if you need to create a stage play and screenplay at the same time you will need to do the adaption in a tandem project At the bottom of the scriptwriting men
487. y and do not presently concern you in your writing and editing are hidden by the same virtue that hides these irrelevant texts from you the sheer bulk of your words z Inline notes exist around your text and do not depend upon it to exist This means you can edit the text that the note refers to freely without worrying about losing your comments This is in opposition to linked notes which are anchored to the 164 CHAPTER 17 ANNOTATIONS AND FOOTNOTES text if the text is removed or entirely altered the note will be deleted By corol lary inline note quantities can exceed the textual capacity of the base text For most authors this will not become an issue but in some fields such as qualitative data analysis where the amount of annotation can exceed the text running out of suitable anchor text could become a problem with linked notes Inline notes being unanchored have no limits These are just a few examples and hopefully that gives you an idea of the individual unique merits in these formats In some special cases using all four methods together will afford you with additional compile powers such as handling multiple note streams or using annotations as functional text and linked comments strictly as notes The next few sections will address each of these types in more depth 17 1 Inline Notation Scrivener sports a unique method for taking notes and indicating footnotes by placing them directly into the main text st
488. y as you type but some require you to terminate the word you are typing in before they will take action 15 7 2 Scriptwriting Auto Completion Scriptwriting mode by default engages a more aggressive auto completion method which scans as you type and looks for completions matching the behaviour of most scriptwriting programs on the market Most of the script formats that are shipped with Scrivener come stocked with many common phrases and abbreviations which will be contextually tied to the element you are currently working in For example MO MENTS LATER will appear whilst typing in a Scene Heading element but will not appear in a Dialogue element 15 8 Editing Multiple Documents The Scrivenings view mode View Scrivenings allows you to edit multiple text docu ments as though they were one long document This way you can write in small chunks and then combine them in any way you like to see how they work together For instance 156 CHAPTER 15 WRITING AND EDITING you might write lots of small scenes for a chapter and then edit them all together in an Scrivenings session to see how the chapter works as a whole When non text items are included in a Scrivenings session an uneditable grey bar will be inserted in the place where media would ordinarily be shown 15 8 1 Viewing Multiple Texts as One Document Scrivenings mode is like corkboard and outliner view modes another way to view mul tiple selections of docum
489. y behind a Snapshot is very simple You can think of it as a way of manually saving your file for future reference In a program like Scrivener which automatically saves your work as you work you lose the benefit of being able to work off the disk for a while and choosing at defined moments in time to either save what you ve done or discard it and return to what you have on the disk at the last save point Of course on the other hand if your computer crashes and as much as we try to avoid it sometimes Scrivener crashes too with an auto saving program you might only lose a few minutes of work or even nothing at all rather than everything you ve done since the last save Snapshots help you bridge the gap between these two ways of working It is like saving your document as you go the only difference is you get a record of each save point That means you can go back and examine the evolution of the file and pick out just the 15 6 USING SNAPSHOTS 153 right spot to restore from In the course of editing you might change your mind about something you deleted more than one save iteration ago With a traditional save as you go model you d be out of luck With Scrivener you can just go back through your Snapshot history find the point in time where the deleted passage still existed and copy and paste it back to the present or even just roll back the whole document to that spot What About Milestones In addition to this usage so
490. y capable of handling large amount of media some users have found it better to use database software in conjunction with Scrivener when gigabytes of data are involved There is no universal rule of thumb on upper limits this will be whatever you are com fortable with and how much available storage space you have in order to keep consistent backups If you have an 8GB project that means each backup will consume another 8GB maximum less if you use the slower zip archival option and will take as long to produce as it would to duplicate 8GB of data on your hard drive 7 2 Creating a New Project When you first start Scrivener you will be presented with the Project Templates window Figure 6 1 which also includes a handy Getting Started section You may hide or choose to reveal it again this at any time using the Options drop down menu in the lower left of this window In addition to providing an easy selection mechanism for new projects based on templates you can also create a blank new document open existing projects from your disk or select from a short list of recently opened projects To call up this window later on use the File New Project menu command or press Ctrl G Ctrl N Along the left side of the window are template categories A number of useful tem plates have been provided and it is easy to make your own as well The Options drop down menu provides template management tools To read more about creating a
491. you compile though some will be previewed for you in the mock editor below the button They will not be added to the binder items titles or adjust the base text itself and are thus useful for keeping clutter or awkward style choices like all caps out of the binder and editor Rather than putting Chapter lt n gt into every single chapter folder in the binder you can simply add that to the Prefix and be done with it never having to worry about renumbering after an extensive restructuring again 244 CHAPTER 23 COMPILING THE DRAFT Title Prefix and Suffix Case Prefix Chapter lt n gt Suffix Tam Figure 23 6 Title Prefix and Suffix tab The Title Prefix and Suffix tab Figure 23 6 handles the insertion of arbitrary text around the title of the binder item itself If you typed Test into the prefix field for folders and compiled a draft with a folder named Compiling with Prefixes then the final output would be Test Compiling with Prefixes In fact every folder included for compile would have Test in front of its binder name The suffix acts in a similar manner only adding text to the end of the title Changes made to the prefix and suffix fields can be viewed in the preview area after dismissing the Section Layout window One important thing to consider is that the title prefix and suffix entries will be printed even if the Title is disabled for that row This ca
492. ypesetting details for you There is one exception to that An option in the compiler can be set to attempt to convert rich text formatting to real plain text whitespace That is a paragraph with a 21 4 MMD AND SCRIVENER 211 full line of pseudo spacing after it will be converted to an actual empty newline Indents will become tabs so be careful with that one This option is mainly intended to be a convenience for people who are switching to MMD from a rich text environment and have a lot of existing material that is single line spaced However you could use this option to take advantage of rich text aesthetics while working in MMD if you wished When exporting via MultiMarkdown using any of the above methods all rich text formatting is completely cleaned from your draft as it passes through a plain text engine there is no need to clean up extraneous highlighting and other markings when working with MMD There are three exceptions 1 Any inline or linked images will be converted to MMD syntax and exported into the compile folder ready to use by the HTML Markdown plain and TEX for mats Any embedded images will be converted to MMD syntax and exported into the compile folder 2 Images that have been linked to using Scrivener Links will have the linked text replaced with the image name and the image itself exported to the compile folder Thus you can type custom image syntax into the document and still benefit from automatic reso

Scrivener 1.8 for Microsoft Windows

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents